01 Mar 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 4 FIQ-LEP-SG-V1 A 01 MAR 14 INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

NOTE: A vertical line in the outer margin of the page indicates the portion of the text affected by the changes.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original

. . . . 0

. . . . . 01 Oct 10 Change

. . . . 4

. . . . . 01 Mar 14 Change

. . . . 1

. . . . . 01 Jul 11 Change

. . . . 2

. . . . . 01 Jun 12 Change

. . . . 3

. . . . . 01 Jul 13

Page No. *Change No. Page No. *Change No. Page No. *Change No.

Title

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-28-1 – 1-28-4

. . . . . . . . 0 A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-29-1 – 1-29-6

. . . . . . . . 0 1-59-1 – 1-59-2

. . . . . . . . 0 i – iv

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-30-1 – 1-30-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-60-1 – 1-60-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-0-1 – 1-0-22

. . . . . . . 3 1-31-1 – 1-31-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-61-1 – 1-61-6

. . . . . . . . 3 1-1-1 – 1-1-16

. . . . . . . . 3 1-32-1 – 1-32-6

. . . . . . . . 4 1-62-1 – 1-62-30

. . . . . . . 3 1-2-1 – 1-2-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-33-1 – 1-33-8

. . . . . . . . 3 1-63-1 – 1-63-6

. . . . . . . . 3 1-3-1 – 1-3-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-34-1 – 1-34-10

. . . . . . . 3 1-64-1 – 1-64-38

. . . . . . . 3 1-4-1 – 1-4-6

. . . . . . . . 3 1-35-1 – 1-35-12

. . . . . . . 3 1-65-1 – 1-65-12

. . . . . . . 3 1-5-1 – 1-5-4

. . . . . . . . 3 1-36-1 – 1-36-8

. . . . . . . 3 1-66-1 – 1-66-16

. . . . . . . 3 1-6-1 – 1-6-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-37-1 – 1-37-12

. . . . . . . 3 1-67-1 – 1-67-2

. . . . . . . . 0 1-7-1 – 1-7-6

. . . . . . . . 0 1-38 -1– 1-38-6

. . . . . . . . 3 1-68-1 – 1-68-30

. . . . . . . 3 1-8-1 – 1-8-6

. . . . . . . . 3 1-39-1 – 1-39-24

. . . . . . . 0 1-69-1 – 1-69-28

. . . . . . . 3 1-9-1 – 1-9-6

. . . . . . . . 0 1-40-1 – 1-40-6

. . . . . . . . 1 1-70-1 – 1-70-6

. . . . . . . . 3 1-10-1 – 1-10-12

. . . . . . 0 1-41-1 – 1-41-4

. . . . . . . . 2 1-71-1 – 1-71-6

. . . . . . . . 2 1-11-1 – 1-11-2

. . . . . . . 0 1-42-1 – 1-42-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-72-1 – 1-72-32

. . . . . . . 3 1-12-1 – 1-12-4

. . . . . . . 0 1-43-1 – 1-43-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-73-1 – 1-73-16

. . . . . . . 3 1-13-1 – 1-13-4

. . . . . . . 0 1-44-1 – 1-44-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-74-1 – 1-74-10

. . . . . . . 3 1-14-1 – 1-14-6

. . . . . . . 0 1-45-1 – 1-45-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-75-1 – 1-75-6

. . . . . . . . 0 1-15-1 – 1-15-6

. . . . . . . 0 1-46-1 – 1-46-8

. . . . . . . . 1 1-76-1 – 1-76-4

. . . . . . . . 1 1-16-1 – 1-16-10

. . . . . . 0 1-47-1 – 1-47-6

. . . . . . . . 0 1-17-1 – 1-17-2

. . . . . . . 0 1-48-1 – 1-48-4

. . . . . . . . 1 1-18-1 – 1-18-6

. . . . . . . 0 1-49-1 – 1-49-6

. . . . . . . . 0 1-19-1 – 1-19-4

. . . . . . . 0 1-50-1 – 1-50-2

. . . . . . . . 0 1-20-1 – 1-20-4

. . . . . . . 4 1-51-1 – 1-51-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-21-1 – 1-21-4

. . . . . . . 0 1-52-1 – 1-52-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-22-1 – 1-22-4

. . . . . . . 0 1-53-1 – 1-53-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-23-1 – 1-23-10

. . . . . . 0 1-54-1 – 1-54-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-24-1 – 1-24-2

. . . . . . . 0 1-55-1 – 1-55-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-25-1 – 1-25-6

. . . . . . . 0 1-56-1 – 1-56-4

. . . . . . . . 0 1-26-1 – 1-26-6

. . . . . . . 0 1-57-1 – 1-57-4

. . . . . . . . 3 1-27-1 – 1-27-4

. . . . . . . 0 1-58-1 – 1-58-4

. . . . . . . . 3

Summary of Changes:

1. Updated FIQ-C026 and FIQ-C835 lessons.

* Zero in this column indicates an original page. 

### LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGESKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 i 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Engineer Initial Qualification (FIQ) Course

Table of Contents – Student Guide (Volume I)

Volume Course Introduction FIQ-INT 1-0-1

Flight Engineer Initia l Qualification Course Introduction FIQ-G840 1-1-1

Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons FIQ-C842 1-2-1

Aircraft General FIQ-C001 1-3-1
Fire Protection System FIQ-C003 1-4-1
Lighting System FIQ-C029 1-5-1
Auxiliary Power Unit FIQ-C004 1-6-1
Electrical System FIQ-C005 1-7-1
Aircraft Fuel System FIQ-C013 1-8-1

Air Refueling System FIQ-C043 1-9-1
Systems IGR I FIQ-I018 1-10-1
FTD Systems I FIQ-T301 1-11-1

Power Plant FIQ-C014 1-12-1
Hydraulic System FIQ-C006 1-13-1
Landing Gear System FIQ-C009 1-14-1
Flight Controls FIQ-C007 1-15-1
Systems IGR II FIQ-I035 1-16-1
FTD Systems II FIQ-T302 1-17-1
Communication Systems FIQ-C010 1-18-1
Pneumatic System FIQ-C012 1-19-1
Air Conditioning System FIQ-C026 1-20-1
Pressurization System FIQ-C008 1-21-1KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 ii 01 OCT 10 Ice and Rain Protection System FIQ-C011 1-22-1
Systems IGR III FIQ-I036 1-23-1
FTD Systems III FIQ-T303 1-24-1
Flight Instrument System FIQ-C015 1-25-1
Cabin Doors (Optional) FIQ-C025 1-26-1
Emergency Equipment FIQ-C002 1-27-1
Oxygen System FIQ-C028 1-28-1
Emergency Ground Egress FIQ-V059 1-29-1

Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance FIQ-C832 1-30-1

Takeoff Performance Charts FIQ-C833 1-31-1
KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation FIQ-C835 1-32-1

Performance Workshop I – TRT TOLD Card FIQ-E844 1-33-1
Performance Workshop II – Reduced Thrust TOLD Card FIQ-E845 1-34-1

KC-10 Aircraft Orientation (with Pilot) FIQ-A841 1-35-1
Cargo/Passenger Operations FIQ-G020 1-36-1
Performance Workshop III – MTOGW TOLD Card FIQ-E846 1-37-1

Performance Workshop IV – V1 = V MCG TOLD Card FIQ-E847 1-38-1

Flight Management System (FMS) FIQ-M800 1-39-1
Navigation Systems FIQ-C016 1-40-1
Introduction to the Flight Guidance System FIQ-C078 1-41-1
Flight Guidance System – Autothrottle FIQ-C079 1-42-1
Flight Guidance System I FIQ-C080 1-43-1
Flight Guidance System II FIQ-C081 1-44-1
Flight Guidance System Procedures Integration FIQ-C082 1-45-1
FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection FIQ-C300 1-46-1
FE Interior Inspection I FIQ-C302 1-47-1KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 iii 01 OCT 10 FE Interior Inspection II FIQ-C303 1-48-1
FE Interior Inspection III FIQ-C304 1-49-1
FTD-304 FE Interior Inspection FIQ-T304 1-50-1
Engine Start Procedures FIQ-C308 1-51-1

Before Takeoff Procedures FIQ-C309 1-52-1

Takeoff Procedures FIQ-C320 1-53-1

Climb/Cruise Procedures FIQ-C330 1-54-1

Descent Procedures FIQ-C351 1-55-1
Approach Procedures FIQ-C352 1-56-1
Landing/Missed Approach Procedures FIQ-C361 1-57-1
After Landing Procedures FIQ-C371 1-58-1

FTD-305 FE Interior Inspection FIQ-T305 1-59-1

FTD-306 Normal Procedures FIQ-T306 1-60-1

FTD Mission 1 FIQ-T601 1-61-1
Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) FIQ-E852 1-62-1

FTD Mission 2 FIQ-T602 1-63-1
Performance Workshop V – Climb/Cruise/Hold/AR/ Descent/Flight Planning FIQ-E848 1-64-1

FTD Mission 3 FIQ-T603 1-65-1

FTD Mission 4 FIQ-T604 1-66-1

FTD-307 FE Interior Inspection FIQ-T307 1-67-1
FGS Mission Exercise (McGuire) FIQ-F856 1-68-1
FGS Mission Exercise (Travis) FIQ-F857 1-69-1
Tanker Air Refueling Procedures FIQ-C505 1-70-1
Receiver Air Refueling Procedures FIQ-C504 1-71-1
Performance Workshop VI - Approach and Landing Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/Wing Air Refueling Pods FIQ-E851 1-72-1KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-TOC-SG-V1 iv 01 OCT 10 Performance Workshop VII – CFCC/Tire Limiting Speed/Max Braking Speed FIQ-E849 1-73-1

Performance Workshop VIII – Obstacle TOLD Card FIQ-E850 1-74-1

Electrical Abnormal Procedures I FIQ-C311 1-75-1
Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures FIQ-C322 1-76-1KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-1 01 JUL 13 

# Volume I Introduction

Introduction The following information provides an overview of the KC-10 Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course.

This Student Guide provides all the info rmation needed to complete the KC-10 Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course, (FIQ) . This Introduction contains a Course Management Flow Chart, Daily Training Sc hedule, and Summary of Resources per Student.

The course is designed for mature, responsib le and motivated crewmembers. It contains the necessary educational information and trai ning requirements to ensure that students are taught the essential skills and knowledge needed to perform their duti es in the KC-10.

Required tasks performed in the KC -10 will be taught to either fam iliarity or proficiency as needed to prepare you for Phase IB flight line tr aining with the Formal Tr aining Unit (FTU). Each lesson has objectives for skill and k nowledge development to prepare you for successfully performing the required task and/or acquire the necessary knowledge to operate the KC-10.

In general, you may proceed at own pace. Howe ver, there is a maxi mum completion time since some lessons are prerequisite to scheduled activities. You may work with others, as desired, and use resources as needed. Each Computer Based Training (CBT) lesson or lesson series, i.e. Flight Guidance System (FGS), requires completion of an end-of-lesson test, requiring a passing score of 85%. A ll missed questions require remediation and successful retest of that subject in order to complete the lesson and return to the CBT lesson menu to start the next CBT or log off.

You will be given a tour of the Learning Cent er where you become familiar with the CBT system and learn how to operat e the equipment. There will always be an instructor available to assist you as you take the CB T lessons. Every effort should be made to maintain the equipment and programs in the best possible operating condition.

Each subject is made up of one or more lessons with each lesson having at least one objective and its related study assignment. Le ssons may contain lesson quizzes, related exercises, and end of lesson test s. Your compliance with lesson preparation, review, and testing requirements are essential to successful completion of this course.

Grades on FTD and Simulator missions are recor ded on individual grade sheets. You must demonstrate familiarity or prof iciency of the required performance objectives to complete the course requirements. The required level of perform ance for each graded mission is listed on the mission grade sheet.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-2 01 JUL 13 The focus throughout this course is to ensure you receive the best quality training available. You should ask for help from an instructor if you have any questions about the training received, information provided, or training equipment.



### Concept of Training The approach used in this course fully integrat es academic with performance training. The knowledge acquired from academic lessons are applied and practiced to achieve the desired level of performance for each task.

The academic portion of the c ourse uses a combination of CBT, Flight Management System Emulation Trainers (FETs), workbooks, reading assignments, workshops, instructor guided reviews, and lectures. Although most le ssons are self-paced, you must accomplish them in the scheduled sequence to provide cont inuity and a building block foundation for subsequent lessons. Performance tasks requiri ng skill development are trained using static aircraft, Aircraft Systems Trainers (ASTs), F light Training Device s (FTDs), and flight simulators. You may keep all course books issued by the ATS contractor.

Instruction begins with lessons on aircraft syst ems, followed by fli ght operating systems, which include the Flight Management System (F MS) and FGS. The instruction will include all aspects of flying the KC-10 from mission preparation, pre-fli ght, normal ground and flight operations, to abnormal and emergency procedur es. Air refueling training will be accomplished as both a tanker and receiver. You immediately reinforce procedures learned in academic CBT lessons by practicing t hem in a performance-tr aining device. The reduced time lapse between related academ ic and performance training objectives enhances training effectiveness. Principles of Crew Resource Management (CRM) are integrated into the academic trai ning and simulator mission profiles.

Upon completion of your simulator training, a mi ssion is set aside for USAF Flight Examiner administered evaluation. You are evaluated on normal, air refueling, abnormal and emergency procedures for aircraft system failu res or malfunctions, and Crew Resource Management.

Upon successful completion of your USAF Eval uation, four post-evaluation missions are set aside to familiarize you with mission planning, taxiing, formation flying and tactics prior to arriving at the Formal Training Unit (FTU). During these post-eval uation missions, because of the designed program overl ap capability, you will either accomplish them with your assigned training partner, a s quadron-provided or Contract Pilot or Flight Engineer Instructor seat-filler, or Pilot/Flight Engineer Instructor Course (PIC/FIC) candidates whose training classes overlap with yours.

Mission Planning:

You will mission plan S801 and S802 as a crew to gai n proficiency in this task. However, because of the formation complexity of S803 and S804, canned mission planning data will be provided.

If ACIQ/PIQ students are overlapped with a cl ass of PIC candidates, ACIQ students willKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-3 01 JUL 13 complete the formation briefing guide for S803 and S804, along with accomplishing the formation briefings. For PIQ students who are overlapped with PIC candidates, the PIC candidate will complete each formation briefing guide while providing you instruction on how to do so. He/she will also demonstrate the proper way to brief formations.

Below is a breakdown of the possible pilot and flight engineer combinations for completing these four post-evaluation missions:



### Post-Evaluation Missions and Possible Training Course Overlap Scenarios.

Note: The following information covers the most common personnel overlap and training scenarios. When unforeseen circum stances arise, each site manager and scheduler will administer them individually to ensure all required training events are accomplished.

Flight Engineers:

1. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs without FIC Overlap: Under this circumstance, you will accomplis h the S801 through S804 profiles occupying the flight engineer’s seat and being taught by a Contract Flight Engineer Instructor.

2. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs Overlapped with FIC Candidates: If overlapped with FIC candidates, PIQ/F IQ missions S801 and S802 will still be accomplished by you and a Contra ct Flight Engineer Instructor. However, for S803 and S804, FIC candidates will overl ap with your training and act as instructors during both missions.

For one FIQ student paired wit h one FIC candidate, you will accomplish both S803 and S804 in the flight engineer’s seat, while being instructed by the FIC candidate.

For one FIQ student paired with two FIC candi dates, both FIC candidates will ride along with you for S803 and S804. One FIC candidat e will instruct the first half of each mission and the other FIC candidate will inst ruct the second half. The idle FIC candidate will occupy the simulator jump seat and observe.

Pilots:

1. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs wi th an Assigned Training Partner: If accomplished with assigned training partners, student A will occupy the left seat for S801 and S803. Student B will occupy the left seat for S802 and S804. The left seat student, in each case and all student pairings, ac ts as the aircraft commander and is in command for his/her respective missions.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-4 01 JUL 13 2. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs wi th a Squadron-Provided Seat-Filler: If accomplished with a squadron-provided seat-fille r, pilots will alternate seats for the mission profiles. For S801 and S803, student A will occupy the left seat and act as aircraft commander. For S802 and S804, Student A will occupy the right seat. In all scenarios, the squadron-provi ded seat-filler will act as a real-time crewmember and together, will work with the crew to complete each mission.

3. Accomplishing Post-Evaluation WSTs Overlapped with PIC Candidates: If overlapped with PIC candidates, missions S801 and S802 will still be accomplished by assigned pilot training partners (or provided seat-filler) as indicat ed above. However, for the remaining two missions, PIQ prof iles S803 and S804 will be accomplished with a PIC candidate acting as a training partner in the simulator.

ACIQ students, for missions S803 and S804, will occupy the left seat on both and the guest PIC candidate will oversee the student’s mission planning, briefing, and training events while flying each mission from the right seat. The assigned pilot training partner (if applicable) will do the same in a diffe rent WST (depending on PIC pairing) and be overseen by the other PIC candidate.

PIQ students will occupy the right seat for S803 and the left seat for S804 while a guest PIC candidate will act as both instructor and ai rcraft commander in the opposite seat. Again, the assigned pilot training partner (if applicable) will accomplish the same, depending upon PIC pairing.

Together, PIQ students and PIC c andidates will work as integral crews in the same manner expected on upcoming FTU sorties.

Purposes of Overlapped Traini ng with the PIC/FIC Program:

The overall purposes of combining your traini ng with the PIC/FIC program are to familiarize you and the new instructor candidates with typica l instructor/student interactions, familiarize you with upcoming taxi and formation procedures , provide valuable instruction from linetested, experienced pilots and flight engineers in an operational setting, and provide realtime instructional opportunities for instructor candidates to hone their skills prior to arriving on the flight line. Accomplishing these activiti es in the simulator prior to attending FTU will help ensure a smooth transition to the flight line for each student and increase efficiency of FTU sorties.

Fuel conservation is a very important issue because of rising fuel co sts, however, flight plans and data for this training program may not reflect fuel conservation procedures because of training objectives of the individual lessons.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-5 01 JUL 13 Course constraints and assumptions include:

• Normal Initial Qualification class includes two Pilot students, and one FE student.

• Five consecutive training days are followed by two days off.

• A maximum of two FTDs per training day.

• FE FTDs (T300/T800 series) are scheduled for one FE student.

• FTDs requiring all crewmembers are the T600 series.

• All simulator missions S701 to S720 and S 801 to S804 require the Pilot and Flight Engineer students.

• CRM is scheduled on training day 26 with Pilot, FE, and Boom Operator Initial Qualification students.

• An Air Force administered simulator evaluation on training day 49.

• Post-evaluation activities on training days 50 through 54.



### Student Guide Contents The following pages provide you with a Course Management Flow Chart, Daily Training Schedule, and Summary of Resources (per student).

The Course Management Flow Chart provides a schedule by media type per training day. A space is available to write in the calendar date, if desired. T he lessons are identified with a media identifier and number. The m edia identifiers are as follows:

A Ground Aircraft C Computer-Based Training (CBT) E Workshop/Exercise F Flight Management System (F MS) Emulation Trainer (FET) G Briefing I Instructor-Guided Review (IGR) J Aircraft Systems Trainer (AST) M Mediated Interactive Lecture S Simulator T Flight Training Device (FTD) V Video Tape W Workbook

For example, T301 is the FE Interior In spection Flight Training Device lesson.

The Daily Training Schedule puts the daily requi rements in the order you are expected to complete the lessons/training events. The lesson times are approximate and serve as a guide for scheduling daily events.

The Student Guide is arranged in the order shown on the schedule provided within this guide (and duplicated in Volume II). Volume I is organized from training day 1 through 19. Volume II covers training days 20 through 54. A ll lessons regardless of type of instruction are arranged in this order. A Flight Engi neer workbook set is published separately.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-6 01 JUL 13 

### Workbooks There are fourteen required workbooks in this course.

W001 - Flying the KC-10 W083 - Flight Guidance System W831 - Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance W834 - Takeoff and Landing Data W836 - Climb, Cruise, and Holding Data W837 - KC-10 Air Refueling Performance W838 - Descent, Approach, and Landing Data W839 - Driftdown W840 - Flight Plan Mission Forms W843 - Air Refueling Terminology W844 - Touch and Go Landings W845 - Low Visibility Approach and Landing W850 - Mission Planning W853 - TERPS

Workbooks include readings, graphics, problems, and exercises that prepare you for subsequent academic CBT and works hop lessons. Although time is allotted in the training schedule to review workbooks, you are encour aged to begin reading these early in the schedule. Specific instructions for lesson pr eparation are included in the first chapter of each workbook and at the beginning of each lesson. In some cases, you are not required to complete the workbook in its entirety, but only complete specific portions.

All performance workbooks provide supplemental information for the classroom workshops; you only need to review the problems and exercise s, as well as the provided answers. The specific performance workshops will cover all the procedures you are required to accomplish.



### CRM A separate CRM Coursebook prov ides the information for t he CRM workshop. Reading assignments are included in the daily schedule for your preparation.



### Required Course Materials The Contractor will issue the following materials to you:

• KC-10 Flight Engineer Initia l Qualification Student Guide

• KC-10 Flight Engineer Workbooks

• Crew Resource Management Coursebook

• KC-10 Instrument Panel Oilskins (Pilot and FE)

• FMS CDU Page Flow Diagrams

• KC-10 Tactics HandoutKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-7 01 JUL 13 You should be issued the following materials by their squadrons prior to the course starting:

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Basic Flight Manual

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-1, Em ergency Procedures Checklist

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2, Normal Procedures Checklist

• AF Form 4087, KC-10 CG Graph

• AFI 11-2KC-10, Vol 3, KC-10 Operations

• T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-5, Air Re fueling Procedures Checklist

• ATP-56(B), Air-to-Air Refuelling

Note: Inform your Instructor if these items were not issued.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-8 01 JUL 13 

### Course Management Flow Chart

Date

TNG DAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

MIL/ BRF G840 G020 M800

WB W831
W834 W083 W836 W837

VIDEO V059

CBT C842 C001 C003 C029 C004 C005 C013 C043 C014 C006 C009 C007 C010 C012 C026 C008 C011 C015 C025 1 C002 C028 C832 C833 C835 C016 C078 C079 C080 C081 C082 C300 C302 C303 C304

IGR I018 I035 I036

FET/
AST

ACFT A841

EXER E844
E845 E846 E847

FTD T301 T302 T303

SIM

1 OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-9 01 JUL 13 Date

TNG DAY 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

MIL/ BRF

WB W840 W853 W838 W843 CRM 1/2 W844

VIDEO

CBT C308 C309 C320 C330 C351 C352 C361 C371 C505 C504 C311
C322

IGR

FET/
AST F856/
F857

ACFT

EXER E852 E848 E851 E849 E850

FTD T304 T305
T306 T601 T602 T603 T604 T307

SIM

1 OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-10 01 JUL 13

Date

TNG DAY 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

MIL/ BRF

WB W001 CRM 2/2 W839

VIDEO

CBT C331 C341
C342 C503
C507
C343
C353

IGR

FET/
AST J421
J422

ACFT

EXER E001
E570

FTD T308
T605 T309 T606

SIM S701 S702 S703 S704 S705 S706

1 OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-11 01 JUL 13

Date

TNG DAY 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

MIL/ BRF

WB W845

VIDEO

CBT C362 C372 C508
C509 C510
C511
C512
C515
C516 C517
C500
C321
C810

IGR
FET/
AST J423

ACFT

EXER

FTD T310 T607 T311
T312 T608

SIM S707 S708 S709 S710 S711 S712

1 OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-12 01 JUL 13 Date

TNG DAY 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

MIL/ BRF

WB W850

VIDEO

CBT C513 C514 C518

IGR

FET/
AST

ACFT

EXER E049
E854

FTD T313 T314
T609 T315 T316 T317

SIM S713 S714 S715 S716 S717 S718 S719 S720

1 OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-13 01 JUL 13 Date

TNG DAY 51 52 53 54

MIL/ BRF

WB

VIDEO

CBT

IGR
FET/
AST

ACFT

EXER

FTD T801 T802 T803 T804

SIM S801 S802 S803 S804

1 OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-14 01 JUL 13 

### Daily Training Schedule

LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

DAY 1 FIQ-G840 Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course Introduction 2.0

FIQ-C842 Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons 0.3 FIQ-C001 Aircraft General 1.0 FIQ-C003 Fire Protection System 1.0 FIQ-C029 Lighting System 0.7 FIQ-C004 Auxiliary Power Unit 1.0 6.0 DAY 2 FIQ-C005 Electrical System 2.0 FIQ-C013 Aircraft Fuel System 1.8 FIQ-C043 Air Refueling System 1.0 FIQ-I018 Systems IGR I 2.0 6.8 DAY 3 FIQ-T301 FTD Systems I 1.0 FIQ-C014 Power Plant 1.0 FIQ-C006 Hydraulic System 1.3 FIQ-C009 Landing Gear System 1.0 FIQ-C007 Flight Controls 1.5 FIQ-I035 Systems IGR II 2.0 7.8 DAY 4 FIQ-T302 FTD Systems II 1.0 FIQ-C010 Communication Systems 1.3 FIQ-C012 Pneumatic System 1.0 FIQ-C026 Air Conditioning System 1.0 FIQ-C008 Pressurization System 1.0 FIQ-C011 Ice and Rain Protection System 0.7 FIQ-I036 Systems IGR III 2.0 8.0 DAY 5 FIQ-T303 FTD Systems III 1.0 FIQ-C015 Flight Instruments 1.0 FIQ-C025 Cabin Doors (Optional) 1.0* FIQ-C002 Emergency Equipment 0.5 FIQ-C028 Oxygen System 0.5 FIQ-V059 Emergency Ground Egress 1.0 FIQ-W831 Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook 1.5

FIQ-W834 Takeoff and Landing Data 1.5 8.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-15 01 JUL 13 LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

DAY 6 FIQ-C832 Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance 1.0 FIQ-C833 Takeoff Performance Charts 1.0 FIQ-C835 KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation 2.0

FIQ-E844 Performance Workshop I - TRT TOLD Card 2.0 FIQ-E845 Performance Workshop II – Reduced Thrust 2.0 8.0 DAY 7 FIQ-A841 KC-10 Aircraft Orientation 4.0 FIQ-G020 Cargo/Passenger Operations 1.0 FIQ-E846 Performance Workshop III – MTOGW TOLD Card 3.0

8.0 DAY 8 FIQ-E847 Performance Workshop IV – V1 = V MCG TOLD Card 2.0

FIQ-M800 Flight Management System (FMS) 4.0 FIQ-W083 FGS Workbook 1.5 7.5 DAY 9 FIQ-C016 Navigation Systems 1.0 FIQ-C078 Introduction to Flight Guidance System 0.8 FIQ-C079 Flight Guidance System - Autothrottle 1.0 FIQ-C080 Flight Guidance System I 1.3 FIQ-C081 Flight Guidance System II 1.2 FIQ-W836 Climb, Cruise, and Holding Data Workbook 1.5 6.8 DAY 10 FIQ-C082 Flight Guidance System Procedures Integration 1.0 FIQ-C300 FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 1.7 FIQ-C302 FE Interior Inspection I 1.0 FIQ-C303 FE Interior Inspection II 1.0 FIQ-C304 FE Interior Inspection III 1.0 FIQ-W837 Air Refueling Performance Workbook 1.5 7.2 DAY 11 FIQ-T304 FTD-304 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 FIQ-C308 Engine Start Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C309 Before Takeoff Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C320 Takeoff Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C330 Climb/Cruise Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C351 Descent Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C352 Approach Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C361 Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C371 After Landing Procedures 0.5 FIQ-W840 Flight Plan Mission Forms 1.5 7.5KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-16 01 JUL 13 LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

DAY 12 FIQ-T305 FTD-305 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 FIQ-T306 FTD-306 FE Normal Procedures 2.0 FIQ-W853 TERPS - FE Workbook 1.5 5.5 DAY 13 FIQ-T601 FTD Mission 1 3.5 FIQ-E852 TERPS 4.0 7.5 DAY 14 FIQ-T602 FTD Mission 2 3.5 FIQ-E848 Performance Workshop V - Climb/Cruise/ Hold/AR/Descent/Flight Planning 3.5

FIQ-W838 Descent, Approach, and Landing Data 1.5 8.5 DAY 15 FIQ-T603 FTD Mission 3 7.0 7.0 DAY 16 FIQ-T604 FTD Mission 4 7.0 7.0 DAY 17 FIQ-T307 FTD-307 FE Interior Inspection 2.0FIQF856/F857 FGS Mission Exercise (Travis/McGuire) 2.0

FIQ-C505 Tanker AR Procedures 1.0 FIQ-C504 Receiver AR Procedures 0.7 FIQ-W843 Air Refueling Terminology 1.0 CRM-IT CRM Reading Assignment (1/2) 1.0
7.7 DAY 18 FIQ-E851 Performance Workshop VI – Approach and Landing Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/Wing Air Refueling Pods 6.0

FIQ-W844 Touch and Go Landing 1.5 7.5 DAY 19 FIQ-E849 Performance Workshop VII - CFCC/Tire Limiting Speed/Max Braking Speed 2.5

FIQ-E850 Performance Workshop VIII – Obstacle TOLD Card 3.5

FIQ-C311 Electrical Abnormal Procedures I 1.0 FIQ-C322 Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures 0.8 7.8 DAY 20 FIQ-S701 Simulator Mission 1 7.0 7.0 DAY 21 FIQ-S702 Simulator Mission 2 7.0 7.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-17 01 JUL 13 LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

DAY 22 FIQ-J421 AST-J421 Abnormal Procedures 2.0 FIQ-C331 Fuel Abnormal Procedures 0.8 FIQ-J422 AST-J422 Abnormal Procedures 2.0 FIQ-W001 Flying the KC-10 1.5 6.3 DAY 23 FIQ-T308 FTD-308 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 FIQ-C341 Power Plant Abnormal Procedures I 1.0 FIQ-C342 Flight Controls Abnormal Procedures 1.0 FIQ-T605 FTD Mission 5 3.5 7.5 DAY 24 FIQ-S703 Simulator Mission 3 7.0 CRM-IT CRM Reading Assignment (2/2) 1.0 8.0 DAY 25 FIQ-S704 Simulator Mission 4 7.0 7.0 DAY 26 FIQ-T309 FTD-309 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 FIQ-E001 Crew Resource Management Workshop 4.0 FIQ-E570 Performance Review Workshop 2.0 8.0 DAY 27 FIQ-S705 Simulator Mission 5 7.0 7.0 DAY 28 FIQ-S706 Simulator Mission 6 7.0 7.0 DAY 29 FIQ-C503 Receiver AR Emergency and Abnormal Procedures 0.5

FIQ-C507 Tanker AR Emergency and Abnormal Procedures 0.5

FIQ-T606 FTD Mission 6 3.5 FIQ-C343 Power Plant Abnormal Procedures II 0.5 FIQ-C353 Hydraulic/Flight Control Abnormal Procedures 1.0 FIQ-W839 Driftdown 1.5 7.5 DAY 30 FIQ-T310 FTD-310 FE Interior Inspection 2.0 FIQ-J423 AST-J423 Abnormal Procedures 2.0 FIQ-C362 Power Plant/Abort/Landing Gear Abnormal and Emergency Procedures 0.7

FIQ-C372 Hydraulics Abnormal and Emergency Procedures I 1.0

FIQ-C508 Electrical/Pressurization Abnormal and Emergency Procedures 1.0

FIQ-C509 Fire/Smoke/Miscellaneous Emergency Procedures 0.5

7.2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-18 01 JUL 13 LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

DAY 31 FIQ-T607 FTD Mission 7 6.0 FIQ-W845 Low Visibility Approach and Landing 1.0 7.0 DAY 32 FIQ-S707 Simulator Mission 7 7.0 7.0 DAY 33 FIQ-S708 Simulator Mission 8 7.0 7.0 DAY 34 FIQ-S709 Simulator Mission 9 7.0 7.0 DAY 35 FIQ-C510 Anti-Ice/Windshield Abnormal Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C511 Pneumatics Abnormal and Emergency Procedures 0.7

FIQ-T311 FTD-311 2.0 FIQ-C512 Electrical Abnormal Procedures II 1.0 FIQ-T312 FTD-312 2.0 FIQ-C515 Hydraulics Abnormal and Emergency Procedures II 0.4

FIQ-C516 Flight Controls/Auto Flight/Flight Inst Abnormal Procedures 0.8

7.4 DAY 36 FIQ-C517 Power Plant Abnormal and Emergency Procedures 1.5

FIQ-T608 FTD Mission 8 3.5 FIQ-C500 Adverse Weather Procedures 2.0 FIQ-C321 Takeoff Windshear Procedures 0.5 FIQ-C810 Landing Windshear Procedures 0.5 8.0 DAY 37 FIQ-S710 Simulator Mission 10 7.0 7.0 DAY 38 FIQ-S711 Simulator Mission 11 7.0 7.0 DAY 39 FIQ-S712 Simulator Mission 12 7.0 7.0 DAY 40 FIQ-C513 Fire/Smoke Abnormal and Emergency Procedures 1.0

FIQ-C514 Miscellaneous Abnormal and Emergency Procedures 0.7

FIQ-C518 Landing Gear Abnormal Procedures 0.7 FIQ-T313 FTD-313 2.0 4.4 DAY 41 FIQ-T314 FTD-314 2.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-19 01 JUL 13 LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

FIQ-T609 FTD Mission 9 3.5 5.5 DAY 42 FIQ-S713 Simulator Mission 13 4.0 FIQ-T315 FTD-315 3.0 7.0 DAY 43 FIQ-S714 Simulator Mission 14 7.0 7.0 DAY 44 FIQ-S715 Simulator Mission 15 7.0 7.0 DAY 45 FIQ-S716 Simulator Mission 16 4.0 FIQ-T316 FTD-316 3.0 7.0 DAY 46 FIQ-S717 Simulator Mission 17 4.0 FIQ-T317 FTD-317 3.0 7.0 DAY 47 FIQ-S718 Simulator Mission 18 7.0 7.0 DAY 48 FIQ-S719 Simulator Mission 19 7.0 7.0 DAY 49 FIQ-S720 Simulator Mission 20 - Evaluation 7.0 FIQ-W850 Mission Planning Workbook 1.0 8.0 DAY 50 FIQ-E049 Portable Flight Planning System Workshop 4.0 FIQ-E854 Post-Eval Mission Planning Exercise 3.0 7.0 DAY 51 FIQ-T801 FTD-801 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 FIQ-S801 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 1 6.0 7.0 DAY 52 FIQ-T802 FTD-802 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 FIQ-S802 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 2 6.0 7.0 DAY 53 FIQ-T803 FTD-803 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 FIQ-S803 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 3 6.0 7.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-20 01 JUL 13 LESSON ID LESSON TITLE DURATION DATE TIME

DAY 54 FIQ-T804 FTD-804 FE Interior Inspection 1.0 FIQ-S804 Post-Eval Simulator Mission 4 6.0 7.0

Notes:

* = OptionalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-21 01 JUL 13 

### FIQ Summary of Resources (Per Student)

Media Average Time (Hours) No. of Events Total Time (Hours)

Training Days 54

A = ACFT 4.0 1 4.0

C = CBT 0.9 69 62.9

E = EXR 3.2 13 41.5

F = FET 2.0 1 2.0

G = PRB 1.5 2 3.0

I = IGR 2.0 3 6.0

J = AST 2.0 3 6.0

M = MIL 4.0 1 4.0

S = WST 6.5 24 155.0

T = FTD 2.6 30 79.0

V = VID 1.0 1 1.0

W = WBK 1.5 15 21.5

TOTAL 163 385.9KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-INT-SG-V1 1-0-22 01 JUL 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



# Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course Introduction

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lecture provides an orientat ion of the KC-10 training program and facilities. It introduces you to t he KC-10 mission and your role as a KC-10 crewmember and explains the course c ontent and sequence of training. Since there is no evaluation of the material in this course introduction, no objectives are defined other than described here as the purpose of this lesson.



### II. Duration

- 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course Introduction B. AFI 11-2KC-10, Volume 1



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qua lification Course Introduction Student Guide B. Classroom Pres entation System C. Whiteboard, markers, and eraser D. AMC Video, TV



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Read Student Lecture Text (time permitting)

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



# Pilot/Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Course Introduction

Student Lecture Text

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Instructor Introduction

B. Purpose statement

Congratulations on your selection to fl y the KC-10. In this lesson you are introduced to the KC-10 Initia l Qualification Course. Fo llowing a brief orientation to the KC-10 program, you will watch a video on Air Mobility Command. Your duties and responsibilities as a KC -10 crewmember and general crew coordination are then discussed. Finally, t he initial qualificat ion course will be described, and the lesson will conclude with a tour of the Learni ng Center facility.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Orientation

For your orientation to the KC-10 trai ning program, we will make introductions, discuss the role of the KC-1 0 Aircrew Training System (ATS) contractor, provide general information and requirements, and cover learning center procedures.

1. Student/Instructor Introduction.

a. Purpose . Provide background information.

2. The Contractor’s Role in the Training Program

Let’s look at the organization, f unction, and interface between the contractor and the Air Force.

a. KC-10 ATS Contractor. The KC-10 ATS contractor provides contract instruct ors, scheduling, maintenance support for all training devices and equipment, and training material. The contractor is responsible for Phase IA (simulator) portion of Initial Qualification.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(1) Training System Support Center (TSSC). The TSSC is located in Fairfield CA, close to Travis AFB. The TSSC manages the operation and maintenance of the KC-10 ATS. The TS SC is responsible for designing, developing, updat ing, and maintaining KC10 courseware. The TSSC also provides engineering, maintenance, and logistical support for the Flight Training Devices (FTDs), f light simulators, and Boom Operator Trainers (BOTs).

(2) Training Sites. The contractor has training sites at McGuire AFB, NJ and Travis AFB, CA to administer the Phase 1A portion of KC-10 Initial Qualification training.

b. Air Force Interface . The Air Force provides a level of management designed to oversee contractor performance and provide funding and suppor t for the training system.

(1) DET 1, AMCAOS . DET 1, AMCAOS is co-located with the TSSC in Fairfiel d, CA. DET 1 provides technical content reviews of all KC-10 ATS courseware and certifies training devices for use.

(2) HQ AMC/A3TK

. Manages KC-10 training for AMC.

(3) AFLCMC/WNSK. Located at Wright-Patterson AFB, OH is the Air Force progr am management office for the KC-10 ATS Contractor.

(4) Unit Flying Training . The Air Force conducts flying training for Phase IB portion of Initial Qualification, Phase II Mission Qualific ation, and Continuation Training.

3. General Information and Requirements

a. Phone Numbers.

(1) Office

. (a) McGuire AFB, NJ: 609-723-6070

(b) Travis AFB, CA: 707-437-8574

(2) Instructors

.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

b. Uniform

. Flightsuit.

c. Emergencies . Notify your instructor or training administrator immediately in case of an emergency.

d. Registration . Complete the KC-10 ATS Information Form TR-007. If you have not received the Student Information form, let your instructor know during the course introduction. Completing the student informati on form pre-registers you in the Learning Center Network for taking computer-based lessons. You’ll be provided your personal ID and password to continue into Learning Managem ent System (LMS). This allows the system to keep tabs on your progress and performance in the Computer-Based Training (CBT) lessons.

e. Required Course Materials . Ensure you have all of the required course materials issu ed by the contractor and the Air Force. A list of required co urse materials is included in the first section of the Student Guide.

2. Learning Center

The KC-10 Initial Qualification Cour se CBT lessons are taught in the Learning Center. FTDs and Simulators are in separate rooms within the training site.

a. Hours . The learning center is staffed from 0700 to 1700 weekdays. You may use the Learning Center after hours and on weekends with prior c oordination through your instructor or site administrator.

b. Layout

. (1) Restroom Locations

. (2) Building Entries and Exits

.

c. Learning Center Rules and Procedures.

(1) Smoking Policy . Smoking is only allowed in designated areas outside the building.

(2) Food and Drink Policy . Food and drink is allowed only in the lounge or other designated areas.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(3) Equipment Operation . All computer terminals are located in the academic area. You will be shown how to operate the equipment. If you encounter a problem with any of the equipment, please inform an instructor.

(4) Courtesy

. Be courteous to other students by keeping the talking and noise levels to a minimum. Please clean up your area prior to leaving the Learning Center.

(5) Safety Procedures

.

d. Classroom Lectures/Workshops.

(1) Breaks . A ten-minute break is scheduled for every 50 minutes of classroom instruction.

(2) Classroom Atmosphere. Class is normally conducted in an informal manner.

B. KC-10 Mission

In order to help you focus on why yo u’re here, we’ll look at AMC Mission Orientation videotape then discu ss the role of the KC-10 and your role as a KC10 crewmember.

1. The Mission of AMC

2. Role of the KC-10

a. The KC-10 was chosen by the Air Force in 1977 to fill the requirements for the Advanced Tanker/Cargo Aircraft (ATCA). In fulfilling this role , you can expect to fly anywhere the Defense Department’s conti ngency, mobility, airlift, and air refueling commitments dictate.

b. The functional objective of the KC-10 is to increase the Defense Department’s capability to project power through mobility enhancement. The aircraft accomplishes this mobility concept by:

(1) Supporting the simultaneous air refueling and airlift requirements for the l ong-range deployments of tactical fighter forces.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(2) Supporting air-refueling require ments of airlift aircraft within the continental U. S (CONUS) and beyond our borders (OCONUS).

(3) Augmenting airlift forces between major aerial ports.

3. Role of the Pilot and Copilot.

The Pilot and Copilot have important roles in the safe and successful accomplishment of the KC-10 mission. Below is a brief overview of Pilot and Copilot duties and responsibilities.

a. Pilot Primary Responsibilities . The Pilot is:

(1) The aircraft commander responsible for the aircraft and crew.

(2) Responsible for successful mission accomplishment. In no instance will safety be compromised.

(3) Responsible for the issuance of instructions governing all phases of flight.

(4) Will train to control and super vise from either the left or right seat.

b. Pilot’s Other Duties

. (1) Mission Planning.

(a) Coordinate with other crewmembers on exact mission requirements.

(b) Supervise procurement and/or preparation of all required forms, charts, logs, etc., in accordance with existing directives.

(c) Attend required briefings.

(2) Pre-Takeoff

. (a) Conduct specialized crew briefing. Review mission profile including any mission changes and obtain/review forecast weather. The briefing should include but not be limited to:

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

1) Special clothing requirements.

2) Crash landing and ditching procedures.

3) Departure and approach procedures, including EGPWS considerations

. 4) Review normal and emergency takeoff and initial climb cons iderations with the Copilot and Flight Engineer.

(b) Check takeoff data prepared by the Flight Engineer.

1) Special Departure Procedures

(c) Confirm required ditching equipment is aboard the aircraft and properly stowed for overwater flights.

c. Copilot’s Primary Duties

. (1) Assist the Pilot, as directed, to accomplish the assigned mission.

(2) Be thoroughly familiar with normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures.

(3) Attend all required briefings.

d. Copilot - Other Considerations

. (1) The Copilot is an integral part of the crew, not an extra pilot. You are a high ly qualified crewmember who must be prepared to take control of the situation and assume command of the aircraft in the absence or incapacitation of the Pilot in command. You will be trained to operate the aircraft from either the right or left seat.

(2) To be prepared, you must aggressively and conscientiously study and review the appropriate governing procedures, regulat ions, and Flight Manual normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures. Utilize simulator time conscientiously to practice and improve your flying skills and decision making abilities.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

4. Role of the Flight Engineer

The Flight Engineer has an important role in the safe and successful accomplishment of the KC-10 mission. Below is a brief overview of your primary duties as well as other ta sks the Flight Engineer will perform.

a. Primary Duties . Primary duties of t he Flight Engineer are to:

(1) Perform inspections as required and report the condition of the aircraft to the Aircraft Commander.

(2) Coordinate aircraft weight and balance with the Boom Operator. Particular emphasis is placed on fuel load/distribution and CG movement/computation.

(3) Compute all aircraft performance data for the mission and as requested by the aircraft commander.

(4) Operate and monitor the va rious systems inflight to ensure successful mission accomplishment.

(5) Be knowledgeable of normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures that pertain to the Flight Engineer position.

(6) Monitor the aircraft fuel status and keep the pilots advised.

(7) Coordinate with the crew and assist during all abnormal and emergency situations.

(8) Complete forms, logs, etc., in accordance with existing directives.

(9) Monitor departure routes, al titudes, obstructions, and traffic procedures to incl ude applicable information and instructions in Flight Information Publications (FLIPs).

(10) Monitor descent, approach and landing procedures to include applicable information and instructions in FLIP terminal and approach procedures.

b. Other duties. Performs aircraft servicing, as needed.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

5. Role of the Boom Operator

The Boom Operator has an important role in the safe and successful accomplishment of the KC-10 air refue ling and cargo/ Passenger mission. I’ll provide a brief overview of their primary duties.

a. Primary Duties . Primary duties of t he Flight Engineer are to:

(1) Perform inspections and preparation, as required, and report the condition of the aircraft to the Aircraft Commander. Manage the load ing and offloading of cargo and passengers. Ensure the proper documentation is with the cargo and any hazardous materials are properly packaged and accounted for. Monitor the passengers’ inflight.

(2) Coordinate aircraft weight and balance with the Flight Engineer.

(3) Conduct inflight refueling with receiver aircraft. Boom air refueling with receptacle equipped receivers and Drogue air refueling with probe equipped receivers.

(4) Operate and monitor the va rious systems/equipment on the ground and inflight to ensure successful mission accomplishment.

(5) Be knowledgeable of normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures that pertain to the Boom Operator position.

(6) Act as Safety Observer for a ll phases of f light that the Boom Operator may observe.

6. Crew Coordination

The KC-10 mission is demanding. The successful accomplishment of the mission depends on effective crew c oordination, i.e., being alert and interacting harmoniously with other cr ewmembers, mainta ining situational awareness, and observing safe operat ing requirements and standards. Coordination of actions within a crew is of prime importance to ensure the optimum degree of mission success and safety. Coordination is not limited to actions alone. Being comp letely familiar with one’s crew position and having working knowledge of ot her crewmembers’ duties are essential parts of the total effort. Each crewmember must be alert at all times and notify the responsible cr ewmember of any deviation or discrepancy, which will affect succe ssful completion of the mission.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Maximum crew coordination with minimum verbal effort is achieved by the Flight Engineer readi ng all checklists (except Boom Operator checklists), with the appropriate responses from the other crewmembers. Crew coordination enhances the ma nner in which the missi on is performed. It must be developed through diligent effort, understanding, and anticipation; the safety of the crew depends upon it. In short, CREW COORDINATION is nothing more than COMMUNICATION. Don’t try to read crewmembers’ minds, TALK TO THEM.

a. Interaction . The importance of effective interaction with other crewmembers will bec ome obvious as you gain familiarity with the KC-10 mission. Successful interaction is accomplished by:

(1) Coordination of actions among crewmembers to ensure the safety and success of the mission.

(2) Learning your responsibilities and becoming familiar with the duties and responsibil ities of the other crew positions.

b. Awareness

. Each crewmember must be constantly alert for any situation that may be questionable:

(1) Practice.

(2) Procedure.

(3) Discrepancy.

(4) Deviation.

c. Safety . Crew coordination mu st be developed through diligent effort, understanding and ant icipation. The safety of the crew depends on it.

C. IQ Course Description

Now that you are familiar with your job and responsibilities, let’s discuss the training program you are about to enter . Below you are provided with an overview of the Initial Qua lification Course in cluding a description of the training approach, integrated training concept, and the course overview.

1. Training Approach

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-10 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

This course contains the necessary academic and hands-on training to ensure you acquire the knowledge and nec essary skills needed to safely perform your duties on the KC-10. The approach used in this course fully integrates academic with hands-on tr aining events, so the procedures taught in academic lessons are appli ed in hands-on training events.

Academic training includes self-paced ac tivities, workshops, and instructor guided reviews (IGR). KC-10 Flight Manuals are the primary reference source for all lessons. However, info rmation from other sources, such as maintenance manuals, is included in some lessons.

Self-paced activities used in the course include CBT lessons, workbooks, and reading assignments.

Keep in mind that although the course is considered self-paced, in reality a tight schedule must be maintained to ensure preparation for specific training events. You should initially try to get ahead; this will allow additional time to spend on more difficult lessons. It cannot be emphasized enough that if you get behind on your CBT lessons, workbooks, or reading assignments, it is very difficult to catch up. When you go to the FTD or SIM unprepar ed, you compromise successful completion of the training missi on for yourself and your crew.

Hands-on events include the static aircraft, FTD, and flight simulator.

Let’s briefly review the media used in the course.

a. Academics

. (1) Self-paced

. (a) Computer-Based Training . CBT is used as the primary academic media in the course. Lesson material is presented by integrating text and graphics on screen with audio narration. Embedded quizzes and end of lesson tests assess your knowledge of the presented material. You control a ccess to any repetition of lesson segments, lesson topics, and lesson exercises using the mouse and keyboard.

(b) Workbooks

. Instructional workbooks provide you with individually paced readings, exercises, and problems. Workbooks familiarize you with terminology, conditions, and procedures and suppl ements information

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-11 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

included in the Flight Manual. Lesson exercises assess understanding and answer keys provide feedback. Al though there is time allocated in the training schedule to review the workbooks, you are encouraged to begin reading the workbooks early in the schedule. Mandatory workbooks must be completed by the time indicated on the training schedule. You are encouraged to review the optional workbooks listed on the tr aining schedule. All workbooks are designed for your continued use after you complete the course.

(c) Reading Assignments

. Lesson reading assignments are listed in the Student Preparation/Review sect ion of each Student Guide. Successful completion of this course requires self-study. Best results are achieved when you complete the required reading assignment prior to the academic lesson.

(2) Workshops/Exercises

. Workshops and exercises provide the opportunity to practice what you learned in prerequisite workbook and CBT lessons. In a workshop setting, the instruct or provides appropriate guidance when questions arise and presents exercises for you to complete.

(3) Instructor Guided Reviews

. Instructor Guided Reviews (IGRs) are sc heduled following a sequence of CBT lessons for aircraft systems. The purpose of the review is to provide you with an opportunity to seek clarification or re inforcement of material presented in the CBT lessons. An instructor-guided review is not used to re-teach the subject nor present new material. An outline is included in the Student Guide. Use it to take notes on the areas discussed during the review. Time spent in the IGR is split between the classroom and the FTD.

(4) Mediated Interactive Lecture . One instructor-based lecture is included in the course to provide a Cargo and Boom Operator orientation.

b. Hands-on Training. Let’s now take a look at the hands-on media.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-12 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(1) Static Aircraft . A field trip to a KC-10 aircraft is scheduled immediately following the systems academic lessons and prior to normal procedures instruction. The guided t our familiarizes you with general features of the ai rcraft emphasizing those exterior and interior components of specific concern to your crew position.

(2) Aircrew Systems Trainer . The ASTs used to observe and perform normal, abnormal, emergency procedures to a system. The AST uses real-time aircraft systems software. Some of the systems presented are APU, Electr ical, Pneumatics and Air Conditioning.

(3) Flight Training Device . This training device permits practice of normal, abnormal, and emergency checklist procedures. Some FTD sessions are independent, meaning they are Pilot or Flight Engineer only. Procedures practiced in the FTD prepare you for missions flown in the simulator.

(4) Simulator

. Simulator periods ar e structured creworiented missions. In this device, you practice normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures. As much as possible, they ar e planned as full-profile missions. Pilots will practi ce flying the aircraft from both pilot seats.

c. Student Guide . Finally, the Student Guide includes a scheduled order of ev ents and provides an individual guide for each lesson. The guide is br oken into two volumes, and arranged in daily order from day 1 to 19 for Volume I, and day 20 to 54 for volume II. It is your responsibility to use the Student Guide as a reference to ensure complete preparation for the next lesson/training event.

(1) CBT Lessons . CBT lessons include an introduction, student preparation/review r equirements, objectives, and a lesson outline. Use the outline to take notes during each CBT lesson.

(2) Workshops and Exercises

. Workbooks and exercises include an introduction, objectives, instructional reading topics, problems, and exercises.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-13 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(3) FTD and Simulator

. FTD and simulator lessons include an introduction, objectives, and the profile to be flown.

2. Integrated Training Concept

.

a. Purpose. This course uses an integrated training concept that close couples hands-on FTD and simulator training events to academic instruction. After completing a series of academic lessons, you will have the opportunity to practice what you have learned in a ha nds-on training device. The reduced time lapse between rela ted academic and hands-on training objectives enhances training effectiveness.

b. Integrated Training . Instruction starts with aircraft systems, including a description of t he aircraft systems, operational characteristics, and limitations . It, then, proceeds through mission preparation, normal pr ocedures (takeoff, climb, enroute, descent, landing, and after landing), abnormal and emergency procedures, and air refueling procedures.

(1) Simulators start with aircraft systems and advance to more complex abnormal and emergency procedures. They also include normal, abnormal, and emergency tanker and receiver air refueling procedures. FTD missions support the simulator training with normal, abnormal, and emergency procedure practice.

3. Course Overview

a. Course Length . The Pilot and Flight Engineer Initial Qualification Courses are both 54 days in length. There are five days of academics followi ng the Air Force administered simulator evaluation. You ar e not responsible for this information in the evaluation.

b. Course Management Fl ow and Training Schedule . Your instructor will preview the sch eduled daily events. Follow along with the Course Managem ent Flow and Training Schedule charts that are included in the front section of your Student Guide.

D. Learning Center Tour

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-14 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

III. REVIEW

A. Summary

This course provides you the knowledge and skills needed to become safe and effective KC-10 crewmembers. This program introduction provided a general orientation, introduced the mission of the KC-10 and your specific responsibilities, and described the Initial Q ualification Course. Should you have any questions during the course, please feel free to call upon your instructor at any time.

B. Remotivation

Becoming a successful KC-10 aircrew me mber is not an easy task. By dedicating yourself and followi ng the instructions in the student guide, you will find this course trains you to be the best possible crewmember in the KC-10 program.

C. Closure

Are there any questions? If not, this concludes the presentation.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-15 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PIQ/FIQ-G840-SG 1-1-16 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-1 01 OCT 10 

# Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to acquaint you with the various features of the KC-10 Aircrew Training System (ATS) Comput er-Based Training (CBT).



### II. Duration - 0.3 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. None



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. NoneKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-2 01 OCT 10 

# Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons

Student Outline

l. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to acquaint the student with the various features of Computer Based Training (CBT).

B. Objective

1. Describes the navigation th rough KC-10 ATS Computer Based Training (CBT) Lessons.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Guide to Viewing CBT Lessons

1. Lesson Overview

B. CBT Interface

1. Navigation Menu

a. Navigation Menu

b. Organization and Structure

c. Navigation Menu Key

2. Screen Layout

a. Screen Layout

b. Presentation Area

c. Narration Text

(1) Narration Text

(2) Audio On

(3) Audio Off

d. Navigation ControlsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-3 01 OCT 10 (1) Navigation Controls

(2) Topic Counter

(3) Back and Next Arrow Buttons

(4) Pause Button

(5) Replay Button

(6) Confirm Button

e. Feature Controls

(1) Feature Controls

(2) AUDIO

(3) GLOSSARY

(4) FAQ/CMM

(5) COMMENT

(6) MENU/EXIT

3. Quiz and Exam Functions

a. Quiz and Exam Functions

b. Embedded Quiz

c. End-of-Segment Quiz and Remediation

d. End-of-Lesson Exam

C. Lesson Summary

1. Lesson SummaryKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-C842-SG 1-2-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-1 01 OCT 10 

# Aircraft General

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to KC-10 aircraft layout, design and major components.



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9, Cargo Loading Manual


### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Aircraft General CBT Lesson C. Writing Material


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1, Systems Description a. Part 1, Aircraft General (1) Aircraft General Description (2) Engine Danger Areas (3) Galley Description (4) Lavatories Description (5) Potable Water Description (6) Seats Description (7) Cargo Equipment b. Part 8, Doors (1) Doors Description (a) Cockpit Door (b) Lavatory Door (c) Cabin Doors (d) Cargo Doors (2) Ground Egress/Entry Ladder (3) Portable Ladder Assembly c. Part 11, Emergency Equipment (1) Bunks - (Fig 1.11-4) B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9 1. Section II, Description of Aircraft Features a. Cryogenic Vent b. Personnel ProvisionsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-2 01 OCT 10 

# Aircraft General

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to KC-10 aircraft layout, design, and major components.

B. Objectives

1. Identify aircraft general ex terior characteristics.

2. Identify aircraft general interior characteristics.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Aircraft General

1. Lesson Overview

B. Aircraft Exterior Characteristics

1. KC-10 Overview

2. Exterior Dimensions

a. Exterior Dimensions

b. Turning Radius

c. Weight Limitations

3. Engines

4. Danger Areas/Thrust

a. Danger Areas

b. Exhaust Wake Velocity

c. Pulling Force

(1) Pulling Force - Takeoff Thrust

(2) Pulling Force - IdleKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-3 01 OCT 10 5. Structural Components

6. Fuselage Structure

7. Doors and Hatches

8. Maintenance Service Doors

9. Aircraft Servicing

10. Aircraft Exterior Characteristics Quiz

C. Aircraft Interior Characteristics

1. Fuselage Compartments

2. Flight Compartment Stations

3. Cockpit Door

4. Crew Seats

a. Crew Seats

b. Pilot and Flight Engineer Seats

c. Boom Operator’s Seat

d. Crewmember/Observer’s Seat

5. Facilities

a. Facilities

b. Lavatory

c. Z Lavatory

d. Galley

e. Potable Water System

f. Crew Bunks

6. Cargo Loading and Safety Issues

7. Cargo/PAX Configurations

8. Patient Support ConfigurationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C001-SG 1-3-4 01 OCT 10 9. Local Training Configurations

10. Cargo Barrier Net/Environmental Curtain

11. Cryogenic Vent

12. Center Accessory Compartment

13. ARO Compartment

14. Aircraft Interior Characteristics Quiz

III. EXAMKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Fire Protection System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the KC-10 fire protection system. It provides detection, fire and smoke warning, and the subsystems to extinguish a fire in the engine nacelles and APU compartment.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Fire Protection System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description

a. Part 2, Power Plant/APU - Fire Protection

CH 3 FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Fire Protection System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 fire protection system provides detection, fire and smoke warning, and the subsystems to extingui sh a fire in the engine nacelles and APU compartment.

Parallel fire detection loops in t he engines and APU are monitored by a control unit which energizes the warning system when a fire is detected.

The cargo compartment is protected by sixteen smoke detectors, any one of which can activate the smoke caution system.

The fire extinguishing system uses th ree dual canister systems, one on each engine. The APU is covered by the number two engine extinguishing system.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the fire protection system components.

2. Identify the fire protection syst em operational characteristics.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Fire Protection System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Fire Protection System Components

1. Introduction

2. Major Components

3. Fire Detection System

a. Fire Detection System

b. Fire Detector Units

CH 3 FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(1) Fire Detector Units

(2) Fire Sensing Cables

(3) Loop A and Loop B

(4) Fire Detector Control Units

(a) Fire Detector Control Units

c. Fire Extinguishing System

d. Cabin Cargo Compar tment Smoke Detection

4. Controls and Indicators

5. Engine Fire

a. Engine Fire Detection Panel

b. Engine Fire Handles

c. Engine Fuel Lever Lights

d. Engine Fire Light

6. APU Fire

a. APU Fire

b. APU Loop/Fire Lights

c. APU Fire Summary Light

d. APU Fire Control

e. APU Ground Control Panel

7. Cabin Cargo Compartment Smoke

a. Cabin Cargo Compartment Smoke

b. Smoke Detector Panel

c. Cabin Cargo Smoke Lights

8. Summary

9. Quiz

CH 3 FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

C. Fire Protection System Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Fire Detection System

a. Loop Selector Switches

3. Fire Detection System Test

a. Fire Detection System Test

b. FE Panel

c. Fire Handle/Fuel Lever

d. Pilots’ Glareshield/Annunciator

e. Engine Fire Warning Bell

4. Engine Fire Warning

a. Engine Fire Warning

b. Engine Fire Detection

c. Fuel Lever Lights

d. Eng Fire Handles/Warning Lights

(1) Eng Fire Handles/Warning Lights.

(2) Gen Field Disconnect Position

(3) Fuel & Hyd Off Position/Discharge Agent 1

(4) Discharging Agent 2

(5) Restore Hydraulic Pressure

5. APU Fire Detection

a. APU Fire Detection

b. APU Fire Indications

(1) APU Fire Indications

(2) Master Warning Light

CH 3 FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(3) APU Summary Light

c. APU Fire Protection

d. APU Ground Control Panel

6. Cabin Cargo Smoke Test

a. Cabin Cargo Smoke Test

b. Cabin Cargo Smoke Detection

7. Summary

8. Quiz

III. Exam

CH 3 FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CH 3 FIQ-C003-SG 1-4-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Lighting System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Exterior and Interior Lighting Systems.



### II. Duration - 0.7 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Lighting System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1, Systems Description

a. Part 1, Aircraft General (1) Lighting Description

CH 3 FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Lighting System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Aircraft lighting is composed of an Ex terior System, and Interior Lighting consisting of cockpit, cabin, AR O station, and Warning and Caution subsystems.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the characteristics of the Exterior Lighting System.

2. Identify the characteristics of the Interior Lighting System.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Lighting System

1. Introduction

2. Objective

B. Exterior Lighting

1. Introduction

2. Landing Lights/Runway Turnoff Lts

a. Landing Lights/Runway Turnoff Lts

3. Position/Illumination

a. Position Lighting Overview

b. Wing Tip/Strobe Lights

c. Beacon and Formation Lights

d. AR Receptacle Lights

4. General Illumination/Scanning

a. Illumination/Scanning Overview

CH 3 FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

b. Wing and Logo Lights

c. Fuselage Lights

d. Aircraft Underside Lighting

5. Controls and Indicators

a. Landing Lights

b. T-Storm/Nav/Hi-Int/Formation

c. Beacon Lights

d. Logo Light

e. Wing/Upper Fuselage/AR Receptacle Lighting

f. ARO Controlled Lighting

6. Summary

7. Quiz

C. Interior Lighting

1. Introduction

2. Cockpit Lighting

a. Primary Lighting

b. Secondary/Standby Lighting

c. Thunderstorm Lighting

3. Cabin/ARO Compartment Lighting

a. Cabin Lighting

b. ARO Compartment Lighting

4. Controls and Indicators

a. Main Instrument Lighting

b. Overhead/Glareshield Lighting

c. Center Instrument/Pedestal Lighting

CH 3 FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

d. FE Station Lighting

e. Dome/Thunderstorm Lights

f. Standby Lighting

g. Seat Belt/Don Oxygen Mask

CH 3 FIQ-C029-SG 1-5-4 01 JUL 13 h. Master Warning/Caution Lights Overview

i. Summary/Master Warning Lights

j. Cue/Caution Lights

k. Annunciator Light Test

5. Summary

6. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-1 01 OCT 10 

# Auxiliary Power Unit

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Auxiliary Power Unit (APU).



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Auxiliary Power Unit CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 2, Power Plant/APU-Fire Protection 2. Section III, Limitations a. APUKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-2 01 OCT 10 

# Auxiliary Power Unit

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The APU is a twin spool axial flow gas turbine. Its purpose is to eliminate the dependence of the KC-10 on gr ound support equipment. The APU design permits its use in flight as well as on the ground.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the Auxiliary Po wer Unit System components.

2. Identify the operational characteri stics of the Auxiliary Power Unit.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Auxiliary Power Unit

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. APU Components

1. Introduction

2. APU System Components

a. APU System Components

b. APU Compartment

c. Compressors

d. Oil Lubrication System

e. Drain Can

f. Inlet/Exhaust doors

3. APU Controls and Indicators

a. APU Controls and IndicatorsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-3 01 OCT 10 b. Master Switch/Door Open Light

c. Control System Switch

d. Fuel Pump Switch

e. Fuel Pressure Low Light

f. Using BAT PWR Light

g. Oil Pressure LO/TEMP HI Light

h. Oil Quantity Gage

i. N1 and N2 Gages

j. EGT Gage

k. Generator Bus Switches

l. ISOL Valve

4. Summary

5. Quiz

C. APU Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. APU Start (Normal)

a. APU Start (Normal)

b. Exercise – APU Start (Normal)

3. APU Shutdown

4. APU Malfunctions

5. APU Automatic Shutdown

6. Summary

7. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C004-SG 1-6-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-1 01 OCT 10 

# Electrical System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the major components of the KC-10 electrical system, the controls and indicators, and their function and operational characteristics.



### II. Duration - 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Electrical System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 4, ElectricalKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-2 01 OCT 10 

# Electrical System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 electrical system consists of alternating and direct current power generation (three engine-driv en generators and four transformer rectifiers) with corresponding distributi on systems. A four th generator is installed on the auxiliary power unit ( APU) to provide auxiliary power on the ground or in the air. An external power receptacle provides for ground power. Emergency power supplied by ba ttery/static inverter system or by an air driven generator (ADG). Distri bution and control is effected through panels, annunciators, indicators, switches, buses, and circuit breakers.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the electr ical system components.

2. Identify the electrical syst em controls and indicators.

3. Identify the operational characte ristics of the electrical system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Electrical System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Electrical System Components

1. Introduction

2. Engine Driven Generators

3. AC Buses

4. AC Tie Bus

5. Transformer/Rectifiers

6. DC BusesKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-3 01 OCT 10 7. DC Tie Bus

8. Battery Bus

9. Battery/Battery Charger Relay

10. APU Generator

11. External Power

12. Ground Service Relay

13. Air Driven Generator

14. Circuit Breakers

a. Circuit Breaker Panels

b. Aircraft Systems/Lighting/Misc

c. Flight Guidance/Communications

d. Emergency/Battery Buses

e. Integral Panel Lighting/Light Plates

f. Remote Control Circuit Breakers

15. Summary

16. Quiz

C. Electrical System Controls and Indicators

1. Introduction

2. AC Electrical Panel

a. Electrical Panel Overview

b. CSD Disc Button/Press Low Light

c. CSD Temp Gage/Rise Button

d. Generator Switch

e. Gen Off/Gen Fail Lights

f. Parallel Gen Button/AC LoadmeterKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-4 01 OCT 10 g. AC Bus Off Light

h. Emerg AC Bus Off Lights

i. AC Bus Tie Switches/Off Lights

j. External Power Switch/Lights

3. DC Electrical Panel

a. DC Loadmeters

b. DC Bus Off Lights

c. DC Tie Switches/Closed Lights

d. DC X-Tie Switch/Closed Light

e. Battery Switch/Battery Bus Off Light

4. APU Electrical

a. APU Gen Reset Switch/Gen Off Light

b. APU Power Avail/Gen Fail Lights

c. APU Gen Bus Switches

d. APU AC Loadmeter

5. Test Panel

a. AC Voltmeter/Frequency Indicator

b. DC Volt/Amp Meter

c. Volt/Amp/Freq Selector

6. Ground Service Bus Power Switch/Bus Off Light

7. Electrical System Reset Switches

8. Generator Fail Reset Button

9. Emerg Power Switch/Emer Power Lights

10. Air Driven Generator

11. Ground Service Bus Switches/LightsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-5 01 OCT 10 12. External Power Panel

13. Summary

14. Quiz

D. Operational Characteristi cs of the Electrical System

1. Introduction

2. Battery Power

3. Engine Generators

4. Generator Bus 1

5. Generator Bus 2

6. Generator Bus 3

7. Isolated Mode

8. Unparalleled Mode

9. Parallel Mode

10. Bus Priority

a. Description

b. Eng/APU/Ext Pwr Avail

c. Tie Bus Priority

d. Generator Bus Priority

11. Air Driven Generator

12. Summary

13. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C005-SG 1-7-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Aircraft Fuel System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Fuel System.



### II. Duration

- 1.8 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Aircraft Fuel System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description

a. Part 3, Fuel and UARRSI (1) Fuel System Description (2) Universal Air Refueling Receptacle and Slipway Installation (UARRSI)

CH 3 FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Aircraft Fuel System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 fuel system c onsists of fuel tanks, pumps, manifolds, control valves and indicators necessary to perform a wide variety of tasks. These include supply for the engine and APU, tanker air refueling using the air refueling boom, centerli ne drogue, or wing pod drogue as well as taking on fuel in flight through t he use of an in flight receiver system. The system is designed so that any engine can be f ed from any tank. The engines can use all available fuel or all avail able fuel can be offloaded to a receiver aircraft. This lesson is presented in two segments. The first segment discusses the fuel system com ponents, and the second segment discusses the operating characteristi cs, including the system limitations.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the fuel system components.

2. Identify the operational charac teristics of the fuel system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Aircraft Fuel System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Fuel System Components

1. Introduction

2. Fuel Storage

a. Fuel Storage

b. Main Wing Tanks

c. Fuselage Body Tanks

(1) Fuselage Body Tanks

CH 3 FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(2) Forward Body Tanks

(3) Center Wing Tank

(4) Aft Body Tank

d. Fuel Vent System

(1) Fuel Vent System

(2) Positive/Negative Pressure Relief Valve

e. Fuel Level Measuring Sticks

f. Scavenging System

3. Fuel Distribution System

a. Fuel Distribution System

b. Crossfeed Manifold

c. Fuel Transfer System

d. Ground Refueling

4. Receiver Aerial Refueling System

a. Receiver Aerial Refueling System

b. UARRSI

c. Air Refueling Recept Shutoff Valve

d. Slipway Door

e. Induction Coil

5. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators

b. Fuel Quantity Indicators

(1) Fuel Quantity Indicators

(2) Totalizer/Gross Weight Indicator

(3) Fuel Quantity Test Button

CH 3 FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

c. Fuel Quantity Indicator Power Switch

d. Fuel Pressure Gage

e. Fuel Used Indicator

f. Advisory Lights

(1) Advisory Lights

(2) Fuel Filter Press Drop Light

(3) Tank Overfilled Light

(4) Main Tank FUEL SCHED Light

(5) Forward Body Tank FUEL SCHED Light

(6) Tip Pump(s) Low Press Light

(7) Ground Refuel Valve Open Light

(8) Fuel Cue Light

g. Dual Function Switch Lights

(1) Dual Function Switch Lights

(2) Transfer Pump Switch

(3) Main Tank Boost Pump

(4) Crossfeed Valve Switch

(5) Fill Valve Switch

(6) Fuel Dump Switch

(7) Isolation Valves

(8) Alternate Transfer Valve

(9) AR Isolation Valve

h. Override Switches

(1) Override Switches

(2) Transfer Pump Override

CH 3 FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(3) AR Override Switch

i. Fuel Dump Switch

j. Manifold Drain/Outboard Fill

k. AR Pump Switch Lights

l. Switch Flow Line Annunciator Supply Power

6. AR Receiver Fuel Panel

a. AR Receiver Fuel Panel

b. AR Master Switch/Unlock Light

c. OVRD/Ready Light

d. AR Receiver Valve

e. Latched/Disconnect Lights

f. UARRSI Status Annunciator Panel

7. HI-LEVEL Float Test

8. Fuel Manifold Scavenge Switch

9. UARRSI Lighting

a. UARRSI Lighting

b. AR Receptacle

c. Perimeter and Lead-In

10. Summary

11. Quiz

C. Fuel System Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Center of Gravity Control

3. Tank to Engine Feed

4. Tank to Tank Transfer

CH 3 FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

a. Tank to Tank Transfer

b. Transfer Body Tank Fuel

5. Fuel Limitations

a. Fuel Limitations

b. Transfer Body Tank Fuel

c. Main Tank 2 Transfer

d. Transfer Pump Override

6. Ground Refueling

7. Receiver Air Refueling

a. Receiver Air Refueling

b. Onload Fuel

c. Disconnect

8. Summary

9. Quiz

III. Exam

CH 3 FIQ-C013-SG 1-8-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-1 01 OCT 10 

# Air Refueling System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the tanker air refueling portion of KC-10 Fuel System.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Air Refueling System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 3, Fuel and UARSSI (1) Fuel System Description (2) Wing Pod Aerial Refueling System b. Part 15, Air Refueling Boom/Hose 2. Section III, Limitations a. Air Refueling LimitationsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-2 01 OCT 10 

# Air Refueling System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 fuel system c onsists of fuel tanks, pumps, manifolds, control valves, and indicators necessary to perform a wide variety of tasks. These include supply for the engine and APU, and tanker air refueling using the boom, centerli ne drogue, or wing pod drogue as well as taking on fuel in flight through use of the in flight receiver system. This lesson covers the Tanker Air Refueli ng System and is presented in two segments. The first segment covers the components of the air refueling system, and the second segment covers the operational characteristics and limitations.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the components of the Air Refueling System.

2. Identify the operational characteri stics of the Air Refueling System.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Air Refueling System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Air Refueling System Components

1. Introduction

2. Air Refueling System Components

a. Air Refueling System Components

b. Boom

c. Centerline Drogue

d. Wing Aerial Refueling Pods

3. AR Fuel SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-3 01 OCT 10 a. AR Fuel System

b. Forward Body

c. Center Wing

d. Aft Body

4. AR Manifold

a. AR Manifold

b. Boom/Drogue Manifolds

c. Fuel Pressure Transducers

5. Fuel Pressure Control Unit

6. WARP System

a. WARP System

b. WARP Components

c. Modes of Operation

7. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators

b. AR Fuel Pump Switch

c. AR Isolation Valve

d. Boom/Drogue Engaged Light

e. Boom Valve

f. Drogue Valve

g. AR Pump Override

h. Alternate Transfer Valve

i. Master Fuel Isolation Valve Sw

j. By-Pass Disagree Lights

k. Fuel Flow/Offload GageKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-4 01 OCT 10 l. Fuel Pressure Gage

m. AR HYD Press Lights

8. FE Annunciator Panel

9. WARP Control Panel

10. Summary

11. Quiz

C. Air Refueling System O perational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Boom Refueling

a. Boom Refueling

b. AR Pumps

c. Armed Before Contact

d. Fuel Offload

e. Disconnect

f. Armed After Contact

g. AR Pump Override

3. Centerline Drogue

4. WARP

a. WARP

b. Alt Trans/Isol Valves

c. AR Pump Override (WARP)

d. Wing Drogue Valve

e. Wing Pod Valve

f. WARP Refueling Complete

5. Manifold ScavengeKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-5 01 OCT 10 a. Manifold Scavenge

b. Receiver

c. Tanker

d. Boom

6. Limitations

a. Limitations

b. Airspeed

c. Environmental

7. Summary

8. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C043-SG 1-9-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-1 01 OCT 10 

# Systems IGR I

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this IGR is to review the Aircraft General Exterior and Interior, Fire Protection System, Interior and Exterior Lighting System, APU, Electrical System, Aircraft Fuel System, and Air Refueling System. This review provides you with opportunities to seek cl arification or reinforcement of this material.



### II. Duration

- 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Systems IGR I Instructor Guide and E-Frame Set B. Classroom Presentation System C. Aircrew System Trainer (AST) (Optional) D. Whiteboard, markers and erasers



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. You should have completed these CBT lessons. 1. Aircraft General 2. Fire Protection System 3. Lighting System 4. Auxiliary Power Unit 5. Electrical System 6. Aircraft Fuel System 7. Air Refueling SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

1. Identify aircraft general ex terior characteristics.

2. Identify aircraft general interior characteristics.

3. Identify operational characteristi cs of the fire protection system.

4. Identify characteristics of the exterior lighting system.

5. Identify characteristics of the interior lighting system.

6. Identify operational characteri stics of the auxiliary power unit.

7. Identify operational characteri stics of the electrical system.

8. Identify the operational charac teristics of the fuel system.

9. Identify the operational characteri stics of the air refueling system.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-3 01 OCT 10 

# Systems IGR I

Student Outline

A. Aircraft General Exterior Characteristics

1. External Dimensions

2. Engines

3. Structural Components

4. Danger Areas around the A/C

5. Doors and Hatches

6. Aircraft Servicing

B. Aircraft General Interior Characteristics

1. Fuselage Compartments

a. Flight Deck

b. Cabin

c. Cargo

d. Forward Avionics Bay

e. Center Accessory Compartment

f. ARO Compartment

g. Fuel Tanks

2. Flight Deck Stations

3. Crew Seats

4. Lavatories

5. Galley/Water/BunksKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-4 01 OCT 10 6. Cargo Pax Configuration

7. Barrier Net/Environmental Screen

C. Fire Protection System

1. Fire Detection Panel

2. Fire Detection System Test

3. Engine Fire Warning

4. APU Fire Panel

5. APU Ground Control Panel

6. Cabin Cargo Smoke

D. Exterior Lighting System

1. Landing/Ground Operations

a. Landing Lights

b. Runway Turnoff Lights

2. Position Lighting and Illumination

a. Red and Green Wingtip

b. White Position Lights

3. Scanning and General Illumination

a. Wing Scan Lights

b. Logo Lights

c. Fuselage Scan Lights

d. Underwing Illumination Lights

e. Horizontal Stabilizer Lights

f. Receiver Airplane LightsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-5 01 OCT 10 4. UARRSI Lighting

a. Flood

b. Slipway

5. Controls and Indicators

a. Overhead Panel

b. FE Console

c. ARO Compartment

E. Interior Lighting System

1. Cockpit Lighting

a. Primary

b. Secondary

c. Standby

d. Thunderstorm

2. Cabin and ARO Lighting

a. Overhead

b. Threshold Entry

c. ARO Overhead

3. Controls and Indicators

a. Primary Lighting

b. Standby Lighting

c. Aircrew/Passenger Notification

d. Master Warning and Master Caution Lights

e. Engine Fire Warning LightsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-6 01 OCT 10 F. Auxiliary Power Unit

1. APU General Description

a. Twin-Spool, Gas Turbine

b. Source of Pneumatic and Electrical Power

c. Location - APU Compartment, Lower Aft Fuselage

d. Seal-when-closed Access Door

2. Oil System

a. Self-contained

b. Wet sump

c. Reservoir

d. Oil Pressure Sensor

e. Oil Temperature Sensor

f. Oil Level Sensor

3. Ignition System

a. Master Switch to Momentary Start

b. Electronic Control Unit initiates Start

c. Intermittent Duty Cycle

d. Ignition Unit

4. Fuel Supply and Control

a. Fuel Supply

b. Fuel Distribution

c. APU Drain

5. Electric Power SupplyKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-7 01 OCT 10 a. Aircraft Batteries

b. Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) – above 95% N 2

6. APU Electronic Control Unit

a. DC Powered (battery or PMG)

b. Functions

c. Location – Aft Fuselage Compartment

7. Normal Standby Operation Modes

a. APU Generator

b. Pneumatics

c. Modes of Operation

8. APU Cooling and Compartment Ventilation

a. Ambient Air

b. Distribution

c. Function

9. Controls and Indicators – APU Control Panel

a. APU N 1 Gage – indicates percent of rated rotor speed

b. APU EGT Gage – indicates ex haust gas temperature and limits

c. APU N 2 Gage – indicates percent of rated rotor speed

d. APU Oil Quantity Gage – i ndicates usable oil quantity

e. APU USING BAT PWR light

f. APU OIL PRESS LO/TEMP HI Light

g. APU Master Switch

h. APU Control Systems SwitchKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-8 01 OCT 10 i. APU FUEL PRESS LO light – illu minates when fuel pressure is below starting or operating limits

j. APU Fuel Pump Switch

G. Electrical System

1. System Description

a. Engine Driven Generators (3) - AC Power

b. Transformer Rectifiers (TR)

c. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)

d. Circuit Breakers

e. Air-Driven Generator (ADG)

2. Lower Electrical Panel Controls and Indicators – AC section

a. CSD Section

b. Generator Section

c. AC Bus Section

3. Upper Electrical Panel Controls and Indicators – DC section

a. DC LOAD Meters

b. L EMER and R EMER DC BUS OFF lights

c. DC TIE BUS

d. DC TIE and X-TIE switches

e. DC GROUND SERVICE BUS

f. Battery Section

4. APU Control Panel

a. APU PWR AVAIL Light

b. APU GEN BUS SwitchesKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-9 01 OCT 10 c. APU PWR IN USE Lights

d. APU GEN FAIL/OFF Lights

e. APU AC LOAD Meter

f. APU GEN RESET Switch

5. AC Volt/Freq and DC Volt/Amp Controls

a. VOLT/AMP/FREQ Selector

b. AC VOLT Meter

c. AC FREQ Meter

d. DC VOLT/AMP Meter

6. Elect Sys Reset Panel

a. ELEC SYS RESET Switches

b. GEN FAIL RESET Button

c. FUEL QTY IND PWR Switch

7. Emergency Power

a. EMER PWR Switch

b. EMER PWR IN Use Lights

c. EMER BUS OFF Summary Light (not depicted)

d. ELEC Cue Light (not depicted)

8. ADG Operation

a. ADG Release Handle

b. ADG Switch

9. Ground Service Buses

a. DC Ground Service Bus Power SwitchKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-10 01 OCT 10 b. Cabin Ground Service Panel (California Panel)

10. External Power Panel

a. External Power Receptacle

b. EXT PWR AVAIL Light

c. EXT PWR NOT IN USE Light

d. GND SERVICE EXT PWR Switch

H. Aircraft Fuel System

1. Fuel Storage

2. Fuel Distribution System

3. Receiver Air Refueling System

4. Controls and Indicators

I. Air Refueling Fuel System

1. Air Refueling Boom

a. Location

b. Hoist and Latch

c. Two Aerodynamically Faired Tubes

d. Flight Control Surfaces (Hydraulic System 2)

2. Center Line Drogue

a. Location

b. Refueling Probe Equipped Receiver Aircraft

c. Hose Reel System

d. Paradrogue

e. GuillotineKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-11 01 OCT 10 f. Lights

3. Wing Pod Drogue

a. Location

b. Purpose

c. Paradrogue

d. Ram Air Turbine

e. Fuel Pressure Operated

4. Air Refueling Pumps

a. Hydraulic

b. Fuel Pressure Control Unit (FPCU)

5. Manifold Scavenging

a. Receiver

b. Tanker

c. Boom

6. Controls and Indicators

a. Switch/Lights

b. Gages

c. Hydraulics

d. WARP PanelKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I018-SG 1-10-12 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T301-SG 1-11-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD Systems I

I. Purpose

– This mission is an instructor-gui ded review of the normal functions and operation of the Fire Prot ection, Lighting, APU, Electr ical, and Fuel Systems. Students are not responsible for the completion of checklists. Instructor(s) will ensure aircraft configuration, pa nels, and switches are set properly. This lesson will not be graded.



### II. Duration – 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. FTD Systems I Instructor Guide C. T.O 1C-10(K)A-1


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Descrip tion – Applicable Systems B. Attend classroom reviewKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T301-SG 1-11-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Identify the operat ional characteristics of t he Fire Protection System. 2. Identify the operationa l characteristics of t he Auxiliary Power Unit. 3. Identify the operationa l characteristics of t he Electrical System. 4. Identify the operat ional characteristics of t he Interior Lighting System. 5. Identify the operat ional characteristics of t he Exterior Lighting System. 6. Identify the operati onal characteristics of the Fuel System.



## Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs.

1. Establish Battery Power 2. Test Fire Detection 3. Start APU 4. Establish APU Electrical Power 5. Test Cabin Cargo Smoke Detection 6. Establish Engine Generators Electrical Power 7. Establish External Electrical Power 8. EMER PWR Switch — ON 9. EXT PWR Switch — OFF 10. SHUTDOWN the APU 11. Establish Normal Interior/Exterior Lighting 12. Test P/FE Master Warn ing/Caution/Annunciator Lights 13. Establish Fuel Panel Configur ation (Normal, Onload, Offload)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-1 01 OCT 10 

# Power Plant

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the power plant system. It is presented in two segments. The first segment describes the engines and their major components, the s ubsystems and the flight deck controls and indicators. The second segment descr ibes the operation of the system and components, and the power plant limitations.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Power Plant CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description 1. Part 2, Power Plant/APU - Fire Protection 2. Section III, Limitations 1. Systems Limitations (1) Power PlantKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-2 01 OCT 10 

# Power Plant

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 is powered by thr ee interchangeable GE-CF6-50 high-bypassratio turbofan engines. Each engine is flat rated at 52,500 pounds thrust at sea level. The basic engine consis ts of a variable stator, 14-stage high pressure ratio compressor, an annular combustor, a two-stage air-cooled turbine, gearbox, controls, and accessori es. The turbine-driven front fan increases mass airflow and decreases jet velocity, allowing quieter operation, improved thrust, and specific fuel consumption. This lesson is presented in two segments. The firs t segment describes the engines and their major components, the subsystem s and the flight deck controls and indicators. The second segment de scribes the operati on of the system and components, and the power plant limitations.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the characteristics of the Power Plant System components.

2. Identify the operational characteri stics of the Power Plant System.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Lesson Introduction

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Power Plant System Components

1. Introduction

2. Engine Components

a. Engine Components

b. Fan Section

c. Compressor Section

d. Turbine SectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-3 01 OCT 10 e. Accessory Drive Section

3. Power Plant Subsystems

a. Power Plant Subsystems

b. Engine Fuel Control

c. Oil System

d. Starting and Ignition

e. Thrust Reverser

f. Engine Failure Detection

4. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators

b. Throttles

c. Thrust Reverser

d. Engine Fuel Levers

e. Reverser Lights

f. N1 Gage

g. EGT Gage

h. N2 Gage

i. Fuel Flow Gage

j. Max Pointer Reset Switch

k. Engine Fail Lights

l. Eng Oil Press/Strainer Lights

m. Eng Ignition/Start Controls

n. Ignition Transfer Switches

o. Engine Oil System Gages

5. SummaryKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C014-SG 1-12-4 01 OCT 10 6. Quiz

C. Power Plant Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Starting and Ignition

a. Starting and Ignition

b. Ignition Selector Switch

c. Override and Airstart Switch

d. Engine Start EGT Limits

e. Engine Start

f. Ignition Exciter Power Transfer Switch

3. Reverse Thrust

4. Engine Shutdown

5. Summary

6. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-1 01 OCT 10 

# Hydraulic System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components, operational characteristics and limit ations of the hydraulic system.



### II. Duration

- 1.3 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Hydraulic System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description 1. Part 5, Hydraulics 2. Section III, Limitations 1. Systems LimitationsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-2 01 OCT 10 

# Hydraulic System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to t he hydraulic system on the KC-10. It describes the components and thei r function and the operational characteristics of the system. The fi rst segment describes the hydraulic system components, and controls and i ndicators. The second segment covers the operational characteristi cs and limitations of the hydraulic system.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the hydrau lic system components.

2. Identify the operational characte ristics of the hydraulic system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Lesson Introduction

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Hydraulic System Components

1. Introduction

2. Reservoir/Plumbing

a. Reservoir

b. Supply Tank

c. Shutoff Valve

3. EDP’s, Filters, and Accumulators

a. Engine Driven Pumps

b. Hyd FiltersKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-3 01 OCT 10 c. Accumulators

d. Relief Valve

4. Aux Pumps and Motor Pumps

a. Aux Pumps

b. Reversible Motor Pumps

c. Non-Reversible Motor Pumps

5. Hydraulic Powered Components

6. Elevator Shutoff Valve

7. Controls and Indicators

a. Hyd Panel Overview

b. Temperature Gage

c. Quantity Gage

d. EDP Switches

e. TEMP HI/PRESS LO Lights

f. Pressure Gage

g. Aux Pump Switches and Lights

h. RMP Switches and Lights

i. RUD STBY PWR Switch and Light

j. AR Press/AR Pump Lights

k. FE Annunciator Hyd Lights

l. Flt Cont Switch/Lights

8. Summary

9. Quiz

C. Hydraulic System Oper ational Characteristics

1. IntroductionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C006-SG 1-13-4 01 OCT 10 2. Aux Pump Operation

a. Aux Pump Operation (FE Panel)

b. Aux Pump Operation (Ovhd Panel)

3. EDP Operation

a. Left Hyd Pump Operation

b. Right Hyd Pump Operation

4. RMP Operation

a. RMP/OFF Position

b. RMP/ON Position

c. RMP/ARM Position

d. RMP/Aircraft Stall

e. RMP/ADG-HYD

f. RMP/Low Hyd Quantity

g. RMP/AR Alt Supply System

5. Non-RMP Operation

a. Non-RMP Normal Operation

b. RUD STBY PWR Switch - OFF

c. RUD STBY PWR Switch - ARM

d. 2-1 Non-RMP Operation

e. 3-2 Non-RMP Operation

6. Summary

7. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-1 01 OCT 10 

# Landing Gear System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the landing gear system.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Landing Gear System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 7, Landing GearKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-2 01 OCT 10 

# Landing Gear System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 landing gear system is a tr icycle gear comprised of four-wheel trucks on each main gear, dual wheels on the nose gear, and a supplemental dual-wheel center gear. There are two independent braking systems, with anti-skid, on each of the eight main wheels and the two center wheels.

This lesson consists of two segments. The first segment describes the landing gear system components, including the brakes and their function. The second segment discusses the oper ating characteristics of the landing gear and brakes.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the landing gear system components.

2. Identify the operational characte ristics of the landing gear system.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Lesson Introduction

2. Objectives

A. Landing Gear System Components

1. Introduction

2. Landing Gear (General)

3. Nose Gear

a. Nose Gear

b. Doors

c. Ground Sensing System

4. Main GearKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-3 01 OCT 10 a. Main Gear

b. Doors

5. Center Gear

a. Center Gear

b. Doors

6. Nose Wheel Steering System

a. Nose Wheel Steering System

b. Rudder Pedals

c. Hydraulic Systems

7. Wheel Brake System

8. Anti-Skid System

9. Wheels and Tires

a. Wheels and Tires

b. Fuse Plugs

10. Landing Gear Handle

a. Landing Gear Handle

b. Release Button

c. Landing Gear Lights/Horn

11. Center Gear Isolation Switch

12. Alternate Gear Extension

a. Alternate Gear Extension

b. Raising the Lever

c. Stowing the Lever

13. Center Gear Al ternate Extension

14. Nose Gear Up/Down Lock IndicatorKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-4 01 OCT 10 15. Main Landing Gear/Door Indicators

16. Parking Brake/Light

17. Anti-Skid Switch/Lights

18. Wheel Brake Indicators

a. Brake System Hyd Press Gage

b. Brake Temp Monitor System

c. Differential Temperature Light

19. Summary

20. Quiz

B. Operational Characteristi cs of the Landing Gear System

1. Introduction

2. Landing Gear Limitations

3. Gear Handle

a. Gear Handle

b. Retracting the Gear

4. Landing Gear Visual/Aural Signal

5. Gear Light Test Button

6. Center Gear Isolation Switch

7. Alternate Gear Extension Handle

8. Center Gear Alternate Extension

9. Main Gear Visual Indications

10. Nose Gear Visual Indications

11. Alternate Gear Extension

12. Brake System

13. Anti-Skid SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-5 01 OCT 10 a. Anti-Skid System

b. Anti-Skid Fail Lights

c. Hydraulic Pressure

14. Brake Temperature Monitor System

a. Brake Temperature Monitor System

b. Differential Temperature Light

15. Summary

16. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C009-SG 1-14-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-1 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Controls

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the flight control system.



### II. Duration - 1.5 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Flight Controls CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description 1. Part 6, Flight Controls (1) Flight Controls DescriptionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-2 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Controls

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. All KC-10 flight controls are fully powered by the three hydraulic systems. Primary flight controls consist of inboard and outboard ailerons, upper and lower rudders, and inboard and outboard pai rs of elevators. Secondary flight controls are inboard and outboard leading edge sl ats, inboard and outboard trailing edge flaps, wing spo ilers, and an adjustable horizontal stabilizer.

Basic concept: cockpit-to-cable-to-hydr aulic actuator-to-control surface.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the flight control system components.

2. Identify the operational characteri stics of the flight control system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Lesson Introduction

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. System Components

1. Introduction

2. Primary Flight Controls

a. Primary Flight Controls

b. Aileron Roll

c. Elevators - Pitch

d. Rudder - Yaw

3. Secondary Flight ControlsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-3 01 OCT 10 a. Secondary Flight Controls

b. Spoilers

c. Flaps

d. Slats

e. Horizontal Stabilizer

4. Primary Controls and Indicators

a. Primary Controls and Indicators

b. Control Columns

c. Aileron Trim Knob

d. Rudder Pedals

e. Rudder Trim Knob

f. Yaw Damp Switches

g. Rudder STBY Power Sw

h. Surface Position Indicator

i. Elevator Feel Selector

5. Secondary Controls and Indicators

a. Secondary Controls and Indicators

b. Spoiler Handle

c. Flaps

d. Slats

e. Flap/Slat Indicator

(1) Flap/Slat Indicator

(2) Flap Limit Placard

(3) Flap Handle Position Indicator

(4) Flap Position TapesKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-4 01 OCT 10 (5) Flap Disagree Flag

(6) Slat Position Lights

(7) Indicator Test

(8) Caution Lights

f. Flap Limit Selector

g. Stall Test Selector

h. Horizontal Stabilizer

(1) Horizontal Stabilizer

(2) Control Wheel Trim Switches

(3) Alternate Trim Switches

(4) Longitudinal Trim Controls

(5) Autopilot Control

(6) Indicator Scale

6. Summary

7. Quiz

C. Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Primary Flight Controls

a. Ailerons

b. Elevators

c. Rudders

3. Secondary Flight Controls

a. Spoilers

b. Flap/Slat Operation

(1) Flap/Slat OperationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-5 01 OCT 10 (2) Position Indicators

(3) Flap Slat Handle

(4) Flaps/Slats Retracting

(5) Flap Takeoff Selector

(6) Slat Warning System

c. Horizontal Stabilizer

(1) Horizontal Stabilizer

(2) Alternate Trim Switch

(3) Trim Control Handles

(4) Autopilot Engaged

(5) Command Mode

(6) Control Wheel Steering Mode

(7) Aural Signal

d. Warning Systems

4. Summary

5. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C007-SG 1-15-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-1 01 OCT 10 

# Systems IGR II

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose

- The purpose of this IGR is to review the Power Plant, Hydraulic System, Flight Controls, and Landing Gear System. The Instructor guides the review, which covers the subject taught in the preceding CBT Lessons. The review provides you with opportunities to seek clarification or reinforcement of this material.

The Student Outline is designed to assist y ou during this IGR. It is a brief outline of major topics to be discussed and provides space for note taking if required.



### II. Duration

- 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. KC-10 Pilot and Flight Engineer Station Oilskins



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Systems IGR II Student Guide and E-Frame Set B. Classroom Presentation System C. Aircrew System Trainer (AST) D. Whiteboard, markers, and erasers


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. You should have completed these CBT lessons prior to the IGR. 1. Power Plant 2. Hydraulic System 3. Landing Gear System 4. Flight ControlsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

1. Identify the operational characteri stics of the Power Plant System.

2. Identify the operational characte ristics of the Hydraulic System.

3. Identify the operational characterist ics of the Flight Controls System.

4. Identify the operational characte ristics of the Landing Gear System.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-3 01 OCT 10 

# Systems IGR II

Student Outline

A. Power Plant

1. Engine Sections

a. Fan Section

b. Compressor Section

c. Combustion Section

d. Turbine Section

e. Accessory Drive Section

2. Subsystems

a. Engine Fuel Control

b. Oil System

c. Starting and Ignition

(1) Pneumatic

(2) Dual Ignition

d. Ignition Controls

(1) Selector Switch

(2) Start Switch

(3) Override and Airstart

e. Thrust Reverser

(1) Purpose

(2) Blocker Door SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-4 01 OCT 10 (3) Pneumatically Operated

(4) Ground Use Only

f. Engine Failure Detection

(1) Lost Thrust

(2) N 1 exceeds 85%

(3) 11% Difference

(4) Ground Operation Only

3. Controls and Indicators

a. Throttles

b. Instruments

(1) N 1 RPM

(2) EGT

(3) N 2 RPM

(4) Fuel Flow

c. Oil Gages

(1) Pressure

(2) Temperature

(3) Quantity

B. Hydraulic System

1. System Components

a. Engine Manifolds

b. System Manifolds

c. Engine Driven PumpsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-5 01 OCT 10 d. Auxiliary Pumps

e. Reservoirs

f. Accumulators

g. Reversible Motor Pumps

h. Auxiliary Reservoir

i. Supply Tank/Hand Pump

j. Hydraulic Shutoff Valve

k. Engine driven pumps

l. Hydraulic Filters

(1) Engine Manifold - 4 Non-bypassing

(2) System Manifold - 2 Non-bypassing

(3) Differential Pressure Indicators

m. Accumulators

n. Auxiliary Pumps (2)

o. Reversible Motor Pumps (1-3 and 2-3)

p. Non-reversible motor pumps

2. Systems Powered by the Hydraulic Systems

a. Flight Controls

b. Air Refueling Pumps

c. Brakes

d. Anti-skid

e. Nosewheel steering

f. UARRSIKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-6 01 OCT 10 g. AR Boom/Drogue

h. Elevator Hydraulic Shut off Feature (not depicted)

3. Controls and Indicators

a. Gages

(1) Pressure

(2) Quantity

(3) Temperature

b. Lights

(1) Press Lo

(2) Temp Hi

(3) Rud Stby Pwr Off

c. Switches

(1) Pump Switches

(2) Reversible Motor Pumps

(3) Rudder Stby Pwr

C. Flight Control System

1. Primary Controls

a. Ailerons

(1) Inboard-High Speed

(2) Outboard-Low Speed

b. Elevators

(1) Inboard & Outboard Pairs

(2) Automatic Load Feel SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-7 01 OCT 10 c. Rudder

(1) Upper Rudder (2 segments)

(2) Lower Rudder (2 segments)

(3) Upper & Lower Yaw Dampers

2. Secondary Controls

a. Spoilers

(1) 5 each Wing

(2) Lateral Control Mixer

(3) Single Hydraulic System

b. Flaps

(1) Inboard and Outboard Segments

(2) Flap Bus System

(3) Automatic Flap Limiter

(4) Hydraulic Systems 1 & 2

c. Slats

(1) 8 Segments Each Wing (2, Inboard, 6 Outboard)

(2) Positions

(3) Hydraulic systems 1 & 3

d. Horizontal stabilizer

(1) Hydraulic Systems 1 & 3

(2) Trim Rates

D. Landing Gear

1. Landing Gear SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-8 01 OCT 10 a. Nose Gear

(1) Ground Sensing

(2) Nosewheel Steering

b. Main Gear

(1) Wheels and Tires

(2) Disk pressure plugs

c. Centerline Gear

2. Brake System

a. Dual Powered

b. Brake Accumulator Back-Up (4)

c. Parking Brake

d. Dual Brake Control Valves (2)

e. Anti-skid

(1) Anti-skid Control Valves

(2) Anti-skid Control Box

3. Controls and Indicators

a. Landing Gear

(1) Gear Handle

(2) Gear Handle Release Button

(3) Gear Lights/Aural Warning

(4) Center Gear Isolation Switch

(5) Alternate Gear Extension Lever

(6) Center Gear Alternate ExtensionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-9 01 OCT 10 (7) Viewing windows/tubes

b. Brakes

(1) Hydraulics

(2) Parking Brake Handle

(3) Anti-skid Test

(4) Brake Temperature indicationsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I035-SG 1-16-10 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T302-SG 1-17-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD Systems II

I. Purpose

– This mission is an instructor-gui ded review of normal functions and operation of the Power Pl ant, Hydraulic, Landing Gear , and Flight Controls Systems. Students are not responsible for completion of checklists. The instructor(s) will ensure aircraft conf iguration, panels, and switches are set properly. This lesson will not be graded.



### II. Duration – 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. FTD Systems II Instructor Guide C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Descrip tion – Applicable Systems B. Attend classroom reviewKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T302-SG 1-17-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Identify the operationa l characteristics of t he Power Plant System. 2. Identify the operationa l characteristics of the Hydraulic System. 3. Identify the operationa l characteristics of t he Landing Gear System. 4. Identify the operat ional characteristics of t he Flight Control System.



## Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs.

1. Power Plant – Controls and Indicators 2. Engine Start (3, 1, 2) 3. Reverse Thrust Operation 4. Hydraulic System – Controls and Indicators 5. Operation of Auxiliary Pumps 6. Operation of Reversible Motor Pumps 7. Operation of Non-Reversible Motor Pumps 8. Operation of Engine-Driven Pumps 9. Flight Controls – Controls and Indicators 10. Operation of Ailerons , Elevators, and Rudders 11. Operation of Spoilers, Flaps, Slats, and Horizontal Stabilizer 12. Landing Gear – Controls and Indicators 13. Operation of Landing GearKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-1 01 OCT 10 

# Communication Systems

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Communication Equipment Suite. It describes the HF, VHF, UHF, L-Band SATCOM, IFF/ATC Transponder , Interphone, Passenger A ddress, Audio Panel, and Cockpit Voice Recorder Systems.



### II. Duration - 1.3 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Communication Systems CBT Lesson C. Writing material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 13, CommunicationsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-2 01 OCT 10 

# Communication Systems

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 has worldwide tanker/airli ft capability. With its great range and diversity, the KC-10 has severa l different communication systems onboard, allowing the crew to maintain constant contact with all controlling agencies--no matter the distance!

This lesson discusses the communica tion system components. Segment one provides an overview of each com ponent, including purpose, location, and general function. Segments tw o through four provide a detailed functional description of the HF, UHF, and VHF Systems. Each lesson segment is followed by a segment quiz, and at the completion of all lesson segments, you will be giv en a test to assess your knowledge of the communication system.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the Communica tion System Components.

2. Identify the Operational Characteristics of HF Radios.

3. Identify the Operational Characteristics of UHF Radios.

4. Identify the Operational Characteristics of VHF Radios.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Communication Systems

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

3. Communication System Components

a. Introduction

b. UHF Radios 1 and 2

(1) UHF Radios 1 and 2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-3 01 OCT 10 (2) ARC -164(V)/UHF 1

(3) ARC -171/UHF 2

c. VHF Radios 1 and 2

(1) VHF Radios 1 and 2

(2) Controls

(3) Antennas

d. HF Radios 1 and 2

(1) HF Radios 1 and 2

(2) Controls

(3) Antennas

(4) ACS Function

(5) SELCAL

e. Interphone

(1) Interphone

(2) Flight Interphone

(3) Service Interphone

(4) Controls

f. Public Address System

g. Audio Panel

(1) Audio Panel

(2) Audio Select Switches

(a) Audio Select Switches

(b) PA PTT Pushbutton

(c) Hot Mic/Radio Switches

(d) Control Wheel Micro SwitchKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-4 01 OCT 10 (3) Operation/Radios/Nav Aids

(a) Operational/Radios/Nav Aids

(b) Flight Interphone

(c) Service Interphone

(d) Public Address

h. IFF/ATC Transponder

i. L-Band SATCOM

j. Iridium Phone

k. Cockpit Voice Recorder

l. Summary

m. Quiz

4. HF Radios

a. Introduction

b. Controls and Indicators

(1) Controls and Indicators

(2) Buttons

(3) Display Fields

c. Operational Characteristics

d. HF SELCAL Annunciator Panel

e. Summary

f. Quiz

5. UHF Radios

a. Introduction

b. UHF 1 Functional Description

(1) UHF 1 Functional DescriptionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-5 01 OCT 10 (2) Function Switch

(3) Volume Knob

(4) Manual Mode

(5) Preset Mode

c. UHF 1 Operational Description

d. UHF 2 Functional Description

(1) UHF 2 Functional Description

(2) Function Selector Switch

(3) Frequency Selector

(4) Squelch Switch

e. UHF 2 Operational Description

f. Summary

g. Quiz

6. VHF Radios

a. Introduction

b. Controls and Indicators

c. Operational Characteristics

d. Summary

e. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C010-SG 1-18-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-1 01 OCT 10 

# Pneumatic System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components and operational characteristi cs of the pneumatic system.



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Pneumatic System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 9, Pneumatics 2. Section III, Limitations a. Systems Limitations (1) PneumaticsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-2 01 OCT 10 

# Pneumatic System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 pneumatic system consists of components, controls, and indicators used to supply pneumat ic power for air conditioning pressurization, wing anti-icing, ga lley and lavatory ventilation, engine starting, and engine reversing. Pneumat ic pressure is supplied from a ground external source, the APU, or engines No. 1 and No. 3.

This lesson consists of two segments. The first segment describes the system components, including the cont rols and indicators. The second segment describes the operational characteristics of the pneumatic system. Lesson presentation is followed by a lesson test.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the pneumat ic systems components.

2. Identify the operational charac teristics of the pneumatic system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Pneumatic System

1. Lesson Introduction

2. Lesson Objectives

B. System Components

1. Introduction

2. System Description

a. System Description

b. Pressure Regulator Valve

c. Over Pressure Valve

d. PrecoolerKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-3 01 OCT 10 e. Manifold Ducting

f. Manifold Failure Protection

g. APU Air

h. Ground Air

3. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators

b. Pneumatic Supply Selector

c. Manifold Fail Light

d. Temp HI Light

e. Abnormal Light

f. Temperature Gage

g. Pressure Gage

h. 1-2 &1-3 Isolation Valves

i. Disagree Lights

j. APU Isolation Valve

k. Annunciator Lights

l. APU Isol Valve Open Light

m. Use Engine Pneu Supply Light

n. Isol Valve Select Switches

o. Manifold Detect Loop Select Switch

4. Summary

5. Quiz

C. Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Controls and IndicatorsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C012-SG 1-19-4 01 OCT 10 3. Pneumatic Supply Selector

4. LO Position

5. AUTO Position

6. HI Position

7. Pressure Regulating Valve

8. Warning Lights

9. Isolation Valves

10. Summary

11. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Air Conditioning System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components and operational characteristics of the air conditioning system.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Air Conditioning System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description

a. Part 10, Pressurization and Air Conditioning 2. Section III , Limitations

a. Systems Limitations

CH 4 FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-1 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Air Conditioning System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to KC- 10 Air Conditioning system. It describes system components and function and oper ational characteristics.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the air condi tioning system components.

2. Identify the operational characteristics of the air conditioning system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Air Conditioning System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Air Conditioning Components

1. Introduction

2. Air Conditioning Packs

a. Air Conditioning Packs Location

b. Flow Control Valve/Compressor

c. Heat Exchanger/Turbine/Water Separator

d. Pack Anti-Ice Protection

e. Pack Overheat Protection

3. Air Distribution

a. Conditioned Air/Trim Air

b. Ground Conditioned Air

CH 4 FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-2 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

c. Lav-Galley Vent/Center Accessory Compartment

d. Avionic Cooling

4. Controls and Indicators

a. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle Location

b. Shutoff Handle - Passenger Configuration

c. Shutoff Handle - All Cargo Configuration

d. Ram Air Valve

e. Air Conditioning Panel

f. Flow Gages

g. Pack Selectors

h. Pack Indicators

i. Pack Ind Sel/Pack Off Light

j. Zone Temp Selectors

k. Trim Air Valve Position Indicators

l. Compt-Duct Temp/Lav Galley

m. Trim Air Switch

n. Duct-Avionic Compartment Overheat

o. Avionic Flow Switch

p. FE Annunciator Panel Air Cond Lights

q. INS Flow Off Lights

r. Airflow Indicator

5. Summary

6. Quiz 1

C. Air Conditioning Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

CH 4 FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-3 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

2. Pre-Conditioned Air

3. Air Conditioning Pneumatics

4. Automatic Mode

a. Central Controller

b. Pack Selector - Auto

c. Temp Control - Auto

5. Manual Mode

a. Pack/Temp Selectors - Manual

b. Zone Temp Control - Manual

c. Pack Temp Control – Manual

6. Summary

7. Quiz 2

III. Exam

CH 4 FIQ-C026-SG 1-20-4 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-1 01 OCT 10 

# Pressurization System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 pressurization system.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Pressurization System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 10, Pressurization and Air Conditioning (1) Pressurization DescriptionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-2 01 OCT 10 

# Pressurization System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Pressurization for the KC-10 is provided by engine bleed air and controlled by regulating the outflow of air from the pressurized section. The cockpit, cabin and cargo compartment, ARO compartment, and the avionics and center accessory compartments are all pressurized. The pressurization and pressurization rate of change c an be controlled automatically or manually. Controls and indicators are on the pilot’s overhead panel and flight engineer’s panel.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the pressuri zation system components.

2. Identify the operational characteri stics of the pressurization system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Pressurization

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Pressurization System Components

1. Introduction

2. Pressurized Compartments

3. Pressure Controller

4. Thrust Recovery Valve

5. Cabin Pressure Relief Valves

6. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators Overview

b. Mode Selector, Semi-Auto LightKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-3 01 OCT 10 c. Alt Set Knob, Alt Scale

d. Ldg Baro Set Knob

e. Rate Limit Selector

f. Man/Auto Handle, Control Wheel

g. Valve Position Indicator

h. Cabin Alt Rate Indicator

i. Cabin Alt Indicator, Baro Set Knob

j. Differential Pressure Indicator

k. Warning Lights, Cab Alt Horn

l. Alt Schedule Placard

7. Summary

8. Quiz

C. Operational Characteristics of the Pressurization System

1. Introduction

2. Automatic Mode Overview

3. Auto Takeoff and Initial Climb

4. Auto Climb and Cruise

5. Auto Descent

6. Auto Depressurization

7. Limitations

8. Semi-Automatic Mode

9. Semi-Automatic Climb

10. Semi-Automatic Descent

11. Semi-Auto Depressurization

12. Manual ModeKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C008-SG 1-21-4 01 OCT 10 13. Summary

14. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-1 01 OCT 10 

# Ice and Rain Protection System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 Ice and Rain Protection System.



### II. Duration

- 0.7 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Ice and Rain Protection System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 12, Anti-Ice and Rain Protection 2. Section III, Limitations a. Engine Anti-Ice b. Wing Anti-Ice c. Windshield Heat d. Windshield Rain RepellentKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-2 01 OCT 10 

# Ice and Rain Protection System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The KC-10 ice and rain protecti on system prevents ice formation and provides for ice and rain removal. The system employs mechanical windshield wipers, chemical water r epellent and anti-ici ng air from the pneumatic and engine bleed systems. Pito t and static ports system icing protection is provided through electric ally heated elements. The ice and rain protection system controls and indi cators are located in the flight compartment.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the ice and rain protection system components.

2. Identify the operational characterist ics of the ice and rain protection system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Ice and Rain Protection System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. System Components

1. Introduction

2. Engine Anti-Ice

3. Antenna/Wing Anti-Ice

4. Windshield/Clearview Window

a. Windshield/Clearview Window

b. Anti-Ice

c. Windshield WipersKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-3 01 OCT 10 d. Rain Repellent System

5. Pitot-Static Ice Protection

6. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators

b. Windshield/Clearview Window

c. Engine and Antenna

d. Pitot/Static Heaters

e. Pitot Heat Inop Light

f. Selector Positions

g. TAT Heater

h. Pitot Heat Selector

i. Wing Anti-Ice Switch

j. Wing Anti-Ice Lights

7. Summary

8. Quiz

C. Operational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Engine Anti-Ice

3. Antenna Anti-Ice

4. Wing Anti-Ice

5. Windshield Anti-Ice/Defog

6. Windshield Wipers/Rain Repellent

7. Summary

8. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C011-SG 1-22-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-1 01 OCT 10 

# Systems IGR III

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose

- The purpose of this IGR is to review the Pneumatic System, Air Conditioning System, Pressurization System and Ice and Rain Protection Systems.



### II. Duration - 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Systems IGR III Student Guide B. Classroom Presentation System C. Aircrew System Trainer (AST) D. Writing Materials



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. You should have completed these CBT lessons. 1. Pneumatic System 2. Air Conditioning System 3. Pressurization System 4. Ice and Rain Protection SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

1. Identify operational characte ristics of Pneumatic System.

2. Identify operational characteri stics of Air Conditioning System.

3. Identify operational characteri stics of Pressurization System.

4. Identify operational characteristi cs of Ice and Rain Protection System.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-3 01 OCT 10 

# Systems IGR III

Student Outline

A. Pneumatic System

1. Pneumatic System Components

a. Pneumatic air sources

(1) Engines (1 & 3)

(2) APU

(3) External air source

b. Bleed Air Valves

(1) 8th stage low pressure bleed check valve

(2) 14th stage high pressure bleed control valve

(3) Pressure regulator valve

(4) Over pressure valve

(5) Fan air valve

(6) APU valves

(7) Isolation valves (1-2, 1-3)

c. Air Distribution

(1) Bleed air pre-cooler

(2) Pneumatic System 1 – from pre-cooler

(3) Pneumatic System 3 – from pre-cooler

(4) Pneumatic System 2 – from 1-2 isolation valve

d. Manifold Failure Detection System – Thermal & PressureKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-4 01 OCT 10 Sensors/switches

(1) Fuselage Detector Loops

(2) Center Accessory Compartment

(3) Left and Right Wing Leading Edge

(4) Left and Right Wing Differential Pressure Switches

(5) Manifold Fail Detector (avionics compartment)

(6) Manifold Fault Identification Panel (CAC)

2. Pneumatic Controls and Indicators

a. Engine Pneumatic Supply Selector – Engines 1 & 3

b. MANIFOLD FAIL Light

c. TEMP HI Light

d. PNEU ABNORMAL Light

e. Pneumatic Temperature Gage

f. Pneumatic Pressure Gage

g. APU/ISOL VALVE Switch

h. 1-2/1-3 ISOL VALVE Switches

i. ISOL VALVE DISAGREE Lights

j. APU/ISOL VALVE OPEN Light

k. USE ENG PNEU SUPPLY light

B. Air Conditioning System

1. Air Conditioning Packs

a. Venturi

b. Flow Control and Shutoff ValveKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-5 01 OCT 10 c. Trim Air Regulator Valve

d. Fan

e. Compressor

f. Compressor Bypass Check Valve

g. Pneumatic Fuse Plug

h. Pneumatic Thermostat (bi-metallic)

i. Heat Exchanger

j. Turbine Inlet Temperature Sensor

k. Pneumatic Thermostat (bi-metallic)

l. Pneumatic Fuse Plug

m. Turbine

n. Turbine By-pass Valve

o. Water Separator

p. Pack Discharge Temperature Sensor

q. Pack Anti-ice Valve

r. Check Valve

s. System Manifold

t. Conditioned Air Dump Valve

u. Trim Air Manifold Pressure Switch

v. Zone Trim Air Valve

w. Manual Conditioned Air Shutoff Valve

x. Ground Conditioned Air Connectors

y. Over-pressure Relief ValvesKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-6 01 OCT 10 2. Air Conditioning Controls and Indicators

a. FE Air Conditioning Panel

(1) Pneumatic FLOW Gage

(2) Pack Function Selector

(3) PACK OFF light

(4) TURB INLET TEMP gage

(5) PACK TEMP VALVE POS Indicator

(6) PACK DISCH TEMP Gage

(7) PACK IND SEL

(8) Temperature selector (3)

(9) VALVE POS Indicator

(10) AVIONIC FLOW Switch

(11) TRIM AIR Switch

(12) DUCT AVIONIC COMP OVERHEAT Light

(13) COMPT/DUCT Temp Gage

(14) LAV/GALLEY VENT switch

b. FE Annunciator Panel Lights

(1) AVIONIC FLOW OFF

(2) AIR COND TRIM AIR PRESS HI

(3) CTR ACCESS COMPT FLOW OFF

(4) AIR COND DOORS

(5) AR AVIONIC FLOW OFF

c. Cabin Air Shutoff HandleKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-7 01 OCT 10 (1) Passenger Configuration

(2) Cargo Configuration

(3) UP for aircraft dispatch

d. Ram Air Valve Control (Tee) Handle

e. Airflow Indicator

3. System Operati on – Operating Modes

a. Pre-conditioned Air

b. Automatic Mode

c. Manual Mode

C. Pressurization System

1. System Components

a. Cabin Pressure Controller

b. Two Motor-operated Actuators – Active and Reserve

c. Thrust Recovery Valve

d. Pressure Relief Valves (3)

2. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls

(1) Mode Switch

(2) Altitude Select Knob

(3) Landing BARO Set Knob

(4) Rate Limit Selector

(5) Manual CAB ALT Control Wheel

(6) CAB/PRESS MAN/AUTO HandleKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-8 01 OCT 10 b. Indicators

(1) Thrust Recovery (Outfl ow) Valve Position Indicator

(2) Cabin Altitude Rate Indicator

(3) Cabin Altitude/differential Pressure Gage

(4) CAB PRESS RELIEF OPEN Light

(5) CABIN ALT Warning Light

(6) CAB ALT WARN HORN Button

(7) ALT SCHED Placard

3. Pressurization System Operation

a. Automatic Pressurization Schedule

b. Operating Modes

(1) Automatic Mode

(2) Semi-Automatic Mode

(3) Manual Cabin Pressure Control

D. Ice and Rain Protection System

1. Engine, Wing, Antenna

a. Engine Anti-icing

b. Wing Anti-icing

c. Upper Antenna Anti-icing

2. Windshield

a. Windshield Anti-icing

b. Windshield Defogging

c. Windshield WipersKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-9 01 OCT 10 d. Rain Repellant System

3. Pitot-Static & Angle-of-attack (AOA)

a. Pitot Tubes – Dual Heaters

b. Static Ports – Si ngle Element Heater

c. Angle-of-attack Sensor

d. Total Air Temperature (TAT) Probe

4. Controls and Indicators

a. Forward Overhead Panel

(1) Windshield Anti-Ice

(2) Windshield Defog

(3) Meter Sel & Heat

(4) Heater Current Meter

(5) Engine & Antenna Anti-Ice switches

(6) Rain Repellant

(7) Windshield Wiper switch (2)

b. Pilot's Annunciator Panel

(1) ENG ANTI-ICE DISAGREE lights

(a) ENG 1 & 3

(b) ENG 2

(2) ENG 2 ANTI-ICE COWL PRESS HI

(3) ENG 2 ANTI-ICE COWL DUCT FAIL

(4) ENG ANTI-ICE SWITCH ON

(5) ANTENNA ANTI-ICE DISAGREEKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-I036-SG 1-23-10 01 OCT 10 (6) WINDSHIELD ANTI-ICE INOP (L & R)

(7) PITOT HEAT INOP

c. FE Upper Instrument Panel #2

(1) Wing Anti-Ice switch

d. Pitot Heater Select Switches (FE Equipment Panel)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T303-SG 1-24-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD Systems III

I. Purpose

– This mission is an instructor-gui ded review of the normal functions and operation of the Pneumatic, Air Condit ioning, Pressurization, and Ice and Rain Protection Systems. Students are not responsible for completion of checklists. The instructor(s) will ensure aircraft configuration, panels, and switches are set properly. This lesson will not be graded.



### II. Duration – 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. FTD Systems III Instructor Guide C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Descrip tion – Applicable Systems B. Attend classroom reviewKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T303-SG 1-24-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Identify the operationa l characteristics of the Pneumatic System. 2. Identify the operat ional characteristics of t he Air Conditioning System. 3. Identify the operat ional characteristics of t he Pressurization System. 4. Identify the operat ional characteristics of the Ice and Rain Protection System.



## Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs.

1. Pneumatic System – C ontrols and Indicators 2. Pneumatic System – External Air 3. Pneumatic System – APU 4. Pneumatic System – Engines 5. Air Conditioning System – Controls and Indicators 6. Air Conditioning System Operation 7. Pressurization System – Controls and Indicators 8. Pressurization System Operation 9. Ice and Rain Protection System – Controls and Indicators 10. Ice and Rain Protec tion System OperationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-1 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Instrument System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the KC-10 flight instrument system.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Flight Instrument System CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 6, Flight Control/F light Instruments/Auto Flight (1) Flight InstrumentsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-2 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Instrument System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the KC-10 flight instrument system . It includes pitot-static systems, two central ai r data computer systems, or CADCs, basic and standby flight in struments, and related components. These systems sense environmental condition s and use the data to influence navigation and flight instrumentation.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the flight in strument system components.

2. Identify the operationa l characteristics of t he flight instrument system.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Flight Instrument System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Flight Instruments Components

1. Introduction

2. Pitot-Static System

a. Pitot-Static System

b. Pitot System

c. Static System

3. Total Air Temperature Probe

4. Central Air Data Computers (CADC)

5. Flight Data RecorderKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-3 01 OCT 10 6. Controls and Indicators

a. Controls and Indicators

b. Primary Instruments

(1) Mach/Airspeed Indicator

(2) Overspeed Warning System

(3) Altimeter

(4) Vertical Speed Indicator

(5) Attitude Director Indicator

c. Standby Instruments

(1) Standby Instruments

(2) Attitude Indicator

(3) Altimeter

(4) Airspeed Indicator

d. TAS/SAT Indicator

e. Flight Data Recorder

f. Static Air Switches

g. CADC/IFF Switches

7. Summary

8. Quiz

C. Flight Instruments Op erational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Basic Flight Instruments

a. Basic Flight Instruments

b. Airspeed Indicator

c. Overspeed Warning SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-4 01 OCT 10 d. Altimeter

(1) Altimeter

(2) Barometer Set Knob

(3) Altitude Bug Knob

(4) Low Altitude Alert

(5) Negative Flag

(6) Loss of Power/Internal Failure

(7) Altitude Advisory Light

e. Vertical Speed Indicator

f. Attitude Director Indicator

(1) Attitude Director Indicator

(2) V-Command Bars

(3) Flight Director Flag

(4) Flight Director Light

(5) Fast/Slow Indicator

(6) Runway/Localizer Indicator

(7) Glideslope Pointer

(8) DH Light

(9) Malfunction Flags

(10) ADI Test Button

3. Standby Instruments

a. Standby Instruments

b. Attitude Indicator

c. Altimeter

d. Airspeed IndicatorKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-5 01 OCT 10 4. STATIC AIR Switch

5. TAS/SAT Indicator

6. Flight Data Recorder

7. Selector Switches

a. Selector Switches

b. Flight Director Command Selector

c. CADC Selector

d. CADC Switched Light

8. Summary

9. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C015-SG 1-25-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-1 01 OCT 10 

# Cabin Doors

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the location and operation of doors and crew entrances on the KC-10.



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A- 9, Cargo Loading Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Cabin Doors CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1, Systems Description a. Part 8, Doors and Ladders B. T.O. 1C-10(K) A-9 1. Section III, Aircraft Co nfiguration (Application) a. Cargo DoorKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-2 01 OCT 10 

# Cabin Doors

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to the lo cation and operation of doors and crew entrances on the KC-10. Thes e doors provide normal crew and passenger entry and exit, and the pr imary means of escape in an emergency.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the characterist ics of the Cabin Doors.

2. Identify the operati onal characteristics of the Cabin Doors.

3. Identify the procedures to op erate the Cabin Door Emergency Controls.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Cabin Doors

1. Lesson Overview

B. Cabin Door Characteristics

1. Cabin Door Locations and Description

a. Cabin Door Locations

b. Cabin Door Description

2. Exterior Controls

3. Door 1L Manual Drive

4. Interior Controls and Indicators

a. Interior Controls and Indicators

b. Interior Controls Locations

c. Pneumatic Pressure ReservoirKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-3 01 OCT 10 d. Mode Verification Indicator

e. Slide Raft Cylinder Low Pressure Light

f. Manual Lift Bar

g. FE Panel Cabin Do or Status Lights

5. Cabin Door Characteristics Quiz

C. Cabin Door Operations

1. Cabin Door Operation Introduction

2. Exterior Control: Location and Handle

a. Exterior Controls: Location and Handle

b. Door Control Switch - Opening/Closing the Door

c. Auxiliary Control Handle

d. Emergency Override

3. Interior Controls: Location and Differences

a. Interior Controls: Location and Differences

b. Doors 1L, 1R Emergency Controls

(1) Doors 1L, 1R Emergency Controls

(2) Slide Arming/Disarming - Doors 1L, 1R

(3) Emergency Override - Doors 1L, 1R

(a) Emergency Override - Doors 1L, 1R

(b) Door Emergency Control Handle

(c) Reset Lever

c. Doors 1L, 1R Controls

(1) Doors 1L, 1R Controls - Slide Inflation Cylinder Indications

(2) Doors 1L, 1R Controls - Slide Armed/Disarmed IndicationsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-4 01 OCT 10 d. Doors 2L, 2R Controls/Location

(1) Doors 2L, 2R Controls/Location

(2) Slide Arming/Disarming - Doors 2L, 2R, 4R

(3) Door Emergency Control Handle

(a) Door Emergency Control Handle – Location

(b) Door Emergency Control Handle – Operation

(4) Doors 2L, 2R, 4R

(a) Doors 2L and 2R

(b) Door 4R

e. Opening/Closing the Door - Interior Controls

4. Cabin Door Operations Quiz

D. Cabin Doors Emergency Controls

1. Cabin Door Exterior Emergency Operation

2. Interior Controls: Doors 1L, 1R Controls

a. Interior Controls: Doors 1L, 1R Controls

b. Doors 1L, 1R With Slide/Raft Deployment

c. Doors 1L, 1R Operation wit hout Slide/Raft Deployment

d. Doors 2L, 2R, 4R

e. Doors 2L, 2R Operation with Slide/Raft Deployment

f. Doors 2L, 2R Operation without Slide/Raft Deployment

g. Backup System

(1) Backup System

(2) Cabin Doors Backup System

h. Manual Lift Bar Operation with Slide/Raft Deployment

i. Manual Lift Bar Operation without Slide/Raft DeploymentKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-5 01 OCT 10 3. Resetting Controls for Normal Operation

a. Resetting Controls for Normal Operation

b. Doors 1L, 1R RESET Lever

c. Doors 2L, 2R, 4R RESET Lever

(1) Doors 2L, 2R, 4R RESET Lever

(2) Door RESET Lever

4. Cabin Door Emergency Controls Quiz

III. EXAMKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C025-SG 1-26-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-1 01 OCT 10 

# Emergency Equipment

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson introduces you to t he emergency equipm ent essential to the safety of the flight crew and personnel during adverse conditions.



### II. Duration - 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Emergency Equipment CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 11, Emergency Equipment (1) Emergency Exits (2) Portable Fire Extinguishers (3) Emergency Passenger Oxygen System (EPOS) (4) Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters (5) Escape Slide/Raft (6) Emergency Locator Transmitter (7) Aircrew Eye/Respiratory Protection System (8) Escape Slide/RaftKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-2 01 OCT 10 

# Emergency Equipment

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to the KC-10 emergency equipment essential to the safety of the flight crew an d personnel during adverse conditions. It also introduces the escape slide/rafts and the seven man raft. The first segment describes the emergency equipment on the KC-10 and the second segment discusses the slide/rafts and seven man raft.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the emergen cy equipment components.

2. Identify the operati onal characteristics of the Slide/Raft and associated equipment.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Emergency Equipment

1. Lesson Overview

B. Emergency Equipment Components

1. Primary/Secondar y Emergency Exits

a. Emergency Exit Locations

b. Aircraft Door Operation

c. Cockpit Door

d. Door 4R

2. Escape Ropes

a. Escape Rope Locations

b. Clearview Window Escape Ropes

c. Door 4R Escape RopeKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-3 01 OCT 10 3. Emergency Lights

a. Emergency Lighting System

b. Lighting Conditions

c. Emergency Lights Power

4. Life Vests

5. Emergency Equipment Panels

6. Fire Extinguishers

a. Fire Extinguishers – Halon

b. Fire Extinguishers – Graviner

c. Fire Extinguishers – Lavatory

7. Emergency Passenger Oxygen System (EPOS)

8. Aircrew Eye/Respiratory Protection (AERP) System

9. Emergency Locator Transmitters

10. Emergency Locator Transmitter Component Locations

11. Emergency Equipment Components Quiz

C. Escape Slide/Rafts and Associated E quipment Operational Characteristics

1. Escape Slide/Rafts

a. Escape Slide/Rafts

b. Emergency Egress

c. Escape Slide/Rafts Deployment

d. Raft Mode Operation

e. Survival Equipment

2. Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters Location

3. Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters Activation

4. Emergency Radio Beacon Transmitters OperationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C002-SG 1-27-4 01 OCT 10 5. Seven-Man Life Raft

6. Escape Slide/Rafts and Asso ciated Equipment Operational Characteristics Quiz

III. EXAMKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-1 01 OCT 10 

# Oxygen System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the components, operational characteristi cs of the oxygen system.



### II. Duration

- 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Oxygen Systems CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 11, Emergency Equipment (1) Oxygen System (2) Flight Crew Oxygen System (3) Passenger Oxygen SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-2 01 OCT 10 

# Oxygen System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the components and operational characteristics of the oxygen system. The oxygen syst em consists of two independent emergency systems. One system is used for the flight crew while the other system is used for s upport personnel and passengers.

B. Objectives

1. Identify components of the Oxygen Systems.

2. Identify the Operational Characteristics of the Flight Crew Oxygen System.

3. Identify the Operational C haracteristics of the Emergency Passenger Oxygen System.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Oxygen System

1. Lesson Overview

B. Components of Oxygen Systems

1. High Pressure Oxygen

2. Oxygen Regulator

3. Oxygen Quantity

4. ARO/Additional Cr ew Oxygen Shutoff

5. Chemical Oxygen Generating

6. Auto Mask Release

7. Manual Mask Release

8. Portable Oxygen SupplyKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-3 01 OCT 10 a. Portable Oxygen Supply - Location

b. Portable Oxygen Supply - Operation

c. Portable Oxygen Supply - Duration

9. Emergency Passenger Oxygen System

10. Components of Oxygen System Quiz

C. Flight Crew Oxygen System Operational Characteristics

1. Regulator Operation

2. Regulator Safety Features

3. Oxygen Quantity Selector Switch

4. Oxygen Quantity

5. Support Personnel Oxygen System

6. ARO/Additional Cr ew Oxygen Shutoff

7. Flight Crew Oxygen System Op erational Characteristics Quiz

III. EXAMKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C028-SG 1-28-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-1 01 OCT 10 

# Emergency Ground Egress

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this video is to demonstrate exiting the aircraft during emergency conditions. While the program is intended primar ily for maintenance personnel, the contents are applic able to KC-10 crewmembers.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. None



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Emergency Ground Egress Video B. Emergency Ground Egress Student Guide



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Review Student OutlineKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objective

1. Describe procedures for emergen cy ground egress from the KC-10.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-3 01 OCT 10 

# Emergency Ground Egress

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Instructor Introduction

B. Purpose

The purpose of this lesson is to review ground evacuation procedures. There will be a video, followed by discussion. While the KC-10 has an excellent safety record, it is not exempt from the risks and hazards associated with aircraft operation. The video begins with a KC -10 engulfed in flames and heavy black smoke. This tragic accident, which resu lted in loss of life, occurred while maintenance personnel were working on th e aircraft. You can easily imagine how difficult it would be to evacuate the airc raft, and escape through a fire of this magnitude.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Emergency Ground Egress

1. Emergency Oxygen Equipment

a. Crew Masks

(1) Location

(2) Use

b. Portable Oxygen Bottles

(1) Location

(2) Use

c. Emergency Escape Breathing Device

(1) Location

(2) UseKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-4 01 OCT 10 d. Smoke Goggles

(1) Location

(2) Use

2. Aircraft Exits

a. Clearview Windows

(1) Location

(2) Operation

(3) Use of escape ropes

b. Cabin Doors

(1) Location

(2) Operation

(a) Electrical

(b) Emergency (pneumatic)

(c) Manual lift

(3) Use of escape slide

(4) Use of escape rope

3. Emergency Actions

a. Notification

b. Exit

c. Assembly

d. First aid

e. Information to emergency personnel

III. SUMMARY

The very strong message delivered in the video is that an emergency can occur while the aircraft is on the ramp, with tragic consequences. You may be accomplishing a routine preflight and very quickly become involved in aKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-5 01 OCT 10 catastrophe. The key to surviving a gr ound emergency is situational awareness, and being prepared to take appropriate action.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original PIQ/FIQ-V059-SG 1-29-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-1 01 OCT 10 

# Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the specifications used to certify performance for commercial and military aircraft, their differences in definitions and terminology, and their impact on KC-10 Takeoff Performance.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1- 1, Performance Manual B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831)



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Introduction to Takeoff Performance CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section 3, Takeoff B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 1. Sections 1.0 - 4.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-2 01 OCT 10 

# Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to intr oduce you to the specifications used to certify performance for Commercial and Military aircraft, their differences in definitions and terminology, and their impact on KC-10 Takeoff Performance.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the differences between commercial and military specifications used to ce rtify aircraft performance.

2. Identify the definiti ons of terminology a ssociated with performance calculations.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Introduction to Takeoff Performance

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Specifications and Certifications

1. Introduction

2. Overview

3. Certification Process

a. Commercial Aircraft

b. Military Aircraft

c. KC-10 Extender

d. HighlightsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-3 01 OCT 10 e. Commercial Criteria

(1) 115% rule

(2) Engine Loss at V1

(3) Accelerate/Stop Distance

f. Military Criteria

(1) Engine Fail/TO Continued

(2) Engine Fail/TO Aborted

(3) Balanced Runway Concept

g. Climb Gradient Requirement

4. Summary

5. Quiz 1

C. Terminology

1. Introduction

2. Performance Calculations

a. Critical Field Length

b. Lineup Distance

c. Stressed Overrun

3. Speed Requirements

a. Ground Minimum Control Speed

b. Decision Speed

c. Minimum Unstick Speed

d. Angle of Incidence

e. 1.0g Stall Speed

f. Air Minimum Control Speed

g. Minimum Stall SpeedKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C832-SG 1-30-4 01 OCT 10 h. Rotate Speed

i. Liftoff Speed

j. Takeoff Safety Speed

k. Minimum Climbout Speed

4. Initial Climb Requirements

a. Climb Gradient

b. Climb Flight Path

c. Actual Climb Gradient

d. Obstacle Clearance Criteria

e. Zone One

f. Zone Two

g. Zone Three

h. KC-10 Obstacle Clearance Criteria

5. Special Departure Pr ocedures (SDP) – Part 1

6. Special Departure Proc edures (SDP) – Part 2

7. Special Departure Pr ocedures (SDP) – Part 3

8. Special Departure Pr ocedures (SDP) – Part 4

9. Summary

10. Quiz 2

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-1 01 OCT 10 

# Takeoff Performance Charts

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the criteria used to establish the basis for the charted data in the performance manual and to cover the engine-out climb profile from lineup to the end of the pressure height for acceleration using previously learned terms and definitions.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1- 1, Performance Manual B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831)



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section 3, Takeoff B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) 1. Section 1.0 2. Section 2.0 3. Section 5.0 4. Section 6.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-2 01 OCT 10 

# Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the criteria used to establish the basis for the charted data in the perform ance manual and to cover the engine-out climb profile from lineup to the end of the pressure height for acceleration using previous ly learned terms and definitions.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the criteria used to es tablish charted KC-10 performance data.

2. Identify the events and parameters associat ed with the engine-out takeoff profile.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Takeoff Performance Charts

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Basis for Performance Charts

1. Introduction

2. General Electric CF6-50C2 Engines

3. N1 RPM

4. Flat Rated Engine

5. Break Point Temperature

6. Standard Day Temperature

7. Environmental EnvelopeKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-3 01 OCT 10 8. Full Takeoff Thrust

9. Reduced Thrust Takeoff

10. Assumed Temperature

11. Turbine Blade Creep

12. Safety Margins

13. Summary

14. Quiz 1

C. Engine-Out Profile

1. Introduction

2. Critical Field Length

3. Rolling Takeoff

4. Wind Direction/Velocity

5. Lineup Distance

6. Decision Speed

7. Decision Speed - Abort

8. Takeoff on Two Engines

9. Rotate Speed

10. Rotate Sequence

11. Warning

12. Climbout Speed

13. Acceleration Height

14. Pressure Height for Acceleration

15. Obstacle Height

16. Corrected Obstacle Height

17. Downhill TrajectoryKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C833-SG 1-31-4 01 OCT 10 18. Delta Correction

19. Reducing Required Gradient

20. Summary

21. Quiz 2

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to cover the complete KC-10 Takeoff and Landing Data Worksheet and TOLD Ca rd. You will cover the Takeoff Conditions section of t he worksheet, defining the information required to calculate the required data. You will use these conditions to complete the Takeoff Calculations section of the wor ksheet and compute the data required for emergency return immediat ely after takeoff. Finally, you will transfer the appropriate data to the TOLD Card tak eoff and landing sections, and compute the remaining data.



### II. Duration - 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1- 1, Performance Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### IV. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section III, Takeoff 2. Section IV, Approach and Landing 3. Section X, Mission Planning

CH 4 FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-1 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to cover the complete KC-10 Takeoff and Landing Data Worksheet and TOLD Card. You will cover the Takeoff Conditions section of the workshee t, defining the info rmation required to calculate the required data. You will use these conditions to complete the Takeoff Calculations section of the worksheet and compute the data required for emergency return immediatel y after takeoff. Finally, you will transfer the appropriate data to t he TOLD Card Takeoff and Landing sections, and compute the remaining data.

B. Objectives

1. Select the required Takeoff Condi tions data to complete the Takeoff Landing Data Worksheet.

2. Select the required Takeoff Co mputation data to complete the Takeoff and Landing Data Worksheet.

3. Select the required Emergency Return data to complete the Takeoff and Landing Data Worksheet.

4. Select the Takeoff and Landing Da ta to be transferred to the TOLD Card.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Takeoff Performance Computations

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Takeoff Conditions

1. Introduction

2. TOLD Card

CH 4 FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-2 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

3. Aircraft Conditions

a. Gross Weight

b. Center of Gravity

4. Environmental Conditions

a. Outside Air Temperature

b. Dew Point

c. Anti-Ice

d. Pressure Altitude

e. Wind Direction

f. Wind Velocity

5. Airfield Conditions

a. Runway Heading

b. Runway Available

c. Runway Condition Reading

d. Runway Surface Condition

e. Runway Slope

f. Field Elevation

g. Obstacle Height

h. Obstacle Distance

6. Aircraft Configuration

a. Air Conditioning

b. Reverse Thrust

7. Summary

8. Quiz 1

C. Takeoff Computations

CH 4 FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-3 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

1. Introduction

2. Environmental Factors

a. Wind Data

3. Weight and Distance Factors

a. Climb Gradient

b. Correction Factor for Config.

c. Equivalent Field Length

d. Runway Available Limiting Weight

e. Climb Gradient Limiting Weight

f. Max. Takeoff Gross Weight

g. Flap Setting

h. Reduced Power Takeoff

i. Tire Speed Limiting Weight

4. Speeds for Takeoff

a. Ground Min. Control Speed

b. Critical Engine Failure Speed

c. Max. Braking Speed

d. Max. Allowable Weight

e. Rotate Speed

f. Min. Rotate Speed

g. V2/Climbout Speed

5. Max Allowable Brake Temp

a. Max Allowable Brake Temp

b. Brake Zone

6. Assumed Temperature

CH 4 FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-4 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

a. Assumed RALW/TEMP

b. Assumed CGLW/TEMP

c. Assumed TEMP

7. Summary

8. Quiz 2

D. Emergency Return Data

1. Introduction

2. Emergency Return Data

a. Emergency Return Data

b. Relative Density

c. Threshold Speed

d. Flare Distance

e. Stopping Distance Ratio

f. Landing Ground Roll

g. Landing Distance

3. Summary

4. Quiz 3

E. TOLD Card Completion

1. Introduction

2. Takeoff Data/Gross Weight

a. Takeoff Data/Gross Weight

b. Flap Setting

c. N1/Power Setting

d. Assumed TEMP

e. V1/Decision Speed

CH 4 FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-5 01 MAR 14KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 4 f. VR/Rotate Speed

g. V2/Climbout Speed

h. Flap/Slat Retraction Speeds /Minimum Maneuver Speed

FIQ-C835-SG 1-32-6 01 MAR 14 i. Stabilizer Trim Setting

j. Acceleration Height

3. Emergency Return Data

a. Emergency Return Data

b. Emergency Return Speeds

4. TOLD Card Summary

5. Summary

6. Quiz 4

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-1 01 JUL 13 

# Performance Workshop I TRT TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to practice completing a Takeoff Rated Th rust TOLD card. Be sure you have completed the prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. Your instructor will pres ent the workshop exercise s and provide appropriate guidance if you have any questions. Once again, this is intended to be a workshop and you are encouraged to ask questions.

Part I describes the topics that will be co vered by the workshop exercises. Part II consists of the workshop exercises.



### II. Duration

- 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Classroom B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. Performance Workshop I - TRT Told Card Student Guide D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Introduction to KC-10 Tak eoff Performance CBT Lesson B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W831) C. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson D. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook (W834) E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data 3. Section III, Takeoff 4. Section X, Mission PlanningKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-2 01 JUL 13 

# Objective

1. Complete a KC-10 Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-3 01 JUL 13 

# Part I

TRT Time Limits

Takeoff Rated Thrust is the maximum thrust avai lable. Used only for takeoff, it is time limited to five minutes of continuous use with all engines operating. In the event of an engine failure, the TRT limit can be extend ed to ten minutes of continuous use.

Requirements for a TRT Takeoff

A Takeoff Rated Thrust takeoff will be pla nned and a TOLD Card Worksheet completed for the following conditions:

• RCR less than 10

• RSC reported

• Anti-skid braking system or one ma in gear wheel brake inoperative

• One center gear wheel brak e inoperative and takeoff gross weight is greater than 460,000 pounds

• Headwinds used for mission accomplishment

• Suspected windshear reported

• Commercial Type II Deicing/Anti-icing fluid has been applied

Completing TOLD Card Worksheet and TOLD Card

It is the flight engineer’s responsibility to complete the AF IMT 4089 TOLD Card Worksheet and TOLD card based on envi ronmental and aircraft conditions. The performance data will be checked by the pilot or another f light engineer. The TOLD Card Worksheet and the Obstacle Clearance Worksheet aid in the computation of the Takeoff and Landing Data. The Obstacle Cl earance Worksheet wil l be covered in a later lesson. Once all computations ar e computed, the appropria te speeds and settings are transferred to the TOLD Card portion.

Begin by entering all applicable conditions in the Tak eoff Conditions blocks of the worksheet. Whether performing static or rolling takeoff, remember the alignment distance correction of 300 feet from runway length is the same. When either a wind direction greater than 45 ° from runway heading or a cro sswind component greater than 23 knots exists, accomplish a rolling takeoff.

Record all computations on the worksheet. It is not necessary to enter a number in every block. It is permissi ble to enter a check mark ( √ ) if: a condition does not exist, the condition was checked but found not to be a factor, or the re sults of the computation are outside the parameter s of the chart.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-4 01 JUL 13 When computing a TRT Takeoff, place a check mark ( √ ) in the Assumed RALW/TEMP, Assumed CGLW/TEMP, and Assumed Temp blocks on the worksheet.

The Max Allowable Brake Temp erature is based on computed V 1 and is the maximum allowable brake temperature for takeoff. Use the brake cooling time charts (sheet 1 and 2) in the performance manual to compute this value.

The brake temperature zone block is used as a reference to determine how hot the brakes may be after an abort. Use the Brake Energy chart in the performance manual to determine the correct temperature zone.

Complete a TOLD Card for al l takeoffs to include the emergency return speeds and landing distance based on flaps/slats at 35 ° /EXT and takeoff gross weight. Record the emergency return data in the l anding portion of the TOLD Card.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-5 01 JUL 13 

## Part II

Workshop Exercises

1. GIVEN:

Gross Weight 560,000 Takeoff CG 24.0% OAT 23 ° C Dew Point T Anti-ice OFF Pressure Altitude +500’ Wind Direction CALM Wind Velocity 0 Runway heading 170 ° Runway Length 11,500 RCR 23 RSC 0 Slope 0.6 UP Climb Gradient 2.5% Field Elevation 423’ Obstacle Height N/A Obstacle Distance N/A Air Conditioning ON Reverse Thrust YES

Compute Takeoff Performance using Takeoff Rated Thrust. Assume a Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is available requir ing a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no obstacle and a 11,500 Max LOP. The MTOGW exceeds given gross weight of 560,000 lbs.

Note: Reduced Thrust Takeoff data is covered in a later workshop.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-6 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E844-SG 1-33-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Performance Workshop II Reduced Thrust TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to practice completing a Reduced Thrust TOLD card. Be sure you have completed the prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. Your instructor will present the workshop ex ercises and provide appr opriate guidance if you have any questions.

Part I describes the topics that will be co vered by the workshop exercises. Part II consists of the workshop ex ercises to be completed.



### II. Duration

- 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Fli ght Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Classroom B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. Performance Workshop II - Reduced Thrust TOLD Card Student Guide D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Introduction to KC-10 Tak eoff Performance CBT Lesson B. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook (W832) C. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson D. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook (W834) E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data 3. Section III, Takeoff 4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 5. Section X, Mission Planning

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Objective

1. Complete KC-10 Reduced Thrust Ta keoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card.

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


## Part I

Reduced Thrust Takeoffs

A reduced thrust takeoff is computed and used to extend the life of the engine and reduce maintenance cost.

Thrust planned for takeoff is based on the amount of thrust available versus the amount of thrust needed, with both values determined by aircraft and environmental conditions. In essence, if the amount of thrust needed for a given set of aircraft and environmental conditions is less than the amount of th rust available, a reduced thrust setting is computed based on assumed temperature

.
With other conditions constant, assumed tem perature is the temperature at which the aircraft gross weight is calculated as the ma ximum allowable. In other words, the lower the aircraft gross weight, t he higher the assumed temperature; the higher the assumed temperature the less thrust required for takeoff. Conversely, as weight increases, assumed temperature decreases, thus requiri ng more thrust for takeoff. This trend continues until at some point the assumed tem perature is equal to am bient temperature. At this point, Reduced Thrust equals Rated Thrust , or TRT.

It is important to understand the relationship between thrust, temperature, and pressure altitude as well as certain lim itations when determining the th rust to use for takeoff data computations. Since the engine is flat-rated, it will produce a constant amount of thrust for a given pressure altitude-based temperat ure within the environmental envelope. However, beyond a certain point (break poi nt), thrust decreases as temperature increases. Break point temperat ures for specific pressure altitudes from Sea Level to 14,000 feet are shown in T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Section III/Takeoff. No tice at 5000 feet the break point temperature becomes constant and remains constant up to the certified maximum altitude of 14,000 feet. These al titudes represent part of the certified environmental envelope.

The temperature limits associated with the environmental envelope are -54 ° C to 50 ° C, but not to exceed standar d day temperature plus 40 ° C. In some conditions, the "+40 ° C above standard day temperature" valu e determines the maximum temperature limit of the environ mental envelope for the airc raft. Additionally, for assumed temperature computations, t he assumed temperature must not exceed the maximum environmental envelope temperature by more than 10 ° C. For example, you are planning a departure from Color ado Springs with an OAT of 43 ° C and a pressure altitude of +5180’. A check of the standard atmosphere table reveals that the standard day temperature for that pressure altitude is 5 ° C. Therefore, the environmental envelope maximum tem perature limit is 45 ° C. Applying the added 10 ° C limitation for assumed temperature computat ions, the maximum assumed temperature that can be used for reduced thrust calculation is 55 ° C.

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

When performing reduced thrust TOLD calcul ations, apply the assumed temperature value to all calculations except pressure height for accele ration. Determine pressure height for acceleration using the actual OAT or ambient temperature. Also, both the Brake-Cooling Time and Brake Energy c harts always use actual outside air temperature.



### V R 

### < V R MIN

There may be occasions, especially when operat ing at light gross weights, that the computed rotate speed (V R ) may be less than mini mum rotate speed (V R MIN ). Remember, minimum rotate speed is the we t/icy ground minimum control speed. This is the minimum airspeed at which the aircraft, after rotate from a three point attitude, can lose a wing engine and mainta in directional control, main gear still on the ground, and not exceed the lateral deviation of 25 feet from runway centerline.

When V R is less then V R MIN , V R must be increased or "bumped" to equal V R MIN

. Likewise, if V R is increased, then V 2 must be increased equally. For example: V R and V 2 are computed to be 115 and 129 KIAS respectively, while V R MIN is computed to be 133 KIAS, V R must be increased (bumped) 18 knots to equal V R MIN . Now, V R equals 133, likewise V 2 is bumped 18 knots and now equals 147 KIAS.

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


## Part II

Workshop Exercises

1. GIVEN:

Gross Weight 495,000 Takeoff CG 26.0% OAT 17 ° C Dew Point T Anti-ice OFF Pressure Altitude +210’ Wind Direction CALM Wind Velocity 0 Runway heading 350 ° Runway Length 10,000 RCR 23 RSC 0 Slope 1.2 DN Field Elevation 194’ Climb Gradient 2.5% Obstacle Height N/A Obstacle Distance N/A Air Conditioning ON Reverse Thrust YES

Compute Takeoff Performance. For the pur poses of this training event assume a Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is availa ble requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no obstacle depicted and a 10,000 Max LOP. T he MTOGW exceeds given gross weight of 495,000 lbs.

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

2. GIVEN:

Gross Weight 290,000 Takeoff CG 26.0% OAT 20 ° C Dew Point T Anti-ice OFF Pressure Altitude +33’ Wind Direction 150 ° Wind Velocity 10 Runway heading 180 ° Runway Length 10,500 RCR 23 RSC 0 Slope 0 Field Elevation 45’ Climb Gradient 2.5% Obstacle Height N/A Obstacle Distance N/A Air Conditioning ON Reverse Thrust YES

Compute Takeoff Performance. For the pur poses of this training event assume a Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is availa ble requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no obstacle depicted and a 10,500 Max LOP. T he MTOGW exceeds given gross weight of 290,000 lbs.

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E845-SG 1-34-10 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# KC-10 Aircraft Orientation

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson provides an instruct or-guided orientation to a KC-10 aircraft. It is scheduled to follow imm ediately after the systems academic lessons and prior to normal procedures instruction. The guided tour will familiarize you with the general features of the ai rcraft, emphasize specific components of concern to each crew position, and wil l demonstrate the F light Engineer’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection. Additionally, you will perform procedures related to the cockpit windows, seats, and cabin doors.



### II. Duration - 4.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. KC-10 Aircraft B. KC-10 Aircraft Or ientation Student Guide



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. You should be prepar ed to describe and demonstrate operation of selected aircraft equipment. Review the following material, as required prior to the tour. 1. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1

a. Section I, System Description (as required) b. Section IV, Normal Procedures (1) FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Objectives

Demonstrate Proficiency - During this training mission, yo u are expected to practice and demonstrate proficie ncy on the following procedures:

1. Operate the clearview windows. 2. Operate the crew seats. 3. Operate the cabin doors.



## Profile

1. Flight Engineer’s Exterior Inspection 2. Interior Familiarization a. Cockpit b. Cabin/Cargo Compartment c. ARO Compartment 3. Wheel Well components (Time Permitting)

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


## KC-10 Aircraft Orientation

AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR
FE Exterior Inspection Instructor points out and discusses:

Initial safety inspection: • Wheel Chocks • Landing Gear Doors • Flight Control Surfaces • APU Inlet/Exhaust Areas • Boom and Drogue (WARP if equipped) • Pitot & Inlet Covers

1. NOSE SECTION • Pack Inlet and Exit Doors • L Angle of Attack Sensor • Pitot Tubes • Windshield Wipers • Skin and Radome • R Angle of Attack Sensor • TAT Tube

2. NOSE GEAR AND WHEEL WELL • Tires • Linkage (engaged) • Gear Safety Pin • Steering Bypass Pin • Landing/Taxi Lights • General Condition of Wheel Well and Bulkhead Door Closed • Leaks

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-4 01 JUL 13 AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR
FE Exterior Inspection (continued) 3. RIGHT FORWARD FUSELAGE • Fwd Passenger Door • Landing Light • Static Ports • Mid Passenger Door • Cabin Pressure Relief Valves (door flush) • Skin (all panels closed and fastened) • Wing and Turnoff Lights

4. RIGHT WING AND FUSELAGE • Inboard Slat • Fuel Level Sticks and Panels • Engine 3 (panels closed and fastened) • Ground Wires (Removed) • Outboard Slat • Fuel Vent • Wing Air Refueling Pod (if installed) a. Panels closed and fastened. b. RAT cover removed. c. Strake on outboard side of POD. d. Hose and basket stowed. e. Light assembly retaining clip installed. f. Retract crank removed. g. Check for fuel leaks/POD damage. • Wing Tip and Lights • Outboard Ailer on and Trailing Edge • Fuel Dump • Outboard Flap • Inboard Aileron • Inboard Flap

5. RIGHT LANDING GEAR • Tires • Strut • Gear and Wheel Well Area • Ground Lock Pin • Leaks • BrakesKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-5 01 JUL 13 AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR
FE Exterior Inspection (continued) 6. CENTER GEAR • Tires • Strut • Strut Press Gage Normal • Linkage (engage) • Gear Safety Pin • General Condition of Wheel Well • Brakes

7. CAC SHROUD, FWD TANK, and AFT TANK LEAK SENSE DRAINS • Coordination with ground crew/maintenance

8. RIGHT AFT FUSELAGE • Right Aft Exit Door • Fuselage Skin (all panels closed/fastened) • APU Compartment Door • APU Inlet Doors (closed and clear if not operating) • APU Exhaust Area Clear • Boom and ARO Station Windows

9. EMPENNAGE AND CONTROL SURFACES • All Fixed and Movable Control Surfaces (panels closed and fastened) • Elevator Surfaces (both inboard fasteners secured) • Tail Cone • Engine 2 (panels closed and fastened) • Fan Exhaust Thrust Reversers • Rudder Surfaces • Boom and Drogue Area • Leaks

10. LEFT AFT FUSELAGE • Inspection Same as Right Aft Fuselage (except Exit Door)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-6 01 JUL 13 AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR
FE Exterior Inspection (continued) 11. LEFT LANDING GEAR • Inspection Same as Right Landing Gear • APU Ground Control Panel

12. LEFT WING AND ENGINE • Inspection Same as Right Wing and Engine, to include WARP POD if installed

13. LEFT FORWARD FUSELAGE • Inspection Same as Right Forward Fuselage • Outflow Valves (full open) • Ground Pneumatic Connectors • Oxygen Blowout Disc (normal) • Water/Oxygen Service Panel Closed • Avionic Venturi Discharge Clear • Cargo Door and Vent Valve (flush and closed)

Avionics Compartment (access through Nosewheel compartment) 1. Access Hatch and Light switch 2. Ram Air Valve Tee Handle 3. General Equipment location 4. Secure Radio (KY-58)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

COCKPIT

Pilot and Copilot's Position Overhead Panel, Instrument Panel, Pedestal and Consoles: 1. Emphasize the Pilot positions are approximately 15 feet o ff the ground and 25 feet forward of the nose gear.

Pilot's Seat: 1. Demonstrate the power seat controls for positioning the seat vert ically, horizontally, and fully aft and outboard (exit). Demonstrate same using the manual vertical/horizontal control handles. 2. Demonstrate seat alignment markings for proper individual vertical and horizontal seat position sighting. 3. Student occupies seat and correctly operates the controls.

Clearview Windows and Visors 1. Demonstrate operation of windows and show correct position for visor when opening window. 2. Show location of Emergency Escape Ropes. 3. Student demonstrates correct operation of the windows including opening, closing, and latching.

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-8 01 JUL 13 COCKPIT
Flight Engineer’s Station Audio Panel 1. Configure and demonst rate operation of the audio panel for flight and service interphone and radio transmission using hot mike and foot switch. 2. Show location of maintenance jack switch. 3. Explain if power is not on the aircraft emergency power can be used for radio operation. Show location of Emergency Power Switch. 4. Point out overhead speakers and volume control

Flight Engineer's Seat 1. Demonstrate seat controls for positioning the seat vertically, horizontally, and facing outboard or forward. 2. Student occupies the seat and correctly operates the controls to position the seat vertically, horizontally, and facing outboard and forward.

Emergency Equipment 1. Quick Don Oxygen Mask • Location • Operation • Re-Stowing 2. Smoke Goggles 3. ARO/Additional Crewmember O 2 Shutoff

Upper Panel 1. Potable Water gage
Cockpit Lights 1. Show location and operate FE’s interior flood and work-table lights, the cockpit dome light, and map light. 2. Explain operation of lights when using battery power vs. AC power.

Observer’s Seat 1. Demonstrate use of the fold-down observer seat, pointing out location of life vest.
Cockpit Door 1. Demonstrate operati on of smoke screen and blowout panel. Show removal and installation.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT

Lavatory 1. Show location of lavatory water shutoff valve, oxygen bottle, and drop-out mask panel. 2. Demonstrate door locking / unlocking panel.
Galley 1. Show components and operation of refrigerator/ freezer, ovens, Hot Cup, coffee maker, and Hot Jug. 2. Show location of compar tment for first aid, fire extinguisher, food tray s, and APU & External Power switches.
Cargo Compartment Lighting Console 1. Overview of which lights are controlled.

Cabin Doors (Instructor Demonstration) 1. Demonstrate free-fa ll and normal operation of FWD cabin doors using exterior controls. 2. Operate door using interior controls 3. Explain slide arming procedures and point out indicators. 4. Explain pneumatic operat ion and show location of pressure gage. 5. Explain slide/raft low pressure indicator light and demonstrate system test. 6. Demonstrate door 2L/R and 4R operation and point out differences from 1L/R in operation of controls. Include location of escape rope at door 4R.

Cabin Doors (Student Performance) 1. Student demonstrates the correct normal operation of door 1L/R using exterior controls, and explains emergency operation. 2. Student demonstrates the correct normal operation of door 2L/R using interior controls, and explains emergency operation.

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT

AR Receptacle Shutoff Valve 1. Show location and explain that it is manually operated and used to provide pressure to the UARRSI. 2. Explain purpose is to prevent Skydrol leaks in cockpit during normal cruise and whenever not receiving fuel.
Cargo Door/Hydraulic Control Panel 1. Show location and explain operation.

Emergency Equipment Panels 1. Show location forward, aft, and in ARO Station as field trip progresses. 2. Point out items provided on each panel.
Crew Entry/Egress Ladder 1. Show location and point out different components.
Nose Gear Inspection Tubes 1. Show location at station 565. 2. Demonstrate use.
Passenger Oxygen Generators and Drop-Out Masks 1. Show location. 2. Explain Auto and Manual operation.
Emergency Passenger Oxygen System 1. Show location. 2. Explain operation.

Aircrew Bunks 1. Show locations. 2. Point out location of portable oxygen bottles.
Forward (Lower Area) Compartment 1. Show location.

Cargo Barrier Net Show three locations where it can be installed.

Environmental Curtain 1. Point out both locations a. Side panels remain installed at both locations. b. Center panel is relocated and can be rolled up for cargo loading or offloading operations.
Z - Lavatory 1. Show location and plumbing connections.
Cargo Door 1. Show location and explain operation a. Vent Door operation b. Over centered mechanisms c. Lockpins

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-10 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-11 01 JUL 13 CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT
Cargo System Control Pendant Panel 1. Point out location.

Powered Roller System 1. Explain eight rollers: a. They raise up to move the pallet and then retract below the Omnidirectional rollers when de-energized. b. They are used to load and offload laterally and assist in rotating oversize cargo, such as “coupled pallets”. c. The in/out switches control direction of rotation of the three rows of rollers. d. Right channel rollers can be cut out (switch on control panel) so powered rollers can still be used for left side if pallets are on right side.
Center Accessory Compartment 1. Show location, Station 1120. 2. Show location of: a. Batteries b. Battery charger c. 1-2, 1-3 Isolation Valves d. AR Master Valve e. APU Start Circuit Breakers f. Anti-Skid Control Box g. Pneumatic Controllers h. Pneumatic Manifold Fault Indicator
Cryogenic Vent 1. Show location, Station 1149. 2. Explain purpose.

AR Receiver Valve Manual Override Handle 1. Show location, Station 1145. 2. Explain used to manually open AR master fuel valve.

Main Gear Door Indicators/ Viewing Ports 1. Show location at Station 1427. 2. Point out light switch.

Main Gear Indicator 1. Show location on top of wing. a. Up - Gear is down. b. Down - gear is up.

AR Isolation Valve 1. Show location, Station 1330. 2. Show override handle.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-A841-SG 1-35-12 01 JUL 13 CABIN/CARGO COMPARTMENT
Aft Cargo Compartment 1. Show location of ELTs. 2. Show location of Cockpit Voice Recorder & Digital Flight Data Recorder.

Portable Ladder (Stair Extender) 1. Locate and point out components. 2. Point out use is for doors 2L/R.

ARO COMPARTMENT
Incandescent and Aft Cargo Lights 1. Point out switches: top of ladder, just under floor level. 2. Show functions. 3. Point out Incandescent switch also on left side of panel at center BO ARO position.
Boom/Drogue Valve and Dual Bypass Valves 1. Show location inside small door by ladder on sidewall and through floor panel at door 4R. 2. Point out both manual handles for bypass valves and associated c annon plug disconnect.

LEFT AND RIGHT WHEEL WELLS (If time is available, open left and right Main Wheel Well doors and show components)
Right Main Wheel Well 1. Auxiliary Pumps 2. Landing Gear S equencing Valve 3. Center Gear Sequenc ing and Manual Control Valves 4. #3 Hydraulic Reservoir and Accumulator 5. Anti-skid Control Valves 6. Bogie Trim Cylinder

Center Gear Wheel Well 1. 1-3/2-3 Reversible Motor Pumps 2. Auxiliary Reservoir

Left Main Wheel Well 1. Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Hand Pump 2. #1 Hydraulic Reservoir & Accumulator 3. Alternate Ground Refueling Station 4. Anti-skid Control Valves 5. Bogie Trim Cylinder

LEAVING AIRCRAFT
Leaving Aircraft 1. Ensure all equipment is restored to same position you found it and aircraft is in good condition.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Cargo/Passenger Operations

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this briefing is to help you better understand the capabilities and limitations of the aircra ft and crew relating to cargo load planning, cargo loading and o ffloading, and the transport of hazardous cargo. A Boom Operator Instructor presents it.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-5, Basic We ight Checklist and Loading Data C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-9, Cargo Loading Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Cargo/Passenger Oper ations Student Guide B. Classroom Pres entation System C. Whiteboard, markers and erasers D. Cargo Load Trainer



### V. Student Preparation and Review A. None

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Cargo/Passenger Operations

Student Lecture Text

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Instructor Introduction

B. Purpose Statement

This briefing is to help you better understand the capabilities and limitations of your aircraft and crew relating to ca rgo load planning, cargo loading and unloading, and the transpor t of hazardous cargo.

1. Attention

Good crew coordination and resource management are essential to accomplishing the varied missions of t he KC-10. In-depth knowledge and understanding of the responsib ilities of your specific crew position, as well as an understanding of the responsibilit ies of the other members of your crew is required. Each crewmem ber must rely on the others to accomplish their duties effectively and safely.

2. Motivation

This briefing provides an overview of aircraft configurations and crew capabilities for carrying cargo and pass engers. The Boom Operator is directly responsible for carrying out t hese duties; however, it is the Aircraft Commander’s ultimate responsibility to understand what is being done in the "Back" of the aircraft.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Cargo/Passenger Carrying Capabilities

This briefing introduces the capabilities of the KC-10 to handle cargo and passengers in support of its worldwide mi ssions. As Boom Operators, we are responsible for planning the cargo load co nfiguration; monitor the loading and offloading of the aircraft and supervising the passengers. In addition, we must know the procedures for handl ing hazardous cargo. Y ou must be familiar with what we are doing in the "Back of the ai rcraft" and with the coordination required to successfully accomplish the mission.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

1. KC-10 Basic Configurations

The KC-10 was developed from the DC-10 series 30 airliner. It is designed to ferry receiver aircra ft while transporting their support personnel and equipment. Th e KC-10 can also be refueled in flight, further increasing its capabilities. Fo r mission flexibility, the KC-10 can assume a variety of configurations. These are commonly divided into two general categories: all car go or mixed cargo-personnel.

a. All Cargo

The all cargo configuration can be arranged for 25 or 27 pallets.

b. Cargo/Passenger/Patient Support

This cargo-passenger configuration consists of 25 pallets, and seating for 6 additional cr ewmembers. To provide seating for the 6 crewmembers, the pallets on the right side of the aircraft are placed lengthwise in the car go compartment, and the first 11 pallets on the left side are placed laterally as shown here. The cargo-loading manual contains detailed informa tion concerning the various configurations for cargo and personnel.

One of the most commonly used c onsists of 23 palle t positions and seating for 16 passengers. This c onfiguration can be modified to carry 20 passengers by adding 2 seats on either side behind the seats shown here. However, th is imposes a 2100-pound limit on each pallet due to reduced space avai lable for cargo net expansion.

There are two Patient Support Conf igurations based on the mixed Cargo/75 Personnel Confi guration. Patient Support Pallet (PSP) Configuration 1 (Code H) replaces pallet positions 2R & 3R with 1 PSP with 6 litters in 2R and a bl ank 463L pallet in position 3R. Patient Support Pallet (PSP) Confi guration 2 (Code I) is 1 PSP with 6 litters in 2R and 1 PSP with 3 litters in pallet position 3R.

2. KC-10 Passenger Accommodations

For the comfort of the passengers, particularly the duty passengers who will probably be beginning a work shift upon arri val at their deployed location, the KC-10 has relatively civilized passenger accommodations.

a. Increased Accommodation Unit (IAU)

The Increased Accommodation Unit, commonly referred to as the IAU, increases the passenger and extra crewmember seating capacity to a total of 75.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

44 of these seats are mount ed on four seat pallets.

The IAU also provides additional stowage space. The stowage compartment is mounted on the right side of the airplane, just forward of seat pallet number two right.

With the increased number of personnel that can be carried with the IAU, an additional comf ort station is provided. We refer to it as the “Z-LAV” and it provides all the comforts of the permanent lavatory located forward. It is installed on the left side of the airplane, just forwar d of the cargo door.

b. Environmental Curtain

An environmental curtain establis hes the aft end of the passenger compartment and serves as a smoke and sound barrier. The curtain consists of six panels fa stened to the ceiling and sidewalls by slide fasteners and Velcro stri ps. The environmental curtain may be installed at one of two locations, depending on aircraft configuration.

3. KC-10 Cargo Handling Equipment

As with other aspects of its missi on, the KC-10 uses specialized equipment for carrying cargo. This cargo equipment includes pallets, coupled pallets, cargo restrain ts, a barrier net, and rollers.

a. Pallets

The primary means of transporting ca rgo is the palletized method. The KC-10 can accommodate up to twenty-seven 88 X 108 inch pallets. The pallets are rated for 10,000 lbs; however their loads are limited to 5400 lb, 6500 lb, and 10,000 lb depending on their location in the aircraft.

b. Compartments

Letters and station numbers on the sidewalls identify compartments. Double letters on t he left wall are for lateral pallet loading. Pallet numbers are locat ed on the floor. Yellow decals identify longitudinal, or lengthwise, pallet positions. White decals, on the left side only, show lateral pallet positions. c. Coupled Pallets

To accommodate large cargo it ems, pallets can be coupled together using two “one inch couplers” attached to the pallet rings.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

d. Restraints

Cargo in the KC-10 can be rest rained with various types of equipment. Using a top net and two side nets provides the maximum restraint for a single palle t load weighing up to 10,000 lbs. The “actual” amount of restraint provided by straps or chains is determined by a mathematic al ratio method formula. e. Barrier Net

As an added safety feature, a car go barrier net is installed to provide protection in the event of extreme deceleration forces. It is rated for nine G’s of restraint for cargo loads up to 175,000 lbs.

f. Omni-directional Rollers

Pallets are supported in the door way area by omni-directional castered rollers. The casters swivel and permit loaded pallets to be moved in any direction. The roll ers are contained in seven panels and two outboard conveyor assemblies.

g. Powered Rollers

These eight powered rollers assi st during loading and offloading operations. When energized, the ro llers elevate to move the pallet laterally or rotate it for longitu dinal alignment. When de-energized, the rollers automatically retract.

h. Powered Rollers Control Panel

The control panel located at the forward edge of the cargo door provides power for the rollers. The cargo door must be open to operate the powered rollers. A pendant, attached to the control panel by a 24-foot cord, allows freedom of movement to operate the rollers while closely observing pallet positioning. The pendant is stowed beneath the control panel.

i. Roller Conveyors

The manually operated longitudinal roller conveyor assemblies consist of rollers mounted in ch annels along both sides, and down the center of the floor. They ma y be located forward and aft of the omni-directional panels, or only aft, depending on aircraft configuration.

4. KC-10 Cargo Load Planning Considerations

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

These are the Boom Operat or’s “dash 9" cargo operations responsibilities. They are completed each time a KC-10 cargo mission is flown.

a. Cargo Size/Contour

Each item of cargo must be c ontoured to fit safely within the curvature of the fuselage.

b. Cargo Gross Weight

Each item of cargo must be within the maximum gross weight for its loaded position.

c. Concentrated Loads

A concentrated load is a large am ount of weight covering a small contact area. The areas of cont act are commonly called "skids" or "contact points", and must be che cked to ensure no limits are exceeded.

Vehicle axles are another form of concentrated load that must be checked prior to loading.

d. Cargo Load/Unload Aft Limit

The center of balance of the aircraft must be computed for each item of cargo loaded or unloaded. Items of cargo loaded behind the main landing gear quickly bring the center of balance aft and can result in the airc raft “tipping on its tail.”

A “tipping analysis” is computed to ensure that the center of balance always remains forward of 40% MAC. The aircraft will tip at 44% MAC.

e. Lateral Unbalance

The KC-10's “widebody” design allows side-by-side pallet loading. Just as there are lateral fuel bal ance limits, there are also cargo lateral balance limits. The Boom Operator ensures that lateral cargo weight differenc es are within limits.

f. Zone Limitations

One of the principal a dditions to the DC-10-30 commercial freighter basic airframe, for the KC-10 co nversion, was the addition of forward and aft body fuel tanks. Zone limitation calculations are

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

completed to ensure that the amount of body tank fuel and cargo loaded does not exceed the allowable weights by fuselage station. The airframe does not differentiate by type of weight; additional fuel means less cargo. Careful pl anning can optimize this weight capability and satisfy fuselage limitations.

g. Other Considerations

The KC-10 Boom Operator must also compute, as required, factors such as pounds per linear foot lo ading (PLF), required restraint, and nose-strut compression during lo ading operations. Restraint calculation and placement for “rolling stock” (wheeled vehicles) generally takes a significant amount of time due to the vertical restraint limitation of the aircraft.

5. Hazardous Cargo

When loading hazardous cargo, t he load plan must consider the compatibility of the various hazardous materi als, and the proximity of hazardous materials to passengers.

6. Cargo Off-loading

Cargo off-loading is essentially the reve rse of cargo loading. Inflight, after the landing fuel is determined, the boom operator normally accomplishes the offload tipping analysis. The analysis uses the landing fuel weight and fuel distribution when determining the sequence in whic h the aircraft is offloaded.

7. Cargo Load Model

The purpose of the KC-10 Cargo Load Model is to enable Boom Operators to visua lize the assembly of various types of cargo loads in the aircraft. It is a scale model of th e cargo compartment and cargo handling system. Boom Operators plan a variet y of loads, and then assemble scale models of rolling stock and pallets. The planned cargo is placed in the CLM in accordance with TO 1C -10(K)A-9, Cargo Load Manual.

III. REVIEW

A. Summary

B. Remotivation

I hope the information presented here enh ances your understan ding of what’s happening behind the cockpit do or. Because of the varied missions and aircraft

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 configurations of t he KC-10, it is impor tant for the entire cr ew to understand the capabilities and limitations of the aircra ft and crew, relating to cargo loading and unloading. You don’t want to be involved in a situation similar to the Fed Ex DC10 sitting on its tail, or the DC-8 accident at Miami caused by shifting cargo.

C. Closure

PIQ/FIQ-G020-SG 1-36-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-1 01 JUL 13 

# Performance Workshop III MTOGW TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide you an opportunity to practice completing a Max Takeoff Gross We ight TOLD card. Be sure you have completed the prerequisite workbooks and CBT lessons prior to the workshop. Your instructor will pres ent the workshop exercise s and provide appropriate guidance if you have any questions.

Part I describes the topics that will be co vered by the workshop exercises. Part II consists of the workshop ex ercises to be completed.



### II. Duration

- 3.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Fli ght Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Classroom B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. Performance Workshop III - MTOGW TOLD Card Student Guide D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook B. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook C. Introduction to KC-10 Tak eoff Performance CBT Lesson D. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data 3. Section III, Takeoff 4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 5. Section X, Mission PlanningKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-2 01 JUL 13 

# Objective

1. Complete a KC-10 Maximum Takeo ff Gross Weight Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-3 01 JUL 13 

# Part I

A Maximum Takeoff Gross Weight (MTOGW) TOLD Card is computed based on the maximum weight at which t he aircraft can take off under given conditions. These conditions pertain to environmental, r unway, or field condition factors.

As previously demonstrated, the MTOGW blo ck of the TOLD Card is completed for all takeoffs. Remember, reduced thrust pr ocedures do not apply when computing a maximum takeoff gross weight TOLD Card. Therefore, any blocks pertaining to the assumed temperature receive a check ( √ ) mark.

The Air Force Flight Standards Agency (A FFSA) has contracted with Jeppesen to provide safe engine out departure procedures for bases used by the KC-10 to provide the maximum takeoff weight possible and miss any obstacles should an engine fail during takeoff. Special Departure Pr ocedure information is found at “http://www.jeppesen.com/wlcs/i ndex.jsp” on the internet.

Jeppesen analyzes terrain and obstacle data agai nst aircraft specific performance data to determine the best engine out departure and takeoff weight for each runway at a given location. The user name and password change periodically; please contact your wing DOV for current information. Once l ogged into the website, click on OPS DATA, which will take you to the SO RT and aircraft selection menus.

A User Guide that can be viewed or downlo aded is also available below the Ops Data menu. Please review this guide as soon as possible. Only bases that have approved procedures are listed on the J eppesen website. This websit e should be checked during mission planning. If an approved procedure is available, it mu st be briefed and used if an engine failure occurs on takeoff. TOLD and/or SDP departure plate information can be found on the website, and has been appr oved by the Air Force for TOLD computations.

Figure 3 is an example of SDP TOLD inform ation and Figures 4 and 5 are examples of SDP departure plates found on the website. More information is available from your instructor during the TOLD ca rd workshop. If a SDP is av ailable for the runway being used, it should be followed exactly in order to avoid obstacles.

The following pages will provide you an understanding of Special Departure
Procedures. 

### •From any to the Jeppesen webs ite: –User Name: afopsdata –Password: jeppesen –Click: AIRPORT DATA –Select a sort method –Select KC-10 from the dropdown menu –KC-10 User’s Guide availableKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 Figure 1. Airfield Analysis Data 1.

The FAA expects all aircraft to climb at a rate of at least 200 ft/nm (30:1) with all engines operating. The top line represents this.

The middle line represents 152 ft/nm (40:1) or a 2.5% net climb gradient. When an instrument runway is TERPS and an obstacle penetrates this line, a Departure Procedure or SID identifies the obstacle or requires a turn or increased climb rate. Air Force requires most military aircraft to be able to clear all obstacles in the event of an engine failure. Identifying the proper obsta cles is the hard part.

Because of the climbout and cl ean up procedures, at times t he KC-10 actually operates below a 2.5% climb gradient. In this case actual obstacles may exist and may not be readily identified.

Jeppesen airfield analysis identifies all obsta cles that penetrate the bottom line out to approximately 30 nautical miles. After tha t, it’s up to you to avoid obstacles.

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Figure 2. Airfield Analysis Data 2.

Jeppesen, using the ICAO criteria, also covers a greater width for obstacle consideration along the planned flight route t han required by FAA.
The SDP is aircraft specific. Takeoff and climb performance procedures are examined against the specific runway obstacle data to determine the best route. Straight ahead is examined first with alternate routes later if it would be impossible to use the straightahead course. The route select ed will apply technical manual procedures and provide clearance over all obstacles for the first 30 miles in the event you lose an engine at V 1

. After going to the correct website, Figures 4-7c, 4-7d, and 4-7e are examples of the TOLD data pages and departure plate informat ion found on the site. The plate depicts both Dry and Wet data with Dr y data being used most by crewmembers and the Wet being use by mission planners.

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-6 01 JUL 13 Figure 3. TOLD data sheet. 1

Figure 3. SDP TOLD Information. 2 2

3

4

5

7

6 8 9

FOR TRAINING USE ONLYKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-7 01 JUL 13 Using the SDP TOLD information is fairly ea sy. The sheet has systems information as well as airfield data. Below is a descripti on of the some of the information on the sheet.

Items on Figure 3:

Item 1 Systems settings and airfield data ar e usually found at t he top of the page.

Item 2 Runway 6 – Dry with a T URN is the runway identified.

Item 3 This is the outside air temperature is in Centigrade.

Item 4 This is the maximum takeoff weight that should not be exce eded. This is a planning guideline.

Item 5 The max liftoff point is the point that the airplane lifts of f if it loses an engine at V 1 . Simply stated, it is the field length plus the lineup distanc e. Cutbacks have already been considered for obstacles or screen height. You must subtract the runway alignment distance from this max liftoff point number. Enter this number in your RWY AVAIL block. If E- TOLD is used just enter this number.

Item 6 This is the number used for the obstacle height in AGL. Enter this number in the OBST HT block. Again, if E-TOLD is used, this number needs to be in MSL HT. You must add the obstacle height and field elevation to get MSL.

Item 7 The runway slope is identified here and is used. This is your actual slope for this runway. This is the number that is entered in the SLOPE block on your TOLD worksheet. If using E- TOLD, remember that a zero has to be put in front of the dismal point.

Item 8 This is the number used in the TOLD for corrected obstacle distance. This number is your obstacle dist ance and is entered in the O BST DIST block. This is also entered in E-TOLD in the very same manner.

Item 9 This number is not used. The number is obtained from T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 and should be greater or equal to the number on the SDP TOLD sheet. If the number is less than the SDP sheet, a mistake has occurred and the climb gradient data must be recomputed.

Figure 4 is an example of a Special Departure Plate with only wri tten instructions and Figure 5 is a Special Engi ne Failure Procedure plate.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-8 01 JUL 13 Figure 4. Special Procedure Plate. FOR TRAINING USE ONLYKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY

Figure 5. Special Engine Failure Procedure.

FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-10 01 JUL 13 

# Part II

WORKSHOP EXERCISES

1. GIVEN:

Gross Weight Maximum Gross Wei ght for Takeoff (To be computed) Takeoff CG 23.0% OAT 5 ° C Dew Point 4 ° C Anti-ice ON Pressure Altitude +120 ° Wind Direction 130 ° Wind Velocity 5 G 10 Runway Heading 230 ° Runway Length 11,100 ' RCR 12 Reported RSC 0 Slope 0 Field Elevation 93 ′ Obstacle Height N/A Obstacle Distance N/A Air Conditioning OFF Reverse Thrust YES

Compute Takeoff Performance For the pur poses of this training event assume a Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is availa ble requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no obstacle depicted and a 11,100 Max LOP. The SDP MTOGW is 590,000 lbs for the given conditions.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-11 01 JUL 13LANDING COMPUTATION(*Abnormal Configuration)V1VRV2VFRVSR0° /EXT22° / EXT0° /RETTASTAKEOFFLANDING0°/RETMMVKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E846-SG 1-37-12 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Performance Workshop IV - V 1 

# =V MCG 

# TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide you an opportunity to practice completing a TOLD card for V 1 =V MCG . Be sure you have completed the prerequisite workbooks and CB T lessons prior to the wor kshop. Your instructor will present the workshop exercises and provide appropriate guidance if you have any questions.

Part I describes the topics that will be cove red by the workshop exercises. Part II consists of the workshop ex ercises to be completed.



### II. Duration

- 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Fli ght Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Classroom B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. Performance Workshop IV - V 1 =V MCG TOLD Card Student Guide D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance Workbook B. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook C. Introduction to KC-10 Tak eoff Performance CBT Lesson D. Takeoff Performance Charts CBT Lesson E. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data 3. Section III, Takeoff 4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 5. Section X, Mission Planning

CH 3 FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-2 01 JUL 13 

# Objective

1. Complete a KC-10 Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card when V 1 equals V MCG

.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


# Part I

When V 1 = V MCG , the aircraft's takeoff gross weight (TOGW) is limited to a maximum weight that allows the aircraft to stop in the available runway after experiencing engine failure at V 1

. When computing the Takeoff Data for a V 1 = V MCG condition, it may be necessary to reduce TOGW. If this is the case, determi ne the maximum allowabl e weight (MAW) for the given runway available. Remember, use the optimum takeoff flap setting when computing MAW, except when an RSC is used fo r TOLD planning use 25 ° flaps only. The MAW is the MTOGW.

When runway cutback procedures are used fo r obstacle clearance, use the original (Full) runway available to determine MAW when V 1 = V MCG . When determining MAW and SDP procedures are used, use the (Full) runway available to determine MAW, not the listed MAX liftoff point. Using the MAX liftoff point di stance could result in a significantly lower MAW value.

If V 1 equals V MCG , then V R MIN must be computed and compared to V R . If V R is less than V R MIN , increase V R to equal V R MIN . Do not forget to increase V 2 by the same increment.

CH 3 FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


# Part II

WORKSHOP EXERCISES

1. GIVEN:

Gross Weight 550,000 Takeoff CG 23.0% OAT 5 ° C Dew Point T Anti-ice ON Pressure Altitude +30’ Wind Direction CALM Wind Velocity 0 Runway Heading 130 ° Runway Length 12,100 RCR WET RSC .15 Reported (Standing Water) Slope .8 DN Field Elevation 82’ Obstacle Height N/A Obstacle Distance N/A Air Conditioning ON Reverse Thrust YES

NOTE

If the desired takeoff gross weight of 550,000 lbs is not permitted, compute the MTOGW for the given conditions.

Compute Takeoff Performance. For the pur poses of this training event assume a Special Departure Procedure (SDP) is availa ble requiring a 2.50 Min Climb rate with no obstacle depicted and a 12,100 Max LOP. The SDP MTGOW exceeds the computed takeoff MTOGW.

CH 3 FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E847-SG 1-38-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-1 01 OCT 10 

# FMS-800 Flight Management System

I. Purpose – The purpose of this briefing is fa miliarization of the basic functions and major components of the FMS- 800 Flight Management System.



### II. Duration – 4.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. FMS page flow diagrams



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Classroom Pres entation System B. Whiteboard, markers and erasers C. Flight Emulation Trainer



### V. Student Preparation and Review A. NoneKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

At the completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

1. Describe the basic functions and co mponents of the KC- 10 Flight Management System (FMS) 2. Match FMS Control Display Unit ( CDU) controls to respective functions 3. Describe characteristics of select FMS pages 4. Describe the characteristics of the Data and Direct-To functionsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-3 01 OCT 10 

## FMS-800 Flight Management System

Student Lecture Outline

E-FRAME 1: FMS-800 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM REVIEW

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Instructor Introduction

1. Flying Experience

2. Type of Aircraft

B. Purpose Statement

1. Attention

2. Motivation

E-FRAME 2: OBJECTIVES

C. Objectives

1. Describe the basic functions and components of t he KC-10 Flight Management System (FMS)

2. Match FMS Control Display Unit ( CDU) controls to respective functions

3. Describe characteristics of select FMS pages

4. Describe the characteristics of the Data and Direct-To functions

II. PRESENTATION

E-FRAME 3: FMS REVIEW

A. Lesson Structure

1. Part 1 – FMS Basic Functions and Components

2. Part 2 – FMS-800 User Basics

3. Part 3 – FMS Page CharacteristicsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-4 01 OCT 10 4. Part 4 – FET Exercises

E-FRAME 4: FMS BASIC F UNCTIONS AND COMPONENTS

B. Part 1

1. FMS Basic Functions and Components Overview

E-FRAME 5: FMS-800 OVERVIEW

2. The FMS

a. Computes aircraft position and flight path guidance worldwide.

b. Determines position data aut onomously; i.e., without the need for ground-based navigation aids (NAVAIDS).

c. Provides functional control for the

(1) Global positioning system (GPS)

(2) Inertial navigation units (INUs)

(3) Tactical air navigation (TACAN) radios

(4) Automatic direction find er (ADF) navigation radios

E-FRAME 6: FMS-800 OVERVIEW-1

3. The FMS utilizes

a. User inputs

b. Internal memory and external databases

c. GPS and INU position and velocity inputs

d. Central air data computer (CADC) inputs

e. FMS software controls all system functions.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-5 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 7: FM S CAPABILITIES

4. Basic Capabilities

a. Navigation Data

b. Mission Plans

c. Flight Path Guidance

E-FRAME 8: FMS COMPONENTS

5. Basic Components

E-FRAME 9: CDU

6. Basic CDU Description

E-FRAME 10: CDU CONFIGURATION

7. CDU Installation Position and Input Configurations

a. CDU 1

b. CDU 2

c. CDU 3

E-FRAME 11: CDU POWER

8. CDU Power Switches

E-FRAME 12: THE SYSTEM

9. FMS Coordination

a. CDU Coordination

b. CDU Inputs

E-FRAME 13: FMS SYSTEM INTERFACES

10. Systems Integration

a. Systems Interface Wiring

b. Flight Guidance SignalsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-6 01 OCT 10 c. FGS Coupling

E-FRAME 14: MIL-STD-1553B DATA BUS

11. Data Bus Description

E-FRAME 15: 1553 BUS CONTROL

12. Bus Controller and Remote Terminals

a. Bus Controller/Remote Terminal

b. Bus Control

c. Remote Terminals

E-FRAME 16: BUS SPLIT SWITCH

13. Bus Split Switch Function

a. Switch Description

b. Bus Split Operation

E-FRAME 17: BSIUs

14. BSIU Functions

a. Flight Instruments

b. Automatic Flight Guidance Systems

c. Navigation Radios

E-FRAME 18: DATA LOADER

15. Data Loader

a. Cartridge Slots

b. Split Bus Operation

E-FRAME 19: KEY LOAD PANELS

16. Key Load PanelsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-7 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 20: GPS

17. GPS Components

a. Receiver-Processor Module

b. GPS Antennas

c. GPS 3 Not Enabled

E-FRAME 21: GPS CONTROL

18. GPS Control Options

a. Active Unit/Alternate Unit

b. Manual Switching

c. GPS Velocity and Altitude Aid

d. GPS Power

E-FRAME 22: INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM (INS/INU)

19. INS/INU Components

a. INS

b. INU

c. Component Locations

E-FRAME 23: INS/INU CONTROL

20. Inertial Navigation System and Unit Control

a. INS Control

b. INU Control

E-FRAME 24: MODE SELECTOR UNIT (MSU)

21. MSU SettingsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-8 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 25: MSU ANNUNCIAT OR LIGHTS (READY NAV)

22. READY NAV Light

E-FRAME 26: MSU ANNUNCI ATOR LIGHTS (BATT)

23. BATT Light

E-FRAME 27: INS OUTPUTS

24. INS Outputs

a. ADIs and EHSIs

b. Remote Compass System

c. Automatic Flight Guidance System

d. Autothrottles

e. Weather Radar System

E-FRAME 28: INS SELECTOR SWITCH

25. INU Output Assignments

a. NORM

b. CAPT ON AUX

c. F/O ON AUX

E-FRAME 29: FMS MULTI -SENSOR CAPABILITIES

26. FMS Sensor Options

a. Sensor Configurations

b. Position Error

c. Weighted SolutionsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-9 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 30: NAVIGATION SOURCE SELECTIONS

27. INS and GPS Selection Options

a. Power-Up Default

b. INS NORM

c. INS CAPT ON AUX

d. INS F/O ON AUX

e. Active GPS Selection

E-FRAME 31: DESIGNATED PILOT

28. Steering Solution for Default St artup Initialization and Autopilot

a. Designated Pilot Steering Solution Drives Autopilot

b. Determines FMS Steering Calculations

E-FRAME 32: DATA CARTRIDGE

29. Databases and Mission Data

a. Stored on Data Cartridge

b. GPS Almanac Data

E-FRAME 33: ICAO DATABASE

30. Database Characteristics

a. ICAO Database

b. Waypoint

c. Waypoint Identifiers

d. Database AccessKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-10 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 34: MISSION DATA

31. Mission Data Management

a. Mission Planning b. Data Transfer

c. User-Waypoint Database

d. Data Management

E-FRAME 35: ELECTRONIC HORIZONT AL SITUATION INDICATOR (EHSI)

32. EHSI

a. Graphical Display

b. Displays FMS Path when FMS Selected as Nav Source

E-FRAME 36: FMS HEADING SWITCH

33. FMS Heading Switch Setting Function

E-FRAME 37: FMS HEADING SWITCH (TRUE SELECTED)

34. FMS Heading Switch Set to TRUE

E-FRAME 38: FMS HEADING SWITCH (MAG SELECTED)

35. FMS Heading Switch Set to MAG

E-FRAME 39: PART 2 – FMS-800 USER BASICS

C. Part 2

1. FMS-800 User Basics Overview

FMS data pages and the CDU push button keys are the primary interfaces used to view FMS data, i nput data into the FMS, clear data from the FMS, and manage the FMS functions. The CDUs are also used to manage the TACAN and ADF navi gation radios and the INUs.

E-FRAME 40: FMS PAGE OVERVIEW

2. General FMS Page DescriptionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-11 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 41: PAGE FORMAT

3. Page Content Arrangement

E-FRAME 42: PAGE TITLE

4. FMS-Assigned Descriptive Page Title

E-FRAME 43: CDU LINE SELECT KEYS

5. LS Key Functional Description

E-FRAME 44: LS KEY FUNCTIONALITY

6. Field-Defined Functions

E-FRAME 45: SCROLL ARROWS AND ARROW KEYS

7. Arrow Symbols and Keys

E-FRAME 46: SCROLLING

8. Types of Scrolling

E-FRAME 47: PAGE PROMPTS

9. Page Prompt I dentification and Use

E-FRAME 48: PAGE FUNCTIONALITY

10. FMS Page Functions

E-FRAME 49: PAGE CONTENT

11. FMS Page Content

E-FRAME 50: PAGE HIERARCHY

12. Basic Hierarchical Structure

E-FRAME 51: PAGE SETS

13. Page Set OrganizationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-12 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 52: PAGE SELECTION OVERVIEW

14. How to Select a Page and Move Between Pages

E-FRAME 53: TOP-LEVEL PAGE FUNCTION KEYS

15. Key Descriptions

E-FRAME 54: TOP LEVEL PAGES

16. Top Level Page Selection

E-FRAME 55: TOP LEVEL PAGES (CONDITIONAL)

17. Conditional Rules

E-FRAME 56: TOP LEVEL PA GE FUNCTION KEY RULES

18. Conditional Rules

E-FRAME 57: DATA LINES

19. Data Line Description

E-FRAME 58: DATA LINE CONTENT

20. Data Line Content

E-FRAME 59: MANIPULATING DATA

21. Using the FMS

E-FRAME 60: FIELDS AND SYMBOLS

22. Field Formatting

E-FRAME 61: BRACKETS AND DASHES

23. Bracket Characteristics

E-FRAME 62: ASTERISK

24. Asterisk SymbolKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-13 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 63: CHECKMARK

25. Checkmark Symbol

E-FRAME 64: COLON

26. Colon Symbol

E-FRAME 65: INWARD-POINTING ARROWS

27. Inward-Pointing Arrow Functions

E-FRAME 66: INWARD-P OINTING ARROW (ON-OFF)

28. Commands Executable Function

E-FRAME 67: INWARD-P OINTING ARROW (SELECT)

29. Loads Navigation Procedure

E-FRAME 68: INWARD-POIN TING ARROW (RADIO PAGES)

30. Toggles Frequency Between Two Different Settings

E-FRAME 69: INWARD-POINTI NG ARROW (STATUS PAGES)

31. Resets Fault Count

E-FRAME 70: OUTWARD-POINTING ARROWS (WAYPOINT PAGES)

32. Accesses Detail/Expanded Data

E-FRAME 71: OUTWARD-POINTI NG ARROWS (STATUS PAGES)

33. Status Detail

a. LRU listed in the adjacent field

b. RTN prompt

E-FRAME 72: DEGREES AND DEGREES TRUE

34. Degree (°) and True ( T )Symbols

a. Degree symbol (°) indicates that reference is degrees magneticKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-14 01 OCT 10 b. Subscripted T ( T ), reference indicates degrees True

E-FRAME 73: WAYPOINT SEQUENCE NUM BERS AND WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS

35. Waypoint Numbering and ID

a. Waypoint Numbering

b. Labeled/Unlabe led waypoints

E-FRAME 74: PAGE TITLE LINE

36. Page Line 2, Page Title Line

E-FRAME 75: INFORMATION LINE

37. Page Line 4, Information Line

E-FRAME 76: ANNUNCIATION LINE

38. Page Line 6, Annunciation Line

E-FRAME 77: EHSI MSG ANNUNCIATION

39. MSG Annunciation

E-FRAME 78: CLEA RING ANNUNCIATIONS

40. Acknowledging and Clearing Annunciation Messages

a. Acknowledging and Clearing Annunciations

b. Non-Clearable Annunciations

E-FRAME 79: SCRATCHPAD LINE

41. Page Line 8, Scratchpad Line

E-FRAME 80: S CRATCHPAD CONTENT

42. Scratchpad Content

E-FRAME 81: ENTER AND INPUT

43. Distinction Between Enter and InputKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-15 01 OCT 10 a. Data Entry

b. Data Carry-over

E-FRAME 82: MANUAL DATA ENTRY

44. Manually Populate Scratchpad

E-FRAME 83: COPYING AND TRANSFERRING DATA

45. Copy and Input

E-FRAME 84: CONFIRMATION

46. Confirm if Prompted

E-FRAME 85: COPY AND TRANSFER

47. Things to Remember

E-FRAME 86: ENTER, INPUT, CONFIRM

48. To Enter Data Into the Scratchpad

a. Use the CDU alphan umeric keypad to manually populate the scratchpad.

b. Copy existing data from an acti ve data field to the scratchpad.

E-FRAME 87: ENTER, INPUT, CONFIRM

49. Input Data Into the FMS

a. Press the LS key adjacent to the data field where you want to input the data.

b. The scratchpad automatically cl ears if the FMS accepts data.

E-FRAME 88: ENTER, INPUT, CONFIRM

50. Confirm the Input

a. Press associated LS key again to confirm

b. Pressing CLR function key bef ore confirming cancels operationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-16 01 OCT 10 c. If FMS accepts input, scrat chpad automatically clears

d. If input not accepted, FM S generate a scratchpad message.

e. CLR will not undo or ca ncel function or input after confirmation

E-FRAME 89: SCRATCHPAD MESSAGE

51. Automated Scratchpad Message

E-FRAME 90: CLEARING THE SCRATCHPAD

52. Things to Remember

E-FRAME 91: USING THE SCRATCHPAD TO CLEAR AN ACTIVE FIELD

53. Enter and Input a Minus Sign

E-FRAME 92: PART 3 – FMS PAGE CHARACTERISTICS

D. Part 3

1. FMS Page Characteristics Overview

Discuss how to locate specific FM S pages and move from page. In this part of the lesson we will look at the pages most often used by the flight engineer. We will also specifica lly look at the DATA function and the Direct-To function.

E-FRAME 93: FMS PAGE SET OVERVIEW

2. Overview of Lesson Part 3

a. Index (IDX)

b. Position (PSN)

c. Integrated Navigation (INAV)

d. Status (STAT)

e. Navigation Radio (NAV)

f. Steering (STR)

g. Flight Plan (FPLN)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-17 01 OCT 10 h. Flight Plan Edit (EDIT)

i. Mission (MSN)

j. DATA and (DIR) function keys

E-FRAME 94: PAGE NOTES

3. Preamble

E-FRAME 95: INDEX PAGES

4. Index1 and Index2 Selection

E-FRAME 96: INDEX1 PAGE

5. Index1 Page Content

E-FRAME 97: INDEX2 PAGE

6. Index2 Page Content

E-FRAME 98: POSITION PAGES

7. Position Page Selection

a. pilot psn

b. copilot psn

E-FRAME 99: PILOT PSN , COPILOT PSN PAGES

8. Pilot Position and Copilo t Position Page Content

E-FRAME 100: INAV PAGES

9. INAV Page Selections

a. Navigation Source

b. Seven Different Pages, one for each Nav solution

E-FRAME 101: GPS SA TELLITE DATA AND RAIM

10. Satellite Data Page and RAIM Prediction PageKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-18 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 102: INU1(2,3) INAV PAGE

11. INUx INAV Page Content

E-FRAME 103: INU1(2,3) CONTROL PAGE

12. INUx Control Page

E-FRAME 104: STATUS PAGES

13. Status Page Selection

E-FRAME 105: LRU DETAILED STATUS PAGES

14. Detailed Status Pages

E-FRAME 106: CHECK STATUS

15. Check Status Function

E-FRAME 107: STATUS SYMBOLS

16. Status Symbol Summary

E-FRAME 108: FMS STATUS PAGE

17. FMS Status Page

E-FRAME 109: CDU STATUS (SELECT)

18. CDU Detailed Status Pages

E-FRAME 110: CDU STATUS PAGE

19. CDU Detailed Status Page Content

E-FRAME 111: NAV SENSOR STATUS PAGE

20. Nav Sensor Status Page Content

E-FRAME 112: NAV RADIO STATUS PAGE

21. Nav Radio Status Page ContentKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-19 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 113: NAV RADIO CONTROL PAGES

22. Nav Radio Control Page Content

E-FRAME 114: NAV RADIO1(2) PAGES

23. Nav Radio1(2) Page Content

E-FRAME 115: STEERING PAGES

24. Four Top-Level Steering Pages

E-FRAME 116: BAROSET

25. Barometric Altimeter Setting on vnav str

E-FRAME 117: FLIGHT PLAN PAGES

26. Flight Plan Page Content

E-FRAME 118: MISSION PAGE

27. Mission Page Content

E-FRAME 119: FMS DATA PAGES

28. FMS Data Pages Content

E-FRAME 120: FROM-TO DATA

29. From-To Data Page Content

E-FRAME 121: FROM-TO DATA (LEG, WAYPOINT)

30. From-To Data – Leg, Waypoint Content

E-FRAME 122: FROM-TO OPTIONS

31. From-To Options Content

E-FRAME 123: PART 4 – FET EXERCISES

E. Part 4

1. FET Exercises OverviewKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-20 01 OCT 10 E-FRAME 124: INSTRUCTOR -GUIDED FET EXERCISES

2. Describe and perform the FMS Pr eflight Initializ ation Procedure

a. TO 1C-10(K)A-1

b. FET

E-FRAME 125: SUMMARY

3. Lesson Summary

a. Descriptions of the basic f unctions and components of the KC-10 Flight Management System (FMS)

b. FMS Control Display Unit (CDU) controls and functions

c. FMS page selection a nd page characteristics

d. Basic characteristics of the DATA and DIRECT-TO functions

e. Selected FMS Procedures

f. FET exercise

4. Remotivation

a. Using the FMS is an essentia l duty of the flight engineer.

b. Checklists provide some guidance to locating the appropriate pages; however, you must be familiar with FMS terminology and page features to be able to follow this guidance.

E-FRAME 126: THE ENDKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-21 01 OCT 10 

# APPENDIX A

FMS EXERCISE

Procedure
Pre-Departure
1 Activate the FET by entering KWRI in the ‘Airport’ box and selecting OK.

2 Set MSUs to STBY

3 Verify the FMS software version by pressing the STAT key to access the status page. Select CDU1 (LS5) and check that the software version number (VSN) is 613-9466-011 KC10. The three-digit suffix must be -011 or higher (-012, -013...) and KC10 must be specifie d. The FET software version may display as “XXXX...”.

4 Select IDX, START and then observe the ‘s tart 1 psn/time’ page for position, date, and time.
KWRI - N40°00.935 W074°35.502 Using the CLR key, clear all of the dat a displayed on the annunciation line. Check that WGS-84 datum is displayed on the start 1 page.

5 Observe the scroll symbol located to the left of the scratchpad, indicating more pages are available. Scroll to the ‘ start 2 nav/init ’ page. There is usually no need to initialize the G PS, except if maintenance has been performed on the system. Assume you do need to initialize for today’s mission. Press LS1 and note the arrow changes to an asterisk. After the GPS is initialized, the asterisk reverts to an arrow. This may take a few minutes, so continue with next step.

6 Press the INAV function key to access the ‘ inav ’ pages.

7 Next, access the ‘ inu1 control ’ page. Scroll the ‘ inav ’ page until INU CONTROL displays next to LS4. Select INU CONTROL to access the

‘ inu1 control ’ page.

8 Activate the POSITION mode (LS2), and note the display change. Ensure that 72. 33o 0.1o is displayed. Type latitude N4000.9 in the scratchpad and press ENTER (LS6). Type longitude W07435.5 in the scratchpad and press ENTER (LS6). To clear the data and re-enter (if necessary), press CLEAR (LS3). To clear the scratchpad, press and hold the CLR key.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-22 01 OCT 10 

### Procedure

9 Set the INU1 MSU to ALIGN in the simulation c ontrol window (in the aircraft, all three selectors will be set to ALIGN). Now change the display on the information line by pressing DTK-STS (LS1). Note status counts down from 90 to 02 (In the aircra ft, the READY-NAV light will also illuminate at 02).

10 Access the ‘ start 3 database ’ page. Select IDX, START (LS1), and then scroll to ‘ start 3 database ’ page. Here, verify t he effectivity date of the stored ICAO database(s): DB A and/ or DB B. If a database is not available, the effectivity date will be das hed. During initialization of the FMS you are required to select one of the available databases by pressing the adjacent LS key. Once selected, the arrow pointing to that database will change to an asterisk unt il the other database is se lected. Select DB B KC-10.

11 Scroll to ‘ start 4 mission ’ page. On this page, se lect the mission data to be used from either MSN A or MSN B data cartridge. During initialization of the FMS, you are required to select one of the available missions by pressing the adjacent LS key. Once selected, the arrow pointing to that database will change to an asterisk unt il the other database is selected. Select MSN A fltplan.cr.

12 Scroll to the ‘ start 5 fpln/load ’ page. From this p age, you can access the catalog, load an alternate flight plan, r eplace the active flig ht plan, and load or erase flight data.

13 While on the ‘ start 5 fpln/load ’ page, display the alte rnate flight plan catalog using ALTN CATLG (LS6).

14 Select a flight plan ( McGuire1 ) by pressing the appropria te line select key. Replace the current flight plan using FPLN REPLACE (LS7) and confirm (LS7 again). This is now your alternate flight plan in the CDU.

15 Power-up all navigation equipment. Select IDX, POWER (LS6) to access the ‘ master power ’ page and then LS5 to turn on the equipment.

16 Configure TACA N and ADF.

Select NAV to access ‘ nav radio 1 ’ page. Scroll right to access ‘ nav radio 2 ’ page.

nav radio 1 page - ADF – 396, TCN1 – 43X. nav radio 2 page - ADF - 396, TCN2 - 85Y, MODE - BCNINV.

17 Set INU1 MSU to NAV on the FET control panel. (In the aircraft, this step is accomplished for all three MSUs during the Before Start checklist.).

18 Access the position page (PSN) to monitor for windshear during takeoff.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-23 01 OCT 10 

### Procedure
INSTRUCTOR PERFORMS FOLLOWING ACTIONS Select these options on the FET c ontrol panel: 320 mile scale, 10X acceleration, A/C centered on map, Auto on A/C. Select RUN to begin mission.

Climb

19 Compare data on the pilot and copilot PSN and STR pages, and the FPLN page.

Enroute

20 After passing waypoint 05, select 10x acceleration and determine your ETA to the ARCP for AR-313-N, N33 ° 49 W094 ° 25 (WPT 12) using remote ranging.

Press the DATA function key. Next, pr ess the LS key next to N33 ° 49 W094 ° 25 . Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN . On the ‘ from-to data ’ page, find your ETA to the ARCP next to LS 8. To return to the flight plan page, press the FPLN function key.

21 After passing waypoint 07:

a. Determine time and distance from present position direct to waypoint 14.

Press the DATA function key. Next, press t he LS key next to adjacent to waypoint 14. Toggle LS1 to PPSN DIRECT . On the ‘ from-to data ’ page, find your time and distance to waypoint 14 on line five.

b. Determine time and distance from present position to waypoint 14 via flight plan.

Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN . On the ‘ from-to data ’ page, find your time and distance to waypoint 14 on li ne five. ETE and ETA calculations VIA FPLN may not calculate correctly. To return to the flight plan page, press the FPLN function key.

22 For contingency planning, the aircraft commander asks you to obtain time and distance to KTIK from waypoint 12.

While on the ‘ fpln ’ page, press the DATA function key. Select the line select key next to wa ypoint 13. Enter KTIK in the scratchpad and enter it by again selecting the key next to waypoint 13.

Notice that line three now displays KTIK and your time and distance to KTIK is shown on line 5. You have not altered the flight plan and KTIK will be gone when you return to the ‘ fpln ’ page.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-M800-SG 1-39-24 01 OCT 10 

### Procedure

23 Receiver is cancelled. Recover to Ga rden City, Kansas (GCK) by pressing DIR and scrolling down to GCK.

Descent

24 Set barometer (BAROSET) to 30.00.

Press the STR selector key and vertically scroll until BAROSET is next to LS4. Enter 3000 into the scratchpad and press LS 4 to insert. Note that the FMS automatically inserts the decimal.

25 Monitor the position ( PSN ) page for windshear during the approach and come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes ' Initialization ' and the aircrafts stops. To close t he FET, select FILE, then EXIT.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-1 01 JUL 11 

# Navigation Systems

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function and components of the navigat ion systems on the KC-10.



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Navigation Systems CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1, Systems Description a. Part 6, Flight Controls (1) Ground Proximity Warning System b. Part 14, Navigation and RADAR (1) Navigation Systems Description (2) TACAN Description (3) Automatic Direction Finding System DescriptionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-2 01 JUL 11 

# Navigation Systems

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson describes the functi on and components of the navigation systems on the KC-10. It discusses the compa sses, navigation radio aids, and the controls and indicators of the systems. The lesson consists of two segments. The first identifies the components and their function. The second segment discusses the operation of the system s and the associated limitations.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the components of the navigation systems.

2. Identify the operational characte ristics of the navigation systems.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Navigation Systems

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Navigation Systems Components

1. Introduction

2. Magnetic Hdg Reference System

a. Magnetic Hdg Ref Sys Components

b. Dual Compass System

c. Compass Control Panel

3. Stand Magnetic Compass

a. Standby Magnetic Compass Desc

b. Correction Card

4. EHSIKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-3 01 JUL 11 5. Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI)

a. RMI’s Location

b. RMI Compass Card/Selector Sw

c. RMI Differences

6. Tactical Air Nav Sys (TACAN)

a. TACAN Power Sources

b. TACAN RMI Compass Card/Pointers

c. TACAN Controls/Indicators

d. TACAN Antennas

e. Operational Modes

f. DME Indicators

g. Operating Range

7. Auto Direction Finding Sys (ADF)

a. ADF Description

b. FMS Control

c. VOR/ADF RMI

8. Marker Beacon System

a. Marker Beacon System Description

b. VOR/ILS Frequency Selector

c. Lights

9. Radio Altimeter System

a. Radio Altimeter Description

b. Indicators

c. Antennas

10. ClocksKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-4 01 JUL 11 a. Clocks

b. Pilot’s Clock

(1) Pilot’s Clock

(2) Short Term Elapsed Time

(3) Long Term Elapsed

c. Flight Engineers’ Clock

(1) Flight Engineers’ Clock

(2) GMT Selector

(3) Short/Long Term Elapsed Time

11. Radar

a. Radar Description

b. Control Panel

(1) Mode Selector

(2) System Switch

(3) Pencil/Fan Switch

(4) Gain Knob

(5) Antenna Tilt

(6) R-T Fault Lights

c. Indicator Panel

(1) Indicator panel

(2) Range Selector

(3) Hold Push Button

(4) Target Clarity/Intensity

(5) Normal/Marker Delay Switch

(6) Radar Scope DisplayKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-5 01 JUL 11 12. Summary

13. Quiz 1

C. Navigation Systems Oper ational Characteristics

1. Introduction

2. Magnetic Hdg Reference System

a. Magnetic Hdg Reference System

b. Synchronization

3. Standby Magnetic Compass

4. EHSI

5. Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI)

6. Tactical Air Nav Sys (TACAN)

7. Auto Direction Finding Sys (ADF)

a. Auto Direction Finding Sys (ADF)

b. UHF DF Operation

8. Marker Beacon System

9. Radio Altimeter System

a. Radio Altimeter

10. Clocks (FE)

a. Clocks (FE)

b. Brightness Adjustment

c. Short Term Elapsed Time

11. Radar

a. Radar

b. Test Mode

c. Weather /Map 1/Map 2 ModeKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C016-SG 1-40-6 01 JUL 11 d. Beacon Mode

12. Summary

13. Quiz 2

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-1 01 JUN 12 

# Introduction to the Flight Guidance System

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System.



### II. Duration - 0.8 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Station B. Introduction to the FGS CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description a. Part 6, Automatic Flight Description B. FGS Workbook (W083) 1. Sections 1.0 through 4.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-2 01 JUN 12 

# Introduction to the Flight Guidance System

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System.

B. Objective

1. Select the characteristics of t he Flight Guidance System panel and components.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Introduction to the Flight Guidance System

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Introduction to the Flight Guidance System

1. Introduction

2. Flight Guidance System Panels

a. FGS Panels Locations

b. FGS Components

3. Autothrottle Systems

a. Autothrottle Component Location

b. Autothrottle Control Panel

c. Thrust Rating Computer

d. Autothrottle Disengage Button

e. TOGA ButtonKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-3 01 JUN 12 f. Speed Control Test Selector

g. Autothrottle Indicators

h. Autothrottle Procedures

4. Roll Control

a. Roll Control Components

b. Roll Control Panel

c. Navigation Inputs

5. Pitch Control

a. Pitch Control Panel Location

b. Pitch Controls

6. Flight Director

a. FD Component Location

b. FD Controls

c. FD Indicators

7. Autopilot System

a. Autopilot Component Location

b. Autopilot Controls

c. Autopilot Indicators

8. Segment Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C078-SG 1-41-4 01 JUN 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-1 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System Autothrottle

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, characteristics and operations of the F light Guidance System’s Autothrottle system.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. FGS Autothrottle CBT Lesson C. Writing Materials



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Flight Guidance Syst em Introduction CBT Lesson B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1, Systems Description (a) Part 6, Flight Controls/Fli ght Instruments/Automatic Flight (1) Automatic Throttle and Speed Control System (2) Automatic Throttle System (ATS) C. FGS Workbook, (W083) 1. Section 5.0 2. Section 6.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-2 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System Autothrottle

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Autothrottle system.

B. Objectives

1. Select the operational characteri stics of the autot hrottle controls and indicators.

2. Select the characteristics of autothrottle modes of operation.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Flight Guidance System Auto Throttle (FGS)

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Controls and Indicators

1. Introduction

2. Major Components

3. Autothrottles - Engage

4. Autothrottles - Disengage

5. Illuminated Fail Lights

6. Extinguished Fail Lights

7. Speed Mode Operation

8. N1 Mode OperationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-3 01 OCT 10 9. Thrust Rating Computer

10. Speed/N1 Operation

11. ADI Fast/Slow Indicator

12. TOGA Button

13. Summary

14. Controls and Indicators Quiz

C. Modes of Operation

1. Introduction

2. Takeoff

3. Speed Mode

4. FMA Displays

5. ADI Fast/Slow Indicator

6. Airspeed Indicator

7. Safety Limits

8. Overspeed Protection

9. Alpha Speed

10. Disengaged ATS Landing

11. Engaged ATS Landing

12. Speed Control Test

13. Summary

14. Modes of Operation Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C079-SG 1-42-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-1 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System I

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Roll and Pitch systems.



### II. Duration - 1.3 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. FGS I CBT Lesson C. Writing Materials



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. FGS Autothrottle CBT Lesson B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1, Systems Description (a) Part 6, Flight Controls/Automatic Flight (1) Roll Mode (2) Pitch/Altitude Advisory System C. FGS Workbook, (W083) 1. Section 5.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-2 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System I

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the function, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s Roll and Pitch systems.

B. Objectives

1. Select the operational characte ristics of the FGS Roll Control Modes.

2. Select the operational characteri stics of FGS Pitch Control Modes.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Flight Guidance System I

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Roll Control

1. Introduction

2. FGS Panel/Roll Indicators

3. Heading Controls

a. Heading Control Knob

b. Heading Select Mode

c. Heading Hold Mode

d. AP/FD Engagement

e. Takeoff Mode

4. Bank Angle SelectorKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-3 01 OCT 10 a. Bank Angle Selector

b. Bank Angle Selector - Description

c. Bank Angle Selector - Operation

5. RAD/FMS Mode

a. RAD/FMS Switch

b. RAD Nav Source

c. RAD Arm

d. RAD Capture/Track

e. Localizer/ILS

f. FMS Capture/Track

6. ILS Mode

a. ILS Switch (Arm)

b. Localizer Capture/Track

c. Glideslope Capture/Track

7. Summary

8. Roll Control Quiz

C. Pitch Control

1. Introduction

2. Pitch Control Panel

3. Vertical Speed Wheel

a. Vertical Speed Wheel

b. Vertical Spd/Alt Hold Modes

c. Vert Spd Cautions/Warnings

4. IAS/MACH Hold

a. IAS Hold ModeKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C080-SG 1-43-4 01 OCT 10 b. Mach Hold Mode

c. Affects of Speed/N-1 Modes

5. Altitude Preselect

a. Altitude Preselect Mode

b. Altitude Arm/Capture

c. Altitude Hold

6. Altitude Advisory

a. Alt Advisory/Capture

b. Alt Advisory/Deviation

c. Alt Advisory/Independent Ops

7. Summary

8. Pitch Control Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-1 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System II

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance S ystem’s Flight Director and Autopilot.



### II. Duration - 1.2 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. FGS II CBT Lesson C. Writing Materials



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Complete FGS I CBT Lesson B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section I, Systems Description (a) Part 6, Automatic Flight per taining to the Flight Director (b) Part 6, Automatic Flight pertaining to the Autopilot C. FGS Workbook, (W083) 1. Section 4.0 2. Section 5.0 3. Section 6.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-2 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System II

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, characteristics and operat ions of the Flight Gui dance System’s Flight Director and Autopilot.

B. Objectives

1. Select the operational characte ristics of the Flight Director components.

2. Select the operational characte ristics of the KC-10 Autopilot components.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Flight Guidance System II

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Flight Director

1. Introduction

2. Flight Director Control Panels

3. ADI V-Command Bars

4. Flight Mode Annunciators

5. Flight Director Command Selector

a. FD Selector Positions

b. FD Light

c. FD Flag

6. Mode of ConflictKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-3 01 OCT 10 a. Mode Conflict Indication

b. Mode Conflict Causes

7. Modes of Operation Overview

a. Modes of Operation Overview

b. Back Course Localizer Approach

(1) Back Crs Localizer Description

(2) Back Crs Localizer Operation

c. Takeoff Mode

(1) Takeoff Mode Description

(2) Pitch – All Engines Operating

(3) Pitch – Engine Failure

(4) Roll Guidance

d. Go-Around Mode

8. Summary

9. Quiz

C. Autopilot

1. Introduction

2. Autopilot Components

3. Autopilot Controls

a. A/P Levers Description

b. A/P CWS - Roll Axis

c. A/P CWS - Pitch Axis

d. A/P CWS - FMA Displays

e. A/P CMD - Description

f. A/P CautionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C081-SG 1-44-4 01 OCT 10 g. A/P Basic Modes

4. Mode Conflict

5. Command CWS

a. Command CWS Description

b. FMA/V-Command Bars

6. Turbulence Mode

a. Turbulence Mode Description

b. Turbulence Mode Operation

c. Turb Air Penetration Speed

d. Turbulence Mode Termination

7. Autopilot Advisory Lights

a. Advisory Lights Location

b. Autopilot Fail Lights

c. Out-of-Trim Lights

8. Summary

9. Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-1 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System

Procedures Integration

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the functions, characteristics and operations of the Flight Guidance System’s procedures integration.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. FGS Procedures Integration CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Complete Flight Guidance System I and II CBT Lessons B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Pilot’s Interior Inspection, Cockpit Preparation, and Before Takeoff information pertaining to Flight Guidance Usage b. Approach information Pertaini ng to Flight Guidance Usage (1) ILS Approach & ILS Back course Approach 2. Section V, Mission Preparation a. Operating Techniques for: (1) Figure 5-1 Takeoff and Climb (2) Figure 5-2 Altitude Pre-select and Advisory (3) Figure 5-3 Turbulence Penetration (4) Figure 5-4 Descent Profile (5) Figure 5-5 Holding Pattern (6) Figure 5-6 FMS Holding Pattern (7) Figure 5-7 Flight Direc tor Manual ILS Approach (8) Figure 5-8 Go-Around from Flight Director Approach (9) Figure 5-9 CMD CWS During ILS Approach - Autopilot Lever in CMD (10) Figure 5-10 Flight Gu idance System Back Course Approach (11) Figure 5-11 Flight Gu idance System GPS ApproachKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-2 01 OCT 10 

# Flight Guidance System

Procedures Integration

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. The previous lessons on the Fli ght Guidance System discussed the operations of the indivi dual components. This le sson uses a computerbased mission scenario to demonstrate integrated system operation. It explains and demonstrates the int egrated operation usi ng on-screen text and narration. This lesson directs you through the checklists and flight procedures during a typical mission. Th e scenario covers the operation in these mission phases.

B. Objective

1. Perform the FGS Procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Lesson Introduction

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. FGS Procedures Integration

1. Introduction

2. Mission Data

3. Preflight

4. Cockpit Preparation

5. Before Takeoff

a. Takeoff Flex (TRC)

b. TOGA Button/Alt Preselect

c. Altitude ArmKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-3 01 OCT 10 6. Takeoff

a. Heading Preselect

b. Takeoff Roll

c. Climb Power (TRC)

d. N1 Mode/Vert Spd

7. Climb

a. AP Engage/IAS Mode

b. Hdg Sel/Bank Angle Limit

c. Alt Set/Alt Arm

d. Alt Advisory/Alt Cap

8. Cruise

a. RAD Arm (VOR)

b. Command CWS/RAD Track

c. Altitude Arm

d. Enroute Climb

e. MACH Hold/ALT CAP

f. MCR Power (TRC)

g. Turbulence Mode

h. Cancel Turbulence Mode

9. Descent

a. Initiate Descent/ATS Off

b. MACH Hold/IAS Hold

c. Speed Select/ATS On

10. Approach

a. ILS Approach/GA Power (TRC)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C082-SG 1-45-4 01 OCT 10 b. Localizer Capture

c. Arm ILS/Bank Angle Limit

d. Glideslope Capture

11. Go-Around

a. TOGA Button/Go-Around Mode

b. Alt Arm/Vert Spd

c. Acceleration/Clean-up

12. Approach

a. LOC Backcourse/Alt Arm

b. CWS/Backcourse Arm

c. Backcourse Cap/Track

d. Vert Spd/Alt Hold

e. AP Disc/Vert Spd

13. Landing

14. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-1 01 JUL 11 

# FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the procedures used in the initial aircraft inspection, ensur ing the aircraft is safe to establish electrical, pneumatic, and hydraulic power. It also prepares the aircraft for the interior and exterior preflight inspection.



### II. Duration

- 1.7 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Flight Crew Preflight and Preparation for Flight b. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation (1) FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-2 01 JUL 11 

# FE Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson covers the procedures used in the initial aircraft inspection, ensuring the aircraft is safe to establish electrical, pneumatic, and hydraulic power. It also prepares t he aircraft for the interior and exterior preflight inspection. The first segm ent discusses the procedures in detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. The second segment allows you to practice the steps using the check list. The lesson test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the Flight Engineer’s Ex terior/Interior Initial Inspection procedures.

2. Perform the Flight Engineer’s Ex terior/Interior Initial Inspection procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Exterior/Interior Initial In spection Procedures Identification

1. Introduction

2. Exterior

a. Wheel Chocks

b. Landing Gear Doors

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1

c. Flight Control Surfaces

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-3 01 JUL 11 d. APU Inlet/Exhaust Areas

e. Boom and Drogue

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3

f. Pitot & Inlet Covers

3. Interior

a. AFTO Form 781

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 4

b. Battery Switch/Voltage

c. Fuel Dump Switch

d. L-Band SATCOM

e. Spoiler Handle

f. Flap/Slat Handle

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 5

g. Landing Gear Handle

h. UHF Radios

i. ARC-164 (V) UHF Radios

j. ARC-171 UHF Radios

k. VHF-1 Radio

l. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle

m. APU and Eng Fire Detect Sys

(1) Fire Warning Setup

(2) Fire Warning Test

(3) Agent Low Lights Check

n. APU

(1) APUKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-4 01 JUL 11 (a) Embedded Quiz Question 6

(2) APU Set For Start

(3) APU Fuel Set

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 7

(4) APU Start

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 8

o. Electrical Power (APU/External)

p. Remove External Power

q. CAB PRESS/Outflow Valve Position

r. Equipment Panel

(1) Test Select/Config Switches

(2) Ignition Exciter Transfer Switch

(3) Fuel Quantity Channel Selector

(4) Manifold Fail Loop Selector Switch

(5) Pitot Heater Select Switches

(6) Oxygen System Test Selector

s. Circuit Breakers

t. Hydraulic System

(1) Hydraulic System

(a) Embedded Quiz Question 9

(2) Reversible Motor Pump Check

(3) Auxiliary Pump Number One

(4) Auxiliary Pump Number Two

(5) 2-3/1-3 Reversible Motor Pump O

(6) Temp., Quantity, Quantity BugsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-5 01 JUL 11 (7) Rudder Standby Power OFF Light

(8) Engine Hyd Pump Switches

u. Manifold Fail/Supply Lockout – Part 1

v. Manifold Fail/Supply Lockout – Part 2

w. Center Inst Panel Flow Indicator

x. Pneu and Air Conditioning System

y. Trim Air Switch

z. FE Annunciator Lights Part One

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 10

aa. FE Annunciator Lights Part Two

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 11

bb. FE Annunciator Lights Part Three

cc. CDU Power Switches

dd. MSUs/ READY NAV BATT Lts

ee. FMS – Part 1

ff. FMS – Part 2

gg. FMS – Part 3

4. Summary

C. Exterior / Interior Initial Inspection Procedures Performance

1. Introduction

2. Exterior

a. Wheel Chocks

b. Landing Gear Doors

c. Flight Control Surface

d. APU Inlet/Exhaust AreasKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-6 01 JUL 11 e. Boom and Drogue

f. Pitot and Engine Covers

3. Interior

a. AFTO Form 781

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1

b. Fuel Dump Switch

c. L-Band SATCOM

d. Spoiler Handle

e. Landing Gear Handle

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 2

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 3

f. VHF-1 Radio

g. Cabin Air Shutoff Handle

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 4

h. APU

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 5

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 6

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 7

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 8

i. CAB PRESS/Outflow Valve/Lighting

j. FE Equipment Panel

k. Circuit Breakers

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 9

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 10

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 11KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-7 01 JUL 11 (4) Embedded Quiz Question 12

(5) Embedded Quiz Question 13

(6) Embedded Quiz Question 14

(7) Embedded Quiz Question 15

(8) Embedded Quiz Question 16

(9) Embedded Quiz Question 17

(10) Embedded Quiz Question 18

(11) Embedded Quiz Question 19

(12) Embedded Quiz Question 20

(13) Embedded Quiz Question 21

l. FMS – Part 1

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 22

m. FMS – Part 2

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 23

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 24

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 25

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 26

4. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C300-SG 1-46-8 01 JUL 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-1 01 OCT 10 

# FE Interior Inspection I

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the procedures used in the initial aircraft inspection. This le sson is presented in three segments and discusses the inspection procedures for t he Overhead Panel, the Pilot’s, Center, and Copilot’s Instrument Panel s, and the Center Pedestal.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. FE Interior Inspection I CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation (1) FE’s Interior InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-2 01 OCT 10 

# FE Interior Inspection I

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson covers the procedures us ed in the initial aircraft inspection. The first segment discusses the procedures for inspecting the Pilot’s Overhead Panel. The second segm ent discusses the procedures for inspecting the Pilot’s, the Center, and the Copilot’s Instrument Panels. The third segment discusses the proced ures for inspecting the Center Pedestal. All procedur es are discussed in detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. The lesson test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the Interior Inspection procedures for the Pilot’s Overhead Panel.

2. Identify the Interior Inspection pr ocedures for the Pilot’s, Copilot’s, and Center Instrument Panels.

3. Identify the Interior Inspection procedures for the Center Pedestal.

II. PRESENTATION

A. FE Interior Inspection I

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Pilot’s Overhead Panel

1. Introduction

2. Pilot’s Windows

3. Master Warning/Caution Lights

4. Overhead Panel Scan

5. Radar TransponderKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-3 01 OCT 10 6. HYD FLT Control Lights

7. Flap Limit Selector

8. Elevator Feel System

9. ADG Switch

10. Yaw Damp System

11. Anti-skid System

12. Compasses

13. HF Radios

14. INS/FD CMD/CADC Selector

15. IFF CADC Select

16. Voice Recorder

17. Engine Start Panel

18. Emergency Power Switch

19. Emergency Lights

20. Seat Belts

21. Antenna Switches

22. Beacon Light

23. GPWS

24. ARO Station Alarm

25. ELT 1 and 2 Switches

26. Stall Warning

27. Max Speed Warn

28. Speed Control

29. Windshield Anti-ice, Defog

30. Pitot Heat SelectorKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-4 01 OCT 10 31. Engine & ANT Anti-ice

32. Lights

33. Pilot Annunciator Lights

34. Summary

35. Pilot’s Overhead Panels Quiz

C. Pilot’s, Copilot’s, and Center Instrument Panel

1. Introduction

2. Scan Pattern

3. Pilot’s Instrument Panel

4. Reverser Lights

5. Engine Instruments

6. Speed Brake and Slat

7. Thrust Computer and TAT

8. Flap/Slat Position

9. Surface Position Indicator

10. Gear Lights and Warning Horn

11. Copilot Inst Pnl and Windows

12. Summary

13. Pilot’s, Copilot’s, and C enter Instrument Panel Quiz

D. Center Pedestal

1. Introduction

2. Longitudinal Trim System

a. Pilot’s Trim Switches

b. Long Trim Handles

c. Alternate Trim SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-5 01 OCT 10 d. Copilot’s Trim Switches

3. Parking Brakes

4. Spoiler Handle

5. Takeoff Warning Horn

6. Parking Brakes

7. Fuel Levers

8. Flap/Slat, Flap T.O. Selector

9. IFF/ETCAS

10. Weather Radar

11. Aileron Trim

12. Rudder Trim

13. ADG Release

14. Passenger Address System

15. Summary

16. Center Pedestal Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C302-SG 1-47-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-1 01 JUL 11 

# FE Interior Inspection II

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson continues with the F light Engineer’s procedures followed in the initial aircraft inspection. T he previous lesson stopped the inspection following the Center Pedestal. This le sson begins with the Fl ight Engineer’s Panels and continues to the end of the procedure. The steps are discussed in detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. FE Interior Inspection II CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation (1) FE’s Interior InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-2 01 JUL 11 

# FE Interior Inspection II

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson continues with the Fli ght Engineer’s procedures followed in the Initial Aircraft Inspection. The previous lesson stopped the inspection following the Center Pedestal. Th is lesson begins with the Flight Engineers Panels and continues to t he end of the procedur e. The steps are discussed in detail using the Dash-1 expanded procedures. The lesson test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objective

1. Identify interior inspection proc edures for the Flight Engineer’s Panels.

II. PRESENTATION

A. FE Interior Inspection II

1. Lesson Introduction

2. Objectives

B. FE Interior Inspection

1. Scan Pattern

2. Audio Panel

3. Exterior/Interior Lights

4. Hydraulic System

5. Electrical System

a. CSDs / Gen Fail Lights

b. Generators / AC Load / Bus Off Lights

c. Bus Ties / Emergency Power / DC Load

d. DC Bus Off Lights / DC Tie / BatteryKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-3 01 JUL 11 e. Volt / Amp / Freq Selector

6. Oxygen Mask Switch Guard

7. Pneumatic and A / C Systems

a. Scan

b. Pneumatic & Air Conditioning Lights

c. Pneumatic Supply / Temp-Press Gages

d. Isolation Valves / Wing Anti-Ice Switches

e. Flow Gages / Pack Selector

f. Pack Indicator Selector

g. Temp Sel / Avionic Flow / Trim Air

h. Valve Position / Temp Gages / Lav-Galley

8. Brake Temp System Test

9. Oxygen Quantity Switch

10. Cabin Cargo Smoke Detectors

11. Annunciator Panel

12. Pressurization

13. Clock

14. Engine Instruments

15. L-Band SATCOM

16. Gear Lights

17. AR Receptacle Audio Switch

18. Flight Recorder Switch

19. Maintenance Jack Switch

20. Potable Water System

21. AR Receptacle Door HandleKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C303-SG 1-48-4 01 JUL 11 22. Fuel System

a. Fuel System Lights

b. Fuel Quantity Test

c. Aft Pump Switches

d. Fuel Temp / Fuel Used Reset

e. Manifold Scavenge / AR Gages / Isol Valve

f. Gross Weight Indicator

g. AR Boom

h. Tanker/Receiver Manifold Scavenge

i. Wing Pod Control Panel

23. Hyd Motor Pump Switches

24. Aux Hyd Pumps

25. Oxy Mask / Regulator / Interphone

a. Audio Panel

b. Oxy Supply / Diluter Lever-100%

c. Don Mask / Check Emergency

d. Interphone Check / Supply Lever Off

26. AR Receptacle Shutoff Valve

27. Summary

28. FE Interior Inspection Quiz

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-1 01 OCT 10 

# FE Interior Inspection III

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson continues with the F light Engineer’s procedures followed in the initial aircraft inspection. This lesson allows you to practice the entire Flight Engineer Interior Inspection.



### II. Duration - 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Flight Engineer Interior Inspection III CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation (1) FE’s Interior InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-2 01 OCT 10 

# FE Interior Inspection III

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson allows you to prac tice and perform the procedures for inspecting the Pilot’s station and the Fl ight Engineer’s station. The lesson test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objective

1. Perform the FE Interi or Inspection Procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. FE Interior Inspection III

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Interior Inspection Procedures Practice

1. Pilot’s Overhead Panel

a. Scan Pattern

b. Pilot’s Windows

c. Master Warning/Caution

d. Radar Transponder Selectors

e. Hydraulic Flight Control Lights

f. Flap Limit Selector

g. Elevator Feel System

h. ADG Switch

i. Yaw Damp System

j. Anti-skid SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-3 01 OCT 10 k. Compasses

l. HF Radios

m. INS/FD CMD/CADC

n. IFF CADC Select

o. Voice Recorder

p. Engine Start Panel

q. Emergency Power Switch

r. Emergency Lights

s. Seat Belts

t. Antenna Switches

u. Beacon Light Master Selector

v. GPWS

w. ARO Station Alarm

x. ELT 1 & 2 Switches

y. Stall Warning System

z. Max Speed Warn System

aa. Speed Control

bb. Windshield Anti-ice

cc. Windshield Defog

dd. Pitot Heat Meter Selector

ee. Engine Antenna Anti-ice Sws

ff. Lights

gg. Pilot Annunciator Lights

2. Forward Instrument Panels

a. Scan PatternKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-4 01 OCT 10 b. Pitot Static Selector

c. Reverser Lights

d. Engine Instruments

e. Speed Brake and Slat Reset Lts

f. Thrust Computer and TAT

g. Flap/Slat Position Indicator

h. Surface Position Indicator

i. Gear Lights and Warning Horn

j. Copilot’s Instrument Panel

k. Copilot’s Window

3. Center Pedestal

a. Longitudinal Trim System

b. Parking Brakes

c. Spoiler Handle

d. Takeoff Warning Horn

e. Parking Brakes Set

f. Fuel Levers

g. Flap/Slat Handle

h. Flap Takeoff Selector

i. IFF/ETCAS

j. Weather Radar

k. Aileron Trim

l. Rudder Trim

m. ADG Release Handle

n. PA SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-5 01 OCT 10 4. Flight Engineer’s Panels

a. Scan pattern

b. Audio Panel

c. Exterior/Interior Lights

d. Hydraulic System

e. Electrical System

(1) CSD’s and Generators

(2) A-C Electrical System

(3) D-C Electrical System

(4) Battery Indicators

f. Oxygen Mask Switch Guard

g. Pneumatic & Air Conditioning Systems

h. Brake Temperature System

i. Oxygen Quantity Switch

j. Cabin Cargo Smoke Detectors

k. Annunciator Panel

l. Pressurization

m. Clock

n. Engine Instruments

o. COMSEC Control Panel

p. Gear Lights

q. AR Receptacle Audio Switch

r. Potable Water System

s. AR Receptacle Door Handle

t. Fuel SystemKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C304-SG 1-49-6 01 OCT 10 (1) Fuel System Lights

(2) Fuel Quantity Test

(3) Aft Pumps, Press Temp

(4) Fuel Used Counters

(5) Manifold Scavenge/AR Gages/Isol Valve

(6) Gross Weight Indicator

(7) AR Boom

(8) Tkr/Rec Manifold Scavenge

(9) Wing Pod Control Panel

u. Hydraulic Motor Pump Switches

v. Hydraulic Motor Pumps

w. AUX HYD Pumps

x. Oxy Mask, Reg Interphone

(1) Audio/Oxy Supply/Diluter Lever

(2) Check Emergency

(3) Supply Lever Off

y. AR Receptacle Shutoff Valve

5. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T304-SG 1-50-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD-304 FE Interior Inspection

I. Purpose

– The purpose of this introductory trai ner is to allow practice of the FE’s Exterior/Interior In itial Inspection and the FE’s Interior Inspection.



### II. Duration – 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection b. FE’s Interior InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T304-SG 1-50-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures



## Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs.

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 2. FE’s Interior Inspection



## Mission Briefing

1. Briefing: While in the FTD the inst ructor will brief the procedures to be accomplished during this FTD period.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-1 01 OCT 10 

# Engine Start Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the checklists and procedures used for starting the engines on the KC-10. It discusses the Cockpit Preparation and Before Start checklists and the Engine Start Procedures.



### II. Duration - 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Engine Start Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Preflight and Cockpit Preparation (1) Cockpit Preparation b. Engine Starting (1) Before Start (2) Starting Engines B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2 1. Cockpit Preparation 2. Before StartKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-2 01 OCT 10 

# Engine Start Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to the checklists and procedures used for starting the engines on the KC-10. It discusses the Cockpit Preparation and Before Start checklists and the Engine Start Procedures. After discussing the flow and details of these checklists, there is a practice with minimal prompts and remediation di recting you to the abbreviated checklist.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the Cockpit Preparation Procedures.

2. Identify Before Start Procedures

3. Identify Engine Start Procedures

II. PRESENTATION

A. Engine Start Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Engine Start Proc edures Identification

1. Checklist Procedures

2. Cockpit Prep Checklist

a. Takeoff Data/N1 Limit/V-Bugs

(1) Takeoff Eata/N1 Limit/V-Bugs

(2) Takeoff Data Checked

(3) N1 Limit

(4) Zero Fuel WeightKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-3 01 OCT 10 (5) V-Bugs

(6) Minimum Acceleration Height

(7) Close or Distant Obstacle

(8) Two Engine MSL

(a) No Obstacle

(b) Flap Selector Set

b. Altimeters

c. FMS/INU Present Po sition/Flight Plan

d. Oxygen System

e. Compasses

f. Yaw Dampers

g. Anti-Skid

h. Emergency Switch Light

i. Stall Warn/Max Speed/Speed Cont

j. Windshield Anti-Ice/Defog

k. Pitot Heat

l. Exterior Lights

m. Cabin Cargo Smoke Swit ch/Avionics Flow Switch

n. Pressurization Set

o. Cockpit Prep Checklist Completed

3. Before Start Checklist

a. Before Start Checklist

b. INUs

c. Beacon Light Selector

d. Parking Brake/Fuel LeversKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C308-SG 1-51-4 01 OCT 10 e. Fuel Pumps

f. Pack Function Selectors

g. Engine Ignition Selector

h. Pneumatic Pressure

i. BO Prep/Cargo Door Lights

j. Cabin Door Lights

k. Before Start Checklist Completed

4. Engine Start Procedures

a. Engine Start Procedures

b. Engines Clear to Start

c. Ground Control Clearance

d. Pneumatic Pressure

e. Fuel Lever On

f. Initial Fuel Flow Indication

g. EGT Rise

h. 45% N2 - Starter Cutout

i. Oil Pressure/Temp/Quantity Bug

j. Hydraulic Panel Set

k. Caution N1 Indication

5. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-1 01 OCT 10 

# Before Takeoff Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the Before Takeoff procedures. It describes the procedures fr om after the engines are started, using the Before Taxi and the Before Takeoff Checklists.



### II. Duration - 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Before Takeoff Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Taxi and Takeoff (1) Before Taxi (2) Before Takeoff B. T.O. 1C-10K(A)-1CL-2 1. Before Taxi 2. Before TakeoffKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-2 01 OCT 10 

# Before Takeoff Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the Before Takeoff Procedures. It describes the procedures from after the engines are started, using the Before Taxi and the Before Takeoff Checklists. The lesson consists of two segments and a Test. The first segment discusses the Flight Engineer procedures in detail, and reviews the Pilot proc edures, using the expanded Dash-1 procedures. Appropriate Notes, C autions and Warnings are discussed. The test evaluates your k nowledge of the procedures.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the before takeoff procedures.

2. Perform the before takeoff procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Before Takeoff Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Before Takeoff Procedures Identification

1. Before Taxi Checklist

a. Before Taxi Checklist

b. Windows

c. Anti-Ice

d. Hydraulic System

e. Pneumatic and Air Conditioning

f. Fire Bottle/Ground Equipment/Gear PinsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-3 01 OCT 10 g. Before Taxi Checklist Complete

2. Before Takeoff Checklist

a. Before Takeoff Checklist

b. Flaps/Slats

c. Flight Controls

d. Trim

e. Spoilers

f. Crew Briefing

g. CDUs/EHSIs/Radio Aids

h. Flight Instruments

i. Thrust Computer

j. Number 2 Engine

(1) Number 2 Engine

(2) Engine Ignition Switch

(3) Engine Start Switch

(4) Fuel Lever

(5) EGT Rise/Starter Pop-Out

(6) Oil Quantity Bugs

k. Hydraulic System

(1) Hydraulic system

(2) Normal Indications

(3) One Three Motor Pump

l. Electrical System

(1) Electrical System

(2) Parallel GeneratorsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C309-SG 1-52-4 01 OCT 10 (3) Volt/Amp/Frequency Selector

m. APU

(1) APU

(2) APU Isolation Valve

(3) APU Master Switch

n. Manifold Fail/Supply Lockout

(1) Pneumatic System

(2) System 1 Test

o. L-Band Satcom

p. HF Radios

q. Fuel System

r. FGS/ALT Preselect

s. Brake Temperature(s)

t. Cabin Report/Iridium Phone

u. Pneumatic System

(1) Pneumatic System

(2) Bleeds Off Takeoff

(3) N1 Manual Set

v. Radar

w. IFF/ETCAS

x. HI-Int/Landing Lights

y. Annunciator Panels

z. Before Takeoff Checklist Complete

3. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-1 01 OCT 10 

# Takeoff Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the normal takeoff procedures from "In position for Takeoff" , with the line items completed, through the portion of the After Takeoff/Climb c hecklist accomplished immediately after the first power reduction, bef ore reaching 10,000 feet.



### II. Duration

- 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual


### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Takeoff Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section 1V, Normal Procedures a. Taxi and Takeoff (1) Takeoff b. Climb and Cruise (1) After Takeoff/ClimbKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-2 01 OCT 10 

# Takeoff Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the normal takeoff procedures from ready for takeoff through completion of the steps of the After Takeoff and Climb Checklist that are accomplished after the first power reduction. The test confirms your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objective

1. Identify Takeoff Procedures

II. PRESENTATION

A. Takeoff Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Takeoff Procedures Identification

1. Crew Duties

a. Crew Duties

b. Autopilot Engaged

c. Autopilot Not Engaged

d. Deviations

e. PF/PNF

2. Takeoff Procedures

a. Warm Up Time

b. N1-40/45 Percent

c. Takeoff Warning CAUTION

d. Takeoff PowerKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-3 01 OCT 10 e. 80 Knots

f. No Clamp

g. Monitor Winds

h. V1/Rotate

i. V2 Plus 10

j. Gear/Spoilers

k. Climb Power

l. 1000 Feet Up

m. Noise Abatement

3. After Takeoff/Climb Checklist

a. Landing Gear/Lights

b. Thrust Computer/N1

c. Pressurization/Spoilers

d. Flaps/Slats

e. Flap Takeoff Selector

f. Acceleration

4. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C320-SG 1-53-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-1 01 OCT 10 

# Climb/Cruise Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the Climb/Cruise Procedures. The lesson discusses the proc edures after the aircraft is cleaned up and climbing to altitude.



### II. Duration - 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Climb/Cruise Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. After Takeoff/Climb b. Climb Information c. Cruise InformationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-2 01 OCT 10 

# Climb/Cruise Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses Climb/Cruise Procedures after the aircraft is cleaned up and climbing to altitude. There are two segments and a test. The first segment, using the expanded Da sh-1, covers the Flight Engineer procedures in detail and reviews the Pilot procedures. The second segment, using the abbreviated check list, leads you through the checklist procedures. Appropriate Notes, Caut ions and Warnings are discussed. The test evaluates your k nowledge of the procedures.

B. Objective

1. Identify the clim b/cruise procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Climb / Cruise Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

3. Identify the Climb/ Cruise Procedures

a. Departure/Climb

(1) Altitude Arm

(2) RAD Arm/Track

(3) Acceleration/IAS Hold

b. After Takeoff/Climb Checklist

(1) BO/Lights/Seat Belt

(2) Transition Altitude

(3) SATCOM

(4) Iridium PhoneKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-3 01 OCT 10 (5) Checklist Complete

c. Aircraft Systems

(1) Engines

(2) Hydraulics

(3) Electrical

(4) Fuel

(5) Pneumatics

(6) Air Conditioning

(7) Pressurization

(8) Annunciators/Fire Det

(9) Engine Oil

d. Climb/Level Off

(1) Mach Hold

(2) Alt Cap/Speed Mode

e. Fuel Management

f. Fuel Status/Aircraft Forms

g. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C330-SG 1-54-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-1 01 OCT 10 

# Descent Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce the KC-10 Descent Checklist and descent profiles. It covers the descent down to ten thousand feet.



### II. Duration

- 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Descent Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Descent and Landing (1) Descent Information (2) DescentKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-2 01 OCT 10 

# Descent Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the KC-10 Descent Checklis t and descent profiles. It covers descent down to ten thous and feet. The Flight Engineer procedures are covered in detail; Pilot procedures are reviewed. There are two segments and a test. The first segment discusses the procedures in detail using the Dash -1 expanded procedures. In the second segment, you will practice the check list steps. The test ev aluates your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objectives

1. Identify the descent procedures.

2. Perform the descent procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Descent Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Descent Procedures

1. Landing Data/V-Bugs

a. Landing Data Requirements

b. Tab Data (Pilot)

c. V-Bugs

d. Approach Speed

e. Reference Ground Speed

f. Approach Speed Procedures

2. Crew BriefingKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-3 01 OCT 10 a. Briefing Items

b. Required Call-Outs

c. GPWS/Ref Grd Speed

3. Approach RAIM

4. Radio Altimeters

5. Windshield Anti-Ice

6. HF Radios

7. Pressurization

8. L-BAND SATCOM

9. Altimeters

10. FMS Baroset

11. Descent Profiles

a. Descent Profiles

b. Long Range Descent

c. Penetration Descent

d. Enroute Descent

12. Enroute Descent Procedures

13. Aircraft Systems

14. Call-Outs/Tr ansition Altitude

15. Speed Reduction/IAS Hold

16. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C351-SG 1-55-4 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-1 01 OCT 10 

# Approach Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Approach Checklist, Downwind Checklis t, and Approach Procedures.



### II. Duration - 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Approach Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. Descent and Landing (1) Approach Information (2) Approach (3) Before Landing Information (4) Before Landing b. After Landing and Parking (1) DownwindKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-2 01 OCT 10 

# Approach Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the Approac h Checklist, Downwind Checklist, and approach procedures. Appropriate No tes, Cautions, and Warnings are discussed.

B. Objectives

1. Identify Approach Procedures.

2. Perform Approach Procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Approach Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objective

B. Approach Procedur es Identification

1. Approach Checklist

a. Approach Checklist

b. Fuel Panel Set

(1) Fuel Panel Set

(2) Notes, Caution & Warning

c. Exterior Lights Set

d. Seat Belts

e. Thrust Computer

f. CDUs/EHSIs/Radio Aids

g. AltimetersKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-3 01 OCT 10 h. Annunciator Panels

i. Iridium Phone/Checklist Complete

2. Downwind Checklist

a. Downwind/Touch and Gos

b. Approach Procedures

c. Aircraft Configuration

d. Cleared for Approach

e. FMS/CDUs

f. VOR/ADF/RMI Selector

g. ‘1000 Feet Above’ Callout

h. Landing Gear Warning

i. Zero Extend Min Man Speed

j. 22/Extend Min Man Speed

k. Localizer Arm

l. Localizer Capture

m. Final Approach Course

n. Final Approach/Checklist Complete

3. Before Landing Checklist

a. Before Landing Checklist

b. Landing Gear Extension

c. Final Flaps/Salmon Bug

d. Landing Gear Down/Four Green

e. Landing Lights/Li ghts/Spoilers

f. Anti-Skid Test

g. Brake Pressure/TemperatureKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C352-SG 1-56-4 01 OCT 10 h. Flaps/Slats

i. Bank Angle Selector/Checklist Complete

j. PF/PNF Duties

k. FE Duties

l. Land/Go Around

m. Uncoupled Approach

n. Manual Approach

o. Non-Precision Approach

p. Circling Approach

q. VFR Approach

r. Landing Gear

4. Summary

III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Landing and Missed Approach Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to discuss the landing procedures, including Landing and Missed Approach. The lesson covers from being lined up on final approach through touchdown and braking.



### II. Duration

- 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Landing and Missed Approach Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures

a. Descent and Landing (1) Before Landing Information (2) Before Landing

CH 3 FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Landing and Missed Approach Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses the landi ng procedures, including Landing and Missed Approach. The lesson cove rs from being lined up on final approach through touchdown and braking. The lesson consists of one segment and a Test. The segment discusses the Flight Engineer procedures in detail, and reviews the Pilot procedures, using the expanded Dash-1 procedures. Your responsibilities are to monitor and backup the Pilots. Appropriate Note s, Cautions and Warnings are discussed. The test evaluates your knowledge of the procedures.

B. Objective

1. Identify Landing and Missed Approach Procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Landing and Missed Approach Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

3. Landing Procedures

a. Glidepath

(1) Glidepath

(2) Stabilized for Landing

(3) Aim Point

b. The Flare

c. Spoilers

d. Thrust Reversers

CH 3 FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(1) Thrust Reversers

(2) Reverser Interlocks

(3) Landing Ground Roll

(4) Maximum Reverse Thrust

(5) 80/60 Knots / Reverse Call

(6) Reverse Thrust Limits

e. Brakes

f. Taxi Speed

4. Missed Approach

a. Missed Approach

b. Initial Procedures

(1) Initial Procedures

(2) Go Around

(3) TOGA/Spoilers

(4) FGS - Go Around

(5) Autothrottles

(6) Climbout

c. Normal Procedures

(1) Obstacle Clearance

(2) Altitude Preselect

(3) Vertical Speed Wheel

(4) Speed Select Knob

(5) Flap Overspeed Protection

(6) Cleanup Speeds

(7) Compliance

CH 3 FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 d. Crew Coordination

5. Summary

III. Exam

FIQ-C361-SG 1-57-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# After Landing Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - This lesson introduces you to the checklists and procedures used after a normal landing.



### II. Duration

- 0.5 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. After Landing Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures

a. After Landing b. Parking-Engine Shutdown

c. Leaving Aircraft

CH 3 FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# After Landing Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to the c hecklists and procedures used after a normal landing. After discussing the fl ow and details of these checklists, there is a practice with minimal prom pts and remediation directing you to the abbreviated checklist.

B. Objectives

1. Identify Afte r Landing Procedures.

2. Perform After Landing Procedures

II. PRESENTATION

A. After Landing Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. After Landing Procedures

1. After Landing Checklist

a. After Landing Checklist

b. IFF/WX Radar

c. Iridium Phone

d. APU

e. HI-INT/Landing Lts

f. Anti-ice

g. Spoilers

h. Flaps/Slats

CH 3 FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

i. Trim

j. Hydraulic System

k. Number 2 Fuel Lever

l. Brake Press/Temperature

m. After Landing Cklst -Complete

2. Parking - Eng Shutdn Cklst

a. Parking Brakes

b. Aux Hydraulic Pump

c. Electrical Power

d. Fuel Levers

e. Exterior Lights

f. Fuel Panel

g. Seat Belts – Parking Checklist Complete

3. Leaving Aircraft Cklst

a. Parking Brakes

b. INUs Accuracy Check – Part 1

c. INUs Accuracy Check – Part 2

d. INUs Accuracy Check – Part 3

e. WX Radar/IFF Mode 4 Codes

f. FMS Radio Master Power

g. Oxygen Regulators

h. Radios

i. GPS Crypto Keys

j. CDU Power Switches

k. Panel Lights

CH 3 FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 l. Emergency Lights

m. Overhead Panel Items

n. Aux Hydraulic Pumps

o. Cabin Cargo Smoke Switch

p. L-BAND SATCOM

q. Iridium Phone

r. APU

s. BAT Switch

t. FMS Data Cartridge

u. Exterior Walk Around

4. Full Stop Taxiback Checklist

a. Full Stop Taxiback Checklist

b. Brake Temperatures

5. Summary

III. Exam

FIQ-C371-SG 1-58-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T305-SG 1-59-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD-305 FE Interior Inspection

I. Purpose

– The purpose of this FTD mission is for continued practice of the FE’s Exterior/Interior In itial Inspection and the FE’s Interior Inspection.



### II. Duration – 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection b. FE’s Interior InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T305-SG 1-59-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures



## Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs.

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 2. FE’s Interior Inspection



## Mission Briefing

1. Briefing: While in the FTD the inst ructor will brief the procedures to be accomplished during this FTD period.

Note: Other normal procedures checklists may be discussed or introduced time permitting.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD-306 Normal Procedures

I. Purpose

– The purpose of this trainer is to allow practice of normal procedures for FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspecti on, FE’s Interior Inspection, starting engines, taxi, takeoff, climb, cruise, descent, approach, landing, after landing, and leaving the aircraft.



### II. Duration – 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Fli ght Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. TOLD Card Provided in FTD C. DoD FLIP (Terminal), High and Low Altitude U.S., Volumes 3 or 21 D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures (Through Climb and Cruise) 2. Section V, Part 2, Operat ing Techniques (Takeoff and Climb) B. Student must have the follo wing CBT lessons completed: 1. Engine Start Procedures 2. Before Takeoff Procedures 3. Takeoff Procedures 4. Climb/Cruise Procedures 5. Descent Procedures 6. Approach Procedures 7. Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 8. After Landing ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 2. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 3. Perform Before Start Procedures 4. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 5. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 6. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 7. Perform Takeoff Duties 8. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 9. Perform Cruise Procedures 10. Perform Descent Procedures 11. Perform Approach Procedures 12. Perform Missed Approach Procedures 13. Perform Downwind Procedures 14. Perform Before Landing Procedures 15. Perform Landing Full Stop (R everse Thrust) Procedures 16. Perform After Landing Procedures 17. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 18. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection 4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-3 01 OCT 10 

## Profile

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 2. FE’s Interior Inspection 3. Cockpit Preparation 4. Before Start 5. Starting Engines 6. Before Taxi 7. Before Takeoff 8. Takeoff 9. After Takeoff/Climb 10. Cruise 11. Descent Checklist 12. Descent 13. Approach Checklist 14. Approach 15. Before Landing Checklist 16. Missed Approach 17. Downwind Checklist 18. Approach 19. Landing 20. After Landing Checklist 21. Parking – Engine Shutdown Checklist 22. Leaving Aircraft ChecklistKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T306-SG 1-60-4 01 OCT 10 

## Mission Briefing

A. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period

1. This is a flight engineer FTD for practicing normal procedures and checklists. Required pilot actions will be accomplished by the instructor.

2. Instructor Briefs:

a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection b. FE’s Interior Inspection c. TOLD Card as Required d. Cockpit Preparation Checklist e. Engine Start Checklist (1) Before Start (2) Starting Engines f. Taxi and Takeoff Procedures g. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise Procedures h. Descent Procedures i. Approach Procedures j. Missed Approach Procedures k. Downwind Procedures l. Landing Procedures m. After Landing ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# FTD Mission 1

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow practice of normal procedures for starting engines, taxi, tak eoff, climb, cruise, enroute descent, approach, landing, after landing, and leaving the aircraft. Student A will be in the left seat for this FTD.



### II. Duration – 3.5 hours A. 1.0 hour pre-brief B. 2.0 hours FTD C. 0.5 hour debrief



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. Briefing Room C. TOLD Card provided in device D. DOD FLIP (Terminal), High and Low Altitude U.S., Volumes 3 or 21 E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 G. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures (Through Climb and Cruise) 2. Section V, Part 2, Operat ing Techniques (Takeoff and Climb) B. Each student must have the following CBT lessons completed: 1. Engine Start Procedures 2. Before Takeoff Procedures 3. Takeoff Procedures 4. Climb/Cruise Procedures 5. Descent Procedures 6. Approach Procedures 7. Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 8. After Landing Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Pilot Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 5. Perform General Navigation 6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 7. Perform Crew Coordination 8. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 9. Perform Fuel Manage ment and Conservation 10. Perform Radar Operation 11. Perform Communications 12. Perform Missed Approa ch (Auto) Procedures 13. Perform Landing 14. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 2. Perform Equipment Operation 3. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 4. Perform Before Start Procedures 5. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 6. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 7. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 8. Perform Left Seat Takeoff 9. Perform Takeoff, Initial 10. Perform Pilot Not Flying (PNF) Takeoff and Climb Duties 11. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 12. Perform Cruise Procedures 13. Perform Descent Procedures 14. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 15. Perform Approach Procedures 16. Perform ILS Coupled Approach Procedures 17. Perform Before Landing Procedures 18. Perform Downwind Procedures 19. Perform After Landing Procedures 20. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 21. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Flight Engineer Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 3. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 4. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 5. Perform General Navigation 6. Perform Crew Coordination 7. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 8. Perform FMS Operation 9. Perform Communications 10. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 2. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 3. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 4. Perform Before Start Procedures 5. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 6. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 7. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 8. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 9. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 10. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 11. Perform Cruise Procedures 12. Perform Descent Procedures 13. Perform Approach Procedures 14. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 15. Perform Missed Approach Procedures 16. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 17. Perform Before Landing Procedures 18. Perform Downwind Procedures 19. Perform After Landing Procedures 20. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 21. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


## Profile

1. Cockpit Preparation 2. Before Start 3. Starting Engines 4. Before Taxi 5. Before Takeoff 6. Takeoff, Initial 7. After Takeoff/Climb 8. Cruise 9. Descent Checklist 10. Enroute Descent 11. Approach Checklist 12. ILS Coupled Approach 13. Before Landing Checklist 14. Auto Missed Approach 15. Downwind Checklist 16. ILS Coupled Approach 17. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 18. After Landing Checklist 19. Parking – Engine Shutdown Checklist 20. Leaving Aircraft Checklist

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Mission Briefing

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructors

2. Specialty Briefing an d Instructional Period

a. This is a FTD for Pilots and Fl ight Engineers. All required crew coordination will be accomplished by the appropriate crewmember.

b. Instructor Briefs:

(1) TOLD Card as Required (2) Cockpit Preparation Checklist (3) Engine Start Checklist

a. Before Start b. Start Engine (4) Taxi and Takeoff Procedures and Techniques (5) After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise Procedures and Techniques (6) Descent Procedures and Techniques (7) Approach Procedures and Techniques (8) Missed Approach Procedures and Techniques (9) Downwind Procedures (10) Landing Procedures and Techniques (11) After Landing Procedures

3. Crew Briefing: Pilot st udent A will accomplish the brie fing. The crew will be briefed IAW Section V of t he Flight Manual. The item s covered will be the normal procedures from cockpit prepar ation to after landing.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T601-SG 1-61-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-1 01 JUL 13 

# Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS)

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to help the student better understand the capabilities and limitati ons of the aircraft and crew re lating to Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS). A Flight Engineer Instructor presents this lesson.



### II. Duration - 4.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. Aeronautical Information Manual, Chapters 1 and 2 B. DOD Flight Information Publicati on, Airport Diagrams - SIDS & STARS C. DOD Flight Information Publication, High Altitude D. DOD Flight Information Publication, Low Altitude



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Classroom Pres entation System B. Dry Erase Board



### V. Student Preparation and Review
A. Read “Crew Duties”, T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Section V, Crew Duties Description B. Complete TERPS Workbook (W853)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-2 01 JUL 13 

## Objectives

1. Locate and identify approach and arrival components and symbols.

2. Locate and identify departure and arriva l procedures using SIDS and STARS.

3. Locate and identify Inst rument Approach Procedures.

4. Locate and identify IAF to FAF Procedures.

5. Locate and identify Fi nal Approach Procedures.

6. Use the RMI and DME to determine aircraft position.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-3 01 JUL 13 

# Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS)

Student Lecture Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Instructor Introduction

B. Purpose Statement

As a Flight Engineer on the KC-10, an essential part of y our job will be to monitor departure, enroute, and approach procedure devia tions from the briefed procedures. The approach plates in this lesson are fo r “Training Use Only” and may not be the most current.

1. Attention

As KC-10 crewmembers, you will spend a lo t of time preparing for events you hope never happen. You practice “worst ca se” scenarios, or “killer items” in the vernacular of our tr ade. When you read media coverage of an aircraft accident or study a National Transporta tion Safety Board’s final report, you can usually see that any crewmember aboard the aircraft could have detected errors and should have been assertive enough to insist on corrective action.

2. Motivation

You will never be required to fly an in strument approach. However, it is important that you be abl e to detect deviations from the briefed procedure and determine if equipment is set correct ly. You must become familiar with the terminology, definitions, and symbols used, and be able to correctly interpret the charts associated with terminal instrument procedures.

While the Pilot will actually fly the approach, it is important that all crewmembers remain alert and aware of events. The majori ty of aircraft accidents are not caused by the failure of an aircraft component or system. Instead, they happen when one or more members of the aircrew are diverted from the situation and unaware of the aircraft position.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-4 01 JUL 13 C. Objectives

At the completion of this lesson, you should be able to:

1. Locate and identify approach pl ate components and symbols.

2. Locate and identify departure and a rrival procedures using SIDS and STARS.

3. Locate and identify Instru ment Approach Procedures.

4. Locate and identify IAF to FAF Procedures.

5. Locate and identify Fina l Approach Procedures.

6. Use the RMI and DME to determine aircraft position.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Approach Books

The Department of Defense, National Geos pacial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) issues approach, and other flight in formation publications, for Hi gh Altitude, Low Altitude, and Standard Instrument De partures (SIDs) and Standard Terminal Arrivals (STARs). Both military and ci vilian airports are included.

In the front of each approach book is a list of general information and abbreviations, a table of contents, an ex planation of approach and landing minima, a meter conversion chart, and legend pages identifying chart symbols us ed for both arrival to and departure from the airport.

1. Low Altitude

Low altitude books are published in 22 vo lumes, usually several states in a volume, depending upon the number of airports in the area. These books are also issued every eight weeks with the effective dat e on the front cover. Approach plates use a 10 or 20-mile plan view circle. A symbol legend is in the front section of the book.

2. High Altitude

The high altitude books are published in three volumes -- one for each geographical region in the United States. The hashed border on the cover easily distinguishes these books. They are issued every eight weeks. The effective date is on the front cover. Approach plates usually contain a 20- mile plan view circle. Symbol legends used in the charts are in the front section of the book.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-5 01 JUL 13 3. Choosing the Approach Volume

The pilot will have chosen the type of approach to fly when planning the mission. It is particularly important that crewmembers use the same approach plates volume, identified by the effective date, and the same page during the briefing. The front cove r of each book shows a map of the geographical area covered.

4. Approach Name

In addition to the airport name and lo cation, the type of approach or departure appears at the top and botto m of each page. Approaches are named for the radio navigational aid or aids providing final approach guidance and the runway to which the final approach course is aligned. When a letter such as A, B, or C fo llows the name of the approach, the approach is designed for circling minimums only.

Where more than one approach using the same final approach guidance is developed to the same runway, each r unway/navigational aid combination will be identified with an alphabetica l suffix beginning at the end of the alphabet; e.g. ILS Z RWY 28L (first procedure), ILS Y RWY 28L (second procedure), ILS X RWY 28L (third procedure) , etc. Suffixes will be used in reverse alphabetical order, beginning with “Z.”

5. Approach Plate Data

The approach plate is divid ed into four main sections -- the plan view, profile view, airport sketch, and a minima sect ion containing approach minimums for each type of aircraft.

Each published approach is designed to take the aircraft from the enroute or feeder station to the initia l approach fix, from there to the final approach fix, and ultimately to a safe landing. Decision height and minimum descent altitude are included.

Because of the complexity and the amount of data presented on these plates, we will continue this presentat ion by breaking down the plates to a manageable size. For clarity, some data contained on the chart may have been ignored or edited.

6. Plan View

The plan view is usually the largest block on the approach plate. It shows the track of the approach as though viewed fr om directly over head and is always oriented to north. The upper most part of the approach plat e also includes a briefing strip with information relevant to that approach.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-6 01 JUL 13 a. Radio Frequencies

Ground control, tower, and other frequencies associated with the airport appear directly below the approach name.

b. Minimum Safe Altitude

The minimum safe altitude, or MSA, appears in a small circle on the approach plate. The MSA guarantees a 1,000-foot clearance of all obstacles within 25 nautic al miles of the navigation facility or NAVAID if so depicted upon which the a pproach is based. Sometimes the circle is divided into sectors or qu adrants, indicating different minimum safe altitudes for direction of approach.

c. Emergency Safe Altitude

High altitude approach plates list an emergency safe altitude at the lower left. The emergency safe al titude provides a 1,000-foot clearance in non-mountainous terra in and 2,000 foot clearance in mountainous terrain wit hin 100 nautical miles from the navigation facility.

d. Obstacles

Points of higher elevation and ob stacles along the approach course are clearly defined.

e. Restrictions, Warnings, and Cautions

Warnings or cautions appear on many approach plates, and are not always labeled “warning” or “caution” . All restricted areas are clearly identified. If a particular navigational aid is required for the approach, it is listed; for example, TA CAN REQUIRED, GROUND RADAR REQUIRED, DME REQUIRED.

f. 10 NM Distance Circle

The solid-line inner circle on the pl an view indicates 10 nautical miles from the terminal NAVAID on low altitude approach plates. Everything within this circle is depicted to scale unless otherwise indicated.

g. 20 NM Distance Circle

The solid-line circle indicates 20 nautical miles on high altitude approach plates, if drawn to scale.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-7 01 JUL 13 h. Enroute Facilities

A dashed outer circle on the plan vi ew is associated with TACAN or VORTAC NAVAIDS, called “enroute facilities”. From each NAVAID, an arrow depicts the terminal routing to the IAF. Each routing is annotated with a minimum enroute al titude, the course, and the distance to the IAF. These ap pear more often on high altitude approach plates, where an enroute descent enables an aircraft to transition from the high altitude on course to the IAF or final approach fix.

i. Feeder Facilities

Feeder facilities, illustrated by an i nner dashed circle, are basically the same as enroute facilities except they are associated with low altitude.

j. Navigation Aids

Each primary navigational aid has condensed coded information in a box near the symbol. An underline under the frequency indicates that no voice is transmitted. Coordinate values are also provided. Let’s briefly review some of the sym bols associated with NAVAIDS.

(1) Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN)

The theoretical and technical prin ciples of operation of TACAN equipment are different from those of VOR; however, the end result, as far as the navigating p ilot is concerned, is the same. TACAN ground equip ment consists of either a fixed or mobile transmitting unit. The airborne unit in conjunction with the ground unit reduces the trans mitted signal to a visual presentation of both azimuth and distance information. TACAN operates in the ultra high frequen cy (UHF) band of frequencies. The system presently has a total of 252 channels available and is identified by two sets of c hannel numbers from 1 to 126, with suffixes ''X'' or ''Y'' for discr imination between the sets.

(2) Very High Frequency Omnirange (VOR)

VORs operate within the 108.0 to 117.95 MHz, or very high frequency (VHF) and have a power output necessary to provide coverage within their assigned operational service volume. The equipment is subject to line-of-sight restriction, and its range varies proportionally to the altitude of the receiving equipment. Most VORs are equipped for voice transmission. VORs without vo ice capability are indicated on enroute and sectional charts by underlining the VOR frequencyKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-8 01 JUL 13 or by the designation "VORW" in the IFR Supplement. Since a large portion of the frequencies available on the VOR control panel may overlap the VHF communication frequency band, you may use the VOR receiver as a VHF communications receiver.

(3) VHF Omni-Directional Ra nge/Tactical Air Navigation (VORTAC).

A VORTAC is a facility cons isting of two components, VOR and TACAN, which provides th ree individual services: VOR azimuth, TACAN azimuth, and TACAN distance (DME) at one site. Although consisting of more than one component, incorporating more than one ope rational frequency, and using more than one antenna system, a VO RTAC is considered to be a unified navigation aid. Bo th components of a VORTAC operate simultaneously and provide the three services at all times.

(4) Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)

In the operation of DME, paired pulses at a specific spacing are sent out from the aircraft and are received at the ground station. The ground station then transmits paired pulses back to the aircraft at the same pulse spacing but on a different frequency. The time required for the round trip of this signal exchange is measured in the airborne DME unit and is translated into distance in nautical miles from the aircraft to the ground station.

(5) Instrument Landing System (ILS)

The ILS is designed to prov ide an approach path for exact alignment and descent of an airc raft on final approach to a runway. The ground equipment consists of two highly directional transmitting systems, and along the approach, three (or fewer) marker beacons. The di rectional transmitters are known as the localizer and glide slope transmitters.

(6) Marker Beacon

Marker beacons serve to identify a particular location in space on the approach to an instrument runway. This is done by means of a 75-MHz transmitter t hat transmits a directional signal to be received by aircraft flying overhead. These markers are generally used in conjunction with en route NAVAIDs and ILS as point designators.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-9 01 JUL 13 (7) Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)

The LDA is of compar able utility and accura cy to a localizer but is not always aligned with the centerline of the runway. TERPS requires the Localizer (LOC) signal alignment within 3 ° of the runway alignment. If t he alignment exceeds 3 ° , the LOC will be identified as an LDA. Once designated as an LDA, the maximum angle of convergence of the final approach course and the extended runway centerline is 30 °. The signal accuracy of the LDA is the same as a LOC, how ever the LDA course alignment will be greater than 3 °, not to exceed 30 °

. Straight-in minima can be published only where alignment conforms to the strai ght-in criteria specifi ed in AFJMAN 11-226 (TERPS). Circling minima are pu blished where this alignment exceeds straight-in criteria. T he LDA is usually considered a non-precision approach; however, in some installations with a glide slope, a decision height wi ll be published. If a decision height is published, it can be flown just like an ILS approach.

(8) Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)

SDF. The SDF provides a final approach course that is similar to that of the ILS localizer and LDA. However, the SDF may have a wider course width of 6° or 12°. It does not provide glide slope information. A clear understanding of the ILS localizer and the additional factors listed below completely describe the operational characteristics and use of the SDF.

(9) Non-Directional Beacon (NDB)

NDB is a low, or medium, or ul tra high frequency radio beacon that transmits nondirectional signals whereby an aircraft properly equipped can automatically determine and display bearing to any radio station withi n its frequency and sensitivity range. These facilities normally operate on frequencies between 190 and 1750 kHz or 275-287 MHz and transmit a continuous carrier keyed to prov ide identification except during voice transmission.

(10) Global Positioning System (GPS)

GPS is a space based navig ation system that has the capability to provide highly a ccurate three-dimensional position, velocity, and time to an infinite number of equipped users anywhere on or near the Ea rth (Figure 6.8). The typical GPS integrated system will provide: position, velocity, time,KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-10 01 JUL 13 altitude, steering information, groundspeed and ground track error, heading, and variation. G PS also provides a constant monitor of system status and accuracy, and the built-in test circuitry provides self-tests t hat diagnose most system failures. The airborne GPS receiver ma y accept inputs from other aircraft systems, such as INS, altimeter, central air data computer (CADC), attitude gy ro, and compass systems that improve GPS accuracy and reliability. GPS may also be integrated into a multi-sensor navigation system combining GPS information with other sour ces such as an Inertial Reference Unit (IRU) or DM E/DME Area Navi gation (RNAV) equipment.

7. Profile View

An observer standing to one side of the airport would see the movement of aircraft as presented in the profile view. This allows you to view the approach in three dimensions by showing the e ffect of altitude c hanges. Situational awareness is maintained by mentally following the aircraft on both the plan view and profile view simultaneously.

a. Altitudes

Four types of altitude entries are used in profile views. These are mandatory, minimum, maximum, and recommended altitudes. These legends appear on the charts legend page in the front of all approach plate books.

b. Transition Level/Transition Altitude

Transition level, label ed TLV, and transition altitude, labeled TA, appear in overseas DoD charts. They usually appear in the profile view of high altitude approach plates, and in t he plan view of SIDS and STARS.

c. QNE/QNH

These indicate when the crew will change the altimeter to normal enroute QNE, 29.92, or Q NH, mean sea level. These are critical items since outside the continental United Stat es transition flight levels vary. Transition level in the Unit ed States is always FL180.

8. Minima Section

The minima section of the approach plate appears in the lower corner opposite the airport sketch. It has se veral lines of information listingKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-11 01 JUL 13 the various types of approaches that may be flown to the airport.

During the pilot’s briefing and the actual approach, all crewmembers should crosscheck the minimums for the procedure and to make sure that altimeter and radio alti meter bugs are set correctly.

a. Aircraft Category

Aircraft approach category is based on 1.3 times the stalling speed in the landing configuration at maxi mum certificated gross landing weight. An aircraft can fly an IAP onl y for its own category or higher, unless otherwise authoriz ed by AF Instruction or MAJCOM directives. If it is necessary to maneuver at sp eeds in excess of the upper limit of a speed range for a category, the minimums for the next higher category should be used. The categories are as follows:

Category A - Speed less than 91 knots. Category B - Speed 91 knots or mo re but less than 121 knots. Category C - Speed 121 knots or more but less than 141 knots. Category D - Speed 141 knots or more but less than 166 knots. Category E - Speed 166 knots or more.

b. KC-10 Minimums

The KC-10 is a Category D aircraft. However, if the instrument final approach is flown at 166 knots or mo re, the Category E minima must be used. This could also apply to the KC-10 during emergency overweight approach and landing, abnormal conf iguration approach and landing, increased approach speed due to wind, or circling approach with 22o/EXT minimum m aneuver speed of 166 knots or

more.

c. Types of Final Approach Guidance

There are numerous different types of final approach guidance that can be categorized in a number of different ways. For the purposes of this chapter, final approach guidance will be categorized as follows:

Non-Radar Approaches. These are approaches that do not require radar vectoring or radar services on final approach. Non-radar approaches can be further subdivid ed among those that provide electronic glide path guidance and t hose that do not provide electronic glide path guidance.

Radar Approaches. These are appr oaches that require radar vectoring on final approach. Ther e are two types PAR and ASR.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-12 01 JUL 13 Procedures with a Visual Component. Sometimes it is not possible to construct an instrument procedure that meets all requirements. Incorporating a visual component in to an instrument procedure is an acceptable alternative. There are four types of approaches that fall into this category: visual appr oach, contact approach, IAP with a visual segment, and a charted visual flight procedure.

Other Specialized Procedures. Thes e are specialized subsets of particular approach types listed abov e. There are four approaches that fall into this category: c onverging approaches, ILS/PRM, SOIA, and TLS. All require specialized tr aining and crew qualifications except converging approaches.

(1) Circling Approach

Circling to land is a visual flight maneuver. When the instrument approach is completed, it is used to align the aircraft with the landing runway. Each landing situation is different because of the variables of ceiling visibility, wind direction and velocity, obstructions, final appr oach course alignment, aircraft performance, cockpit visibility, and controller instructions. The circling MDA and weather minima to be used are those for the runway to which the instrument approach is flown (this is not always the landing runway). The circling minima listed on IAPs apply to nonradar nonprecis ion approaches (LOC, VOR, TACAN, etc.). Circling procedur es and techniques are not compatible with prec ision approach criteria, and under normal circumstances, should not be a ttempted. Since the pilot in terms of a DH and not a specific point along the final approach course determines the MAP associated with the precision approach, it becomes difficult to ascertain when to discontinue the approach if visual condit ions are not encountered. Therefore, pilots should not plan to circle from a precision approach.

d. Approach Minimums

(1) Decision Height (DH)

Decision height applies only to precision approaches – Instrument Landing System (I LS) and Precision Approach Radar (PAR). It is the mini mum height above Mean Sea Level (MSL) where a missed approach is initiated if visual reference to the runway has not been establis hed or the aircraft is not in position for a normal landing.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-13 01 JUL 13 (2) RNAV/GPS Decision Altitude (DA)

DA replaces the term Decision He ight (DH) as a step towards harmonization with ICAO termi nology. The published descent profile is flown to the DA, where a missed approach will be initiated if visual references for landing are not established. Obstacle clearance criteria a ccounts for a momentary descent below DA while transitioning to the missed approach.

(3) Runway Visual Range (RVR)

The runway visibility range is the distance a pilot should see down the runway measured in hundreds of feet. RVR is a horizontal measure used to determine field conditions for straight-in approaches.

(4) Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)

Minimum descent altitudes ar e associated with non-precision straight-in, or circling approac hes -- LOC, ASR, TAC, VOR, and NDB. Descent will not cont inue below this height unless visual reference has been established with the runway and the aircraft is in position for a normal landing.

(5) Height Above Touchdown (HAT)

Height above touchdown , or HAT, is the height of the DH or MDA above ground level or the highes t runway elevation in the touchdown zone, in feet. HAT is published as part of all straight-in approach minima.

(6) Height Above Airport (HAA)

Height above airport is published for all circling approaches, in feet. This is the height of t he MDA above the published airport elevation.

(7) Ceilings

The published ceiling, in parenthes es on the approach plate, is feet above the published airport elevation. It can be equal to or greater than the height of t he associated decision height or minimum descent altitude

.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-14 01 JUL 13 9. Airport Sketch

The airport sketch of the approach plat e shows the airport layout, runway dimensions, obstacles, elevati ons, and approach lighting systems.

a. Elevation

Field elevation appears in the upper left corner of the airport sketch block. This is the highest point on the usable landing surface. TDZE, or touchdown zone elevation is al so shown on the sketch as well as the heights of all obstacles, including the tower.

b. Runway Information

Length and width of the runway ar e printed alongside each runway depicted. If the runway is not leve l and the gradient is 0.3% or above, the percent of slope also appears alongside the runway.

c. Timing Information

If timing information is associated wit h the approach (t o establish the missed approach point, for example), a timing chart will appear below the airport sketch or be low the profile view.

d. Runway Light Systems

Types of airport lighting with position identification are provided in the airport sketch. These include:

(1) REIL - Runway End Identifier Lights

REILS are installed at many airfields to provide rapid and positive identificatio n of the approach end of a particular runway. Two synchronized flas hing lights, one on each side of the runway threshold facing th e approach area i dentify the end of the runway.

(2) HIRL/MIRL/LIRL - High, Medium, and Low Intensity Runway Edge Light Systems

These are elevated bi-directional lights classified according to intensity, which extend the leng th of the runway. Runway edge lights are white. On instrument runways, yellow replaces white on the last 2000 feet or half the runway length, whichever is less, to form a caution zone for landings. Lights at the ends of the runway emit green outward from the runway end and red inward from the runway end.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-15 01 JUL 13 (3) TDZ - Touchdown Zone Lighting

Two rows of high intensity light bars, arranged on both sides of the runway centerline, extend from the threshold of the runway 3000 feet inward.

(4) CL - Centerline Lighting

A straight line of lights locate d along the runway centerline. These lights display alternate red and white in the 3000 to 1000 foot section of the runway. T he last 1000 feet displays all red lights.

e. Approach Light Systems

Approach lights are the basic means to transition from instrument flight to visual flight for a landi ng. Symbols for approach lights are located near the approach end of each runway and are circled.

(1) Approach Light Systems - ALS

Operational require ments at the airport dictate the sophistication and conf iguration of the li ghting system for a particular runway. Configurations discussed in this lesson are identified as ALSF-1 (A-1), ALSF-2 (A), MALS/SSAL (A-4), and MALSR (A-5). On the approach plate airport sketch, the circled letter “A” with a number indicates the particular format or the system in use.

(a) ALSF-1 (A-1)

Different formats have different light configurations. For example, A-1 starts 2400 to 3000 feet from the beginning of the runway, wit h high intensity white bar lights along the runway and sequenced flashing lights along the centerline. Red bar lights appear toward the end of the runway with a solid line of green lights at the end.

(b) ALSF-2 (A)

A-2 is similar to A-1 but has more red and green lights in the last 1000 feet.

(c) MALS/SSALS (A-4)

A-4 uses medium intensity lights and is associated withKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-16 01 JUL 13 shorter runways.

(d) MALSR (A-5)

A-5 lighting systems have a se ries of flashing lights leading to the runway center line followed by a series of horizontal steady lights up to the runway threshold.

(2) PAPI – Precision Approach Path Indicator (PAPI)

A circled “P” indicates a PAPI, or precision approach path indicator. The PAPI is a system of four lights arranged horizontally to provide visual descent guidance information during the approach. The lights illuminate either red or white depending on aircraft being position on the glide path (high or low). When the two left lights white, and the two right lights red, indicates the aircraft is on the desired approach path.

(3) VASI - Visual Approach Slope Indicator

A circled “V” indicates a VASI, or visual approach slope indicator. The VASI is a system of lights arranged in bars to provide visual descent guidance information during the approach. They are visible 3 to 5 miles during the day and up to 20 miles or more at night.

V-3 is associated with heavy airc raft and indicates a threshold crossing height to accommodate l ong-bodied or jumbo aircraft.

10. Lesson Exercise 1A (Plan View)

a. What Navigation Station is the basis for the IAF?

b. The MSA of 5200 feet is based on what Navigational Aid?

c. What is the UHF Frequency for the Tower?

d. Where do you hold after a missed approach to runway 21L?

11. Lesson Exercise 1B (Profile View and Sketch)

a. How many Precision Approaches are listed on this approach plate?

b. What do the altitudes 2500 and 1800 with a solid li ne under the number indicate?KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-17 01 JUL 13 c. What is the altitude at the IAF?

d. What Category is the KC-10 Aircraft?

e. What type of lighting system is available for RWY 21L?

f. What RVR is required for the ILS to RWY 21L?

B. PROCEDURES

Departure and Terminal Arrival Instrument Approaches IAF to FAF Final Approach Missed Approach RMI/DME Navigation

1. Departure and Terminal Arrival

Standard instrument departures (SIDs) and standard terminal arrivals (STARs) are published in three volume s -- Western, Central, and Eastern United States -- every ei ght weeks, although some SIDs may be included with the regular approach plates.

These books are similar to the appr oach plate volumes in general layout. Each contains legend pages and a table of contents. IFR takeoff minimums and departure procedures are listed separ ately for easy reference. The back cover contains a table fo r ground speed, climb or descent angle, and climb or descent gradient in feet per nautical mile.

a. Standard Instrument Departure (SID)

Standard instrument departures (SIDs) are located in the approach plate books on separate pages. A SI D routing page contains a great deal of information including notice of any special equipment required.

This page is similar to the approach plan view in that the SID and airport are identified at the top and bottom of the page. It also contains a block of required frequencies.

(1) Obstacles

When using a SID plate, you must refer to the airport plan view for runway definition and obstacles that may not be apparent on the SID.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-18 01 JUL 13 (2) Ground Speed/ Required Climb Rate

Ground speed and the required clim b rate for each runway used for the SID are shown in a table on the SID plate when published in the approach plate b ook. Otherwise, refer to the table in the back cover.

(3) Transitions

Transition waypoints for the SI D are clearly defined, with the routing for each. Be sure that these waypoints are included in the flight plan.

(4) Cautions and Warnings

To ensure a safe departure, note any cautions or warnings that may be on this page.

b. Departure Route

(1) Departure Routing Description

In addition to the graphic illustra tion of transitions and routings for the SID, the plate also cont ains a text descr iption of the departure route. Each runway to be used and each transition is described in detail.

(2) Trouble T

On US Government charts, t he symbol of a white “T” on a black inverted triangle, or the “Trouble T,” meaning trouble for departing aircraft. The presence of the “Trouble T” indicates you need to consult the separate listing in the front of the approach plated titled “IFR Tak eoff Minimums and (Obstacle) Departure Procedures.”

c. Special Departure Procedures (SDP)

The Air Force Flight Standards Ag ency (AFFSA) has contracted with Jeppesen to provide safe engine out departure procedures for bases used by the KC-10 providing the maxi mum takeoff weight possible, and miss any obstacles should an engine fail during takeoff. SDP information is found at “http://www.jeppesen.com/wlcs/index.jsp” on the internet.

Jeppesen analyzes terrain and obstacle data against aircraft specific performance data to determine th e best engine out departure andKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-19 01 JUL 13 takeoff weight for each runway at a given location. The login user name for the website is “usafsdp” and the password is “aircrews”, all in lower case. Be sure to check wit h your instructor and/or squadron s the login and passwords are changed occasionally. Once logged into the website, click on OPS DATA which will take you to the SORT and aircraft selection menus.

A User Guide can be viewed or downloaded on the website directly below the airport drop down menu. Only bases that have approved procedures are listed on the Jeppesen w ebsite. This website should be checked during mission planning. If an approved procedure is available, it must be briefed and used if an engine failure occurs on takeoff. TOLD and/or SDP departu re plate information can be found on the website. The data has b een approved by the Air Force for TOLD computations.

d. SDP planning data sheet.

Each base that has an approved SDP will have TOLD data that has been approved by AMC. This is an example of the information available. If there is a “T” behind t he runway number, there is a turn procedure included for that runway. Some bases will have turns and others will not. The currency of the sheet is located in the upper left corner of the sheet. Also found in the top section is ACFT and system information.

e. Engine Failure Departure Procedure Plate.

The departure plate provides specif ic runway turn information that must be used and briefed should an engine fail. Not all bases have turn procedures.

f. Special Engine Failure Procedure.

Another type of SDP procedure is the “Special Engine Failure Procedure” plate. You may see this instead of the departure plate seen on the previous slide.

2. Terminal Arrival

a. Feeder Facility Routing As mentioned earlier, enroute and feeder facilities are identified on approach plates. These are designed to take the airc raft from the enroute structure to the in itial approach fix, or to some point dictated by operational requirements.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-20 01 JUL 13 (1) Radial/Distance from NAVAID

The fix or point is sometimes identified by the radial and distance from a specific NAVAI D. In the case of feeder facilities, the point-to-point has been computed for the pilot so that by simply proceeding alon g the radial for the specified distance, the aircraft will arrive over the desired fix or point.

(2) Monitoring the Course

When the aircraft is establishe d on a feeder course, you can use the RMI and DME to monitor aircraft position. Remember, the tail of the bear ing pointer is the aircraft position from the NAVAID. When you read the number under the tail of the bearing pointer, you are reading the present radial from the facility. If the aircraft is established on course outbound from the station, this radial should be very nearly the same as the aircraft heading.

b. Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR)

Published standard terminal arrivals (STARs) provide transition from an enroute NAVAID to an out er fix, initial appr oach fix, and arrival waypoint in the terminal area. The page layout is similar to that of a SID. A STAR is usually named for the initial fix or NAVAID.

(1) Transition Points

Transition points along the rout e are Waypoints, Geographical Locations or Lat/Long Coordinates.

(2) Routing

Routing, altitude and distance are defined for the course. Course, Radial, Altitude and DME are provided.

3. Lesson Exercise 2A

a. What is the height of the controlling obstacle for this departure using RW 19?

b. Radial R226 will intercept SMY RNA. What is the course to track?

c. What is the distance from PENSY to LARRI?KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-21 01 JUL 13 4. Lesson Exercise 2B

a. How much of a delay would y ou expect if the radar is inoperative?

b. What radial would you track to fly the inbound course to the McGuire VORTAC?

c. During a missed approach, at what DME from GXU would you turn left to CYN to hold?

5. Lesson Exercise 2C

a. What is the distance from t he Seattle VORTAC to AAIRE?

b. The NAVAID VICTORIA symbol is a VOR with a square box around it. What does the box signify?

c. All the NAVAIDS on this plate have a solid line beneath the station frequency. TCM, fr equency 109.6 is not underlined. What does this indicate?

C. Instrument Approaches

Initial Approach High Penetrations Procedure Turns Holding Pattern in Lieu of Procedure Turns Procedure Tracks

1. Initial Approach

As you approach your destination, the p ilot will choose the type of approach desired for the transition fr om the high altitude envir onment to the terminal environment. This should be accomplished well in advance of the descent so that all attention can be focused on accomplishing a safe approach and landing.

a. A Radar Approach may consist of monitoring and radar vectors to the final approach and landing.

b. If Radar is not available, t he pilot can fly the complete published approach without further directions from ATC.

c. If Radar is required, there will be a bold “RADAR REQUIRED” on the PLAN VIEW.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-22 01 JUL 13 2. High Penetration

Contained within the High Altitude series of approach plates, the penetration enables the aircraft to transition from the high altitude structure to the terminal area. It places the aircraft to a position that will align it with the inbound course to the Final Approach Fix (FAF).

These approaches can employ radials, arcs, courses, procedure turns and fly-off restrictions.

Special restrictions, cautions or warni ngs are usually provided in plain text within the plan view.

Minimum, mandatory and recommended alti tudes, along with the DME from the station, are provided in the profile view.

3. Procedure Turn

If a procedure turn is required, it will be depicted as a h eavy black line with a bend and a single barb. The barb indicate s the maneuvering side of the final approach course.

4. Holding Pattern in Lieu of Procedure Turn

At times, the facility may depict a holding pattern that will descend the aircraft, allow time to configure for l anding, and align the aircraft with the final approach course.

These patterns are depicted on the plan view. They are similar to the standard holding pattern except they are usually longer and ar e depicted by a heavy black line. Both radial and cour se are provided along with the DME.

5. Procedure Track

Like the penetration, the Procedure Track is used to place the aircraft at a position to intercept the final approach c ourse prior to the final approach fix.

Procedure Tracks are depicted as a heavy black line with directional arrows. It may use a combination of ar cs, radials or courses. Again, the purpose is to align the aircraft with the final approach course.

To fly an arc, the pilot will place the station on the wing tip and maintain a constant DME until crossing a radial or NAVAID.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-23 01 JUL 13 6. Lesson Exercise 3

a. Illustration A: From top to bottom, what type of tracks are depicted?

b. Illustration B: From top to bottom, what type of holding patterns are depicted?

c. Illustration C: What does the heavy black line with a singlebarb indicate?

D. IAF to Final Approach Fix

1. Initial Approach Fix

Using one or more of the procedures discussed in the previous segment, the aircraft will have arrived at a geographica l location that is depicted on the plan view as the Initial Approach Fix or IAF.

The IAF may be a NAVAID or merely a point in space on a radial at a specified DME. The purpose of the IAF is to place the aircraft in a position to intercept the final approach fix in a manner that will permit a successful landing or missed approach, if conditions warrant.

If traffic is very light, the controller will sometimes provide radar vectors to intercept the final approach course out side the FAF where the aircraft can proceed to a landing. However, if the pilot is cleared for a specific published approach, the approach must be flown as published in order to guarantee cleared airspace

2. Descent Procedures

During the approach briefing, the pilot w ill state the alti tude at which the aircraft will depart the IAF for the FAF.

The briefing should include any rest rictions or unusual aspects of the approach. It is important to remember t hat as the aircraft proceeds along the final approach course, it will be descending below the Minimum Safe Altitude for the area. Failure to observe the altitude restrictions, whether Mandatory, Minimum, Maximum, or Recommended wi ll negate the guaranteed terrain clearance.

Usually, the altitude of the initial appr oach fix will be a “minimum” altitude, but occasionally it will be a “har d” or mandatory altitude.

From the IAF to the FAF and on to landing, the approach becomes moreKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-24 01 JUL 13 critical. The majority of Class A acci dents happen during this phase of flight. Each crewmember must be in the loop. Any one person on the flight deck could have prevented the accident in Bosnia. They simply were not flying the approach as published, nor could they hav e with the equipment available on the aircraft.

a. Where is the IAF located for this approach? What is the Minimum Sector Altitude at the IAF?

b. At what point and altitude would you expect a right turn to intercept the localizer?

c. Where is the holding pattern for the missed approach located?

E. Final Approach

Radar Approach Non-Radar Approach Procedures with a Vi sual Component Other Specialized Procedures

1. Radar Approach

These are approaches that require radar vectoring on final approach. There are two types PAR and ASR.

2. Non-Radar Approach

These are approaches that do not require radar vectoring or radar services on final approach. Non-radar approac hes can be further subdivided among those that provide electronic glid e path guidance and those that do not provide electronic glide path guidance. Most runways provide a VASI system that is coincident with the VDP. The MAP will always be after the VDP. However if the VDP is missed, the chances of acquiring the runway for a successful landing is doubtful.

3. Procedures with a Visual Component

Sometimes it is not possible to constr uct an instrument procedure that meets all requirements. Incor porating a visual component into an instrument procedure is an acceptable alternative. There are four types of approaches that fall into this category: visual approach, contact ap proach, IAP with a visual segment, and a chart ed visual flight procedure.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-25 01 JUL 13 4. Other Specialized Procedures

These are specialized subsets of par ticular approach types listed above. There are four approaches that fall into this category: converging approaches, ILS/PRM, SOIA, and TLS. All require specialized training and crew qualifications except converging approaches.

E-FRAME 68: PRECISION APPROACH

5. Precision Approach

The precision approach provides the pilo t with precise course, glideslope, and range information Precision approach da ta, Instrument Landing System (ILS) or Precision Approac h Radar (PAR) on the approa ch plate, provides a vertical flight path where the navigation facility is precisely aligned with the runway centerline. Ground equipment consists of two highly directional transmitting system and marker beacons along the approach.

The directional transmitters are know n as the localizer and glide slope transmitters. These signals are displayed on the aircraft control panel.

6. Non-Precision Approach

The non-precision approach entry (LOC or TAC, for example) provides course and range data only. A glideslope is not used.

7. RNAV/GPS Approach

Another non-precision appr oach is the RNAV (GPS) appr oach. GPS is a US satellite-based radio navi gational positioning and time transfer system operated by the Department of Defense (D OD). The system provides highly accurate position and voice information and precise time on a continuous global basis to an unlimited number of properly equipped users. The system is unaffected by weather and provides a worldwide common grid reference system based on earth-fixed coordinate system. For its Earth Model, GPS uses the World Geodetic System of 1984 (WGS-84).

8. Circling Approach

Circling to land is a visual flight m aneuver. When the instrument approach is completed, it is used to align the aircraft with the landing runway. Each landing situation is different because of the variables of ceil ing visibility, wind direction and velocity, obstructions, final approach course alignment, aircraft performance, cockpit visibility, and cont roller instructions. The circling MDA and weather minima to be used are those for the runway to which the instrument approach is flown (this is not always the landing runway). The circling minima listed on IAPs appl y to nonradar nonprecision approaches (LOC, VOR, TACAN, etc.). Circlin g procedures and techniques are notKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-26 01 JUL 13 compatible with precision approach crit eria, and under normal circumstances, should not be attempted. Since the pilot in terms of a DH and not a specific point along the final approach course determines the MAP associated with the precision approach, it becomes difficu lt to ascertain wh en to discontinue the approach if visual conditions are not encountered. Therefore, pilots should not plan to circle from a precision approach.

9. Missed Approach

The missed approach point for a nonprecisio n straight-in approach is located along the final approach course and no fa rther from the FA F than the runway threshold (or over an on-airport navigation facility for a no-FAF procedure and some selected FAF procedures). The missed approach point for any precision approach is the poi nt at which the decision height is reached. This is normally the point depicted on the I AP as the start of a climbing dashed line. When the missed approach is initia ted prior to the MAP, proceed to the MAP along the final appr oach course and then via the route and altitudes specified in the published missed approa ch departure instruction. The missed approach must be initiated no later than the missed approach point (MAP) or you may be below the missed approach obstacle clearance surface or outside the missed approach obstacle clearance area.

10. Lesson Exercise 5

a. What type of approach is the S-ILS 15?

b. What are the DH, RVR and HAT?

c. What is the glide slope intercept altitude?

d. What type of approach is the S-LOC 15?

e. What are the ILS ceiling and visi bility requirements for the KC-10?

f. What are the minimums for a circling approach?

g. During a missed approach, what altitude would the pilot climb to?

F. RMI/DME Navigation

1. Radio Magnetic Indicator

You listen to the approach briefing, make sure that everything is set as required by the approach, but how do y ou monitor the approach if you don’t know where you are in relation to the NAVAID? Answer: You Can’t!KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-27 01 JUL 13 Use of the RMI/DME information is an acquired skill learned through exposure and repeated practice.

We’ll consider the bearing pointer to have three segments: The Head, The Pivot, and The Tail. The KC-10 has tw o bearing pointers; however, for our discussion, one has been removed for clarity.

a. Upper/Lower Lubber Line

Draw a vertical mental line through the center of the RMI from top to bottom. This is called the LUBBER LI NE. It is further divided into the UPPER and LOWER LUBBER LINES.

The aircraft heading is always read fr om the index at the top of the UPPER LUBBER LINE. The NAVAID, a TACAN, VOR, or NDB will always be represented by the pivot of the bearing pointer. The tail of the pointer will always represent the aircraft’s position. The head of the pointer repres ents the direction TO the station.

b. RMI Situational Awareness

The aircraft’s relative position from the station is always represented on the tail of the poi nter. However, the directi on the aircraft is flying is always parallel to the UPPER LUBBER LINE. Put a different way, the position of the head of t he pointer, relative to the LUBBER LINE (left or right) tells you which way to turn to fly directly to the station. If the head of the pointer was already u nder the UPPER LU BBER LINE (or pointing straight up), no turn would be necessary since the station would be directly in front of the aircraft.

Note that no mention has yet been made of compass heading. It is possible for a pilot to fly directly po int to point to a station using only the bearing pointer. The aircraft w ould be maneuvered to keep the head of the pointer under t he UPPER LUBBER LINE.

2. RMI/DME

Now, we add the compass card. Us ing this, along with the DME, it is possible to determine the general positi on of the aircraft relative to the approach NAVAID.

Assume you are flying a radar vect or of 360 degrees (0 on the compass card) as depicted by the graphic on screen.

Remember that the pivot of the bearing pointer represents the TACAN Station. The tail is the aircraft and the head is the direction you would haveKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-28 01 JUL 13 to fly to go TO the station.

The tail of the TACAN bearing pointer is on 270. Therefore your position is on the 270 degree radial due west of the TA CAN. Adding DME to the picture you know the aircraft is 10 NM from the station on the 270-degree radial.

3. RMI Over Plan View

If you mentally superimpose the RMI over the plan view of the approach plate, you can determine is the ai rcraft is positioned as briefed.

As the aircraft moves on the nort hbound heading, the tail of the bearing pointer will follow its move ment and the bearing pointe r will pivot accordingly (i.e., the aircraft drags the tail of the bearing pointer as it flies).

4. Radial vs. Course

A radial is a magnetic bear ing extending from a navigat ion station. You will recall that we used the pivot of the bear ing pointer as the Selected NAVAID Facility. When we use this procedur e to determine the aircraft position relative to the station, the compass ca rd of the RMI is a representation of these radials or magnetic bearing from the NAVAID.

Since we used the tail of the bearing pointer to determine our position in relation to the station, we can say that the tail of the bearing pointer tells us which radial the aircraft is on.

When selecting a desired course to be flown, you must first determine if the course will take the airplane TO or FROM the selected NAVAID.

a. Away from Station

If the direction of flight (heading) is to be away FROM the station, the NAVAID radial will be the same va lue as the NAVAID course. Note that the aircraft is heading 0 degrees (North). The tail of the bearing pointer is also on 0 degrees, the aircraft heading. The Head of the bearing pointer is on 180 on the RMI compass card

The aircraft is flying away FROM the station. The course is the same as the radial.

b. Toward The Station

Now the aircraft is heading 0, or D ue North. The head of the bearing pointer is also on 0 on the RMI compass card. The tail of the pointer is on 180. The aircraft is flying TO the station. When an aircraft is heading to the station, it s inbound course is said to be the reciprocal of the radial it’s on. In our example, although we are on the 180-KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-29 01 JUL 13 degree radial, the inbound course to t he station is 0 (the reciprocal of the 180-degree radial).

Adding or subtracting 180 from the radial that the aircraft is inbound on will result in the aircraft’s course . Through the proper interpretation of radials, and the inbound and outbound courses, you can keep your situational awareness in rela tion to an approach procedure.

5. Lesson Exercise 6

a. Using the on-screen pres entation, list the radial and relative aircraft position in relation to the station.



### III. SUMMARY/REVIEW

A. You have:

1. Located and identified approach plate components and symbols.

2. Located and identified departure and a rrival procedures using SIDS and STARS.

3. Located and identified Instru ment Approach Procedures.

4. Located and identified IA F to FAF Procedures.

5. Located and identified Final Approach Procedures.

6. Used the RMI and DME to determine aircraft position.

B. Conclusion

KC-10 crewmembers spend a lot of ti me preparing for events we never expect to happen. We practice “worst ca se” scenarios, or “killer items” in the vernacular of our trade. When media coverage is read of an aircraft accident or study a National Transpor tation Safety Board’s final report, usually, a crewmember aboard the aircraft could have detected errors and should have been assertive enough to insist on corrective action.

You will never be required to fly an in strument approach. However, it is important to be able to detect deviat ions from the brie fed procedure and determine if equipment is set correctly. Become familiar with the terminology, definitions, and symbols used, and be able to correctly interpret the charts associated with terminal instrument procedures.

It is important that all crewmembers remain alert and aware of events. The majority of aircraft accidents are not caused by the failure of an aircraft component or system. Instead, they happen when one or moreKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 members of the aircrew are diverted from the situation and unaware of the aircraft position.

FIQ-E852-SG 1-62-30 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# FTD Mission 2

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow practice of normal procedures for starting engines, taxi, tak eoff, climb, cruise, enroute descent, approach, landing, after landing, and leaving the aircraft. Student B will be in the left seat for this FTD.



### II. Duration – 3.5 hours A. 1.0 hour pre-brief B. 2.0 hours FTD C. 0.5 hour debrief



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. Briefing Room C. TOLD Card provided in device D. DOD FLIP (Terminal), High and Low Altitude U.S., Volumes 3 or 21 E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 G. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures (Through Climb and Cruise) 2. Section V, Part 2, Operat ing Techniques (Takeoff and Climb) B. Each student must have the following CBT lessons completed: 1. Engine Start Procedures 2. Before Takeoff Procedures 3. Takeoff Procedures 4. Climb/Cruise Procedures 5. Descent Procedures 6. Approach Procedures 7. Landing/Missed Approach Procedures 8. After Landing Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Pilot Objectives

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 5. Perform General Navigation 6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 7. Perform Crew Coordination 8. Demonstrate Performance Knowledge and Use 9. Perform Fuel Manage ment and Conservation 10. Perform Radar Operation 11. Perform Communications 12. Perform Missed Approa ch (Auto) Procedures 13. Perform Landing 14. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 15. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 16. Perform Equipment Operation 17. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 18. Perform Before Start Procedures 19. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 20. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 21. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 22. Perform Left Seat Takeoff 23. Perform Takeoff, Initial 24. Perform Pilot Not Flying (PNF) Takeoff and Climb Duties 25. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 26. Perform Cruise Procedures 27. Perform Descent Procedures 28. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 29. Perform Approach Procedures 30. Perform ILS Coupled Approach Procedures 31. Perform Before Landing Procedures 32. Perform Downwind Procedures 33. Perform After Landing Procedures 34. Perform Parking - Engi ne Shutdown Procedures 35. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Flight Engineer Objectives

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge and Use 3. Perform General Navigation 4. Perform Crew Coordination 5. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 6. Perform FMS Operation 7. Perform Communications 8. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 9. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 10. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 11. Perform Equipment Operation 12. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 13. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 14. Perform Before Start Procedures 15. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 16. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 17. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 18. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 19. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 20. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 21. Perform Cruise Procedures 22. Perform Descent Procedures 23. Perform Approach Procedures 24. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 25. Perform Before Landing Procedures 26. Perform Downwind Procedures 27. Perform After Landing Procedures 28. Perform Parking - Engi ne Shutdown Procedures 29. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 30. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 31. Perform Missed Approach Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


## Profile

1. Cockpit Preparation 2. Before Start 3. Starting Engines 4. Before Taxi 5. Before Takeoff 6. Takeoff, Initial 7. After Takeoff/Climb 8. Cruise 9. Descent Checklist 10. Enroute Descent 11. Approach Checklist 12. ILS Coupled Approach 13. Before Landing Checklist 14. Auto Missed Approach 15. Downwind Checklist 16. ILS Coupled Approach 17. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 18. After Landing Checklist 19. Parking – Engine Shutdown Checklist 20. Leaving Aircraft Checklist

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Mission Briefing

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructors

2. Specialty Briefing an d Instructional Period

a. This is an FTD for Pilots and Flight Engineers. All required crew coordination will be accomplished by the appropriate crewmember.

b. Instructor Briefs:

(1) TOLD Card as required (2) Cockpit Preparation Checklist (3) Engine Start Checklist

a. Before Start b. Start Engine (4) Taxi and Takeoff Procedures and Techniques (5) After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise Procedures and Techniques (6) Descent Procedures and Techniques (7) Approach Procedures and Techniques (8) Missed Approach Procedures and Techniques (9) Downwind Procedures (10) Landing Procedures and Techniques (11) After Landing Procedures

3. Crew Briefing: Pilot st udent B will accomplish the brie fing. The crew will be briefed IAW Section V of t he Flight Manual. The item s covered will be the normal procedures from cockpit prepar ation to after landing.

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T602-SG 1-63-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-1 01 JUL 13 

# Performance Workshop V (Climb/Cruise/Holding/Air Refueling/Descent) 

# Flight Planning Workshop (Computerized/Manual)

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to practice computing Inflight Data and verify the fuel calculations of a computer flight plan. You should have comp leted the assigned workbooks prior to attending this workshop peri od. Climb, Cruise, Holdi ng, Air Refueling, and Descent Performance Data along with com puterized flight planning exercises are covered in this lesson. The less on will be presented in three segments. Segment One is the Performance Wor kshop, Segment Two is Computerized Flight Planning Workshop, and Segment Thr ee is the Flight Engineer Worksheet (AF IMT 4091). Segments One and Two are divided into two parts. Part One describes the topics to be covered by the workshop exerci ses, and Part Two consists of the workshop exercises to be completed and their solutions. Segment Three explains blocks on t he Flight Engineer Worksheet. The instructor will present the workshop exercises for you to complete, and give the appropriate guidance when your questions arise. Once again, this is intended to be a workshop, and not simply a lecture.



### II. Duration

– 3.5 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Performance Manual C. Introduction to KC-10 Performance Workbook D. Exercise Text E. AFI 11-2KC-10V3



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A1-1 C. Computerized Flight Plan Sample Mission D. KC-10 Flight Plan and Fuel Log AF IMT 4090 E. KC-10 Mission Data Worksheet AF IMT 4091 F. DOD Information Publication – AR-621 Information PageKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-2 01 JUL 13 

### V. Student Preparation/Review A. Prior to this lesson the student should have completed the following workbooks. 1. Climb, Cruise, and Holding Data 2. KC-10 Air Refueling Performance 3. Descent, Approach and Landing Data 4. Flight Plan Mission Forms B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 Review 1. Section IV - Climb 2. Section V - Cruise 3. Section VI - Holding 4. Section VII - Air Refueling 5. Section VIII - Descent C. Review AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapters 6, 8, 12, 14 D. Read accompanying exercise text 

## Objectives

1. Using the KC-10 Flight Manuals: Compute Climb, Cruise , Holding, Air Refueling, and Decent Performance Data.

2. Verify computer flight plan fuel burn using the KC-10 Performance Manual and the standard fuel planning values in AFI 11-2KC10V3, Chapter 14.

3. Given a Mission Data AF IMT 4091 comp lete the form using AFI 11- 2KC10V3, Chapters 12 & 14.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-3 01 JUL 13 

## Segment One – Part I

Climb

The climb charts provide information necessa ry for planning aircraft climb performance. For three engine climbs, you can use either ma ximum climb thrust, or perform a derated climb using maximum cruise thrust. Tw o engine climbs will be performed at maximum continuous thrust. A derated climb allows y ou to operate the engines at a lower thrust setting, but requires more time in the climb, thus requiring more fuel (This is not used). N 1 Setting charts are provided to calculate t he climb power setting at the beginning of Section IV in the performance manual.

After calculating the climb power setting, t he time, distance, and fuel required to climb are calculated from the respecti ve charts. Just like the N 1 Setting charts, Time to Climb, Distance to Climb, and Fuel to Climb charts are provided for three engine climb thrust, derated, and two engine climbs. Procedures for using all charts are the same. Remember from the workbook that you enter the chart wit h the starting gross weight, move up to the start of climb altitude, and t hen parallel the fuel bur n lines to the end of climb altitude. Don’t forget to note t he beginning climb values before following the guidelines up to the end of climb altitude. After extracting necessary data from the charts, do the math (i.e. starting altitude va lues vs. ending altitude values) to determine time, fuel and distance to climb.

Climb time, distance, and fuel c an also be computed from the tab data charts provided. However, since these charts are based on a standard day and no winds, they require extensive interpolation to compute accurate data. This is their primary disadvantage.

Charts are provided to compute three-engi ne and two-engine service ceilings. For any configuration other than clean, enter the chart wit h the aircraft's drag index (obtained from Figure 1-14, Drag Index Table or Table 14.1 AFI 11-2K C-10V3) to determine the service ceiling. The Effect of Drag Index c harts are used to adjust the fuel, distance, and time required to climb when the airc raft's drag index is more than zero.

Cruise

Several cruise profile options are available for mission planning and ex ecution. A cruise climb profile may be the most e fficient but its use can be inhi bited by Air Traffic Control (ATC) restraints. A step cruise profile ma y be the second most efficient but, again, ATC restraints can make it difficult to use. The step cruise profile is normally planned for each mission, however, be prepared to use the constant speed/Mach cruise flown at a constant altitude if ATC requires.

No matter what type of cruise is perform ed, step cruise, cruise climb, constant speed/Mach cruise, etc., the required data can be obtained from the specific range chart for the specific altitude being flown.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-4 01 JUL 13 The basic Three Engines and Two Engine S pecific Range charts are based on a clean configuration and standard day temperature, with an N 1 adjustment factor for nonstandard temperatures. Separat e charts are provided for sl ats and flaps extended (flap Data is located in Section XII, Supplemental Performance); these charts are here in the case you may have to ferry an airplane with the devices in a fixed position.

Another set of cruise performance charts in Section V of t he KC-10-1-1 are the Integrated Range and Time charts. These char ts can be used to determine the cruise range and time for a given fuel c onsumption, or to determine the fuel required to cruise a given range.

You also have Optimum Altitude Cruise Perf ormance charts that can be used to determine the speed, altitude, and specific range for optimum cruise performance versus gross weight. Enter the chart with a given gross weight and read up to the 99% or 100% max NM/1,000 lbs. to obtain the spec ific range, speed, and altitude from the appropriate chart. We in the KC-10 use 99%; the faster speed offsets the loss of 1% in range.

Holding

Holding is a maneuver that keeps an aircraft within a specified airspace while awaiting clearance from ATC or during air refueli ng operations. The bank angle used during holding imposes a load factor on the aircra ft requiring an increase in thrust. This additional load factor is known as an increase in aircraft effective weight.

The information obtained from the Holding char ts in Section VI of the Performance Manual includes the hol ding speed, target N 1 power setting, and the total fuel flow in pounds per hour. The holding speed is defined as the minimum fuel flow speed. This speed could be less than 1.5 V S (1.4 V S slats extended) but is always well above the 1.2g buffet onset speed. All the charts ar e based on standard day temperatures but include adjustment factors for temperatures above standard day. For each degree of temperature above standar d day increase the N 1 RPM by .20 % and the fuel flow by 35 lbs per hour.

When varying airspeed according to bank angl e to improve endurance, you can obtain a more accurate account of fuel us e by averaging the fuel flow for 0 ° bank and fuel flow at the required bank angle. An increase in drag index results in an increased fuel flow, which decreases endurance. When holding with a drag index greater than zero, obtain a fuel flow correction factor from the Effe ct of Drag Index on holding chart to compute a more accurate fuel flow.

Air Refueling

Since one of the missions of the KC-10 is that of an air refu eling tanker (with receiver capability), it is important to understand performance param eters associated with air refueling. The charts in Section VII are used to determine fuel consumption, airspeeds, and formatting capability during air refueling operations.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-5 01 JUL 13 When refueling at low airspeeds, such as with C-130's or A-10's, a minimum air refueling speed must be com puted using the appropriate Cruise Buffet-Onset Boundary chart in Section I of the Performance Manual.

Three charts are provided: one for a clean configuration, one for slats extended, and one for slats/flaps extended. Remember that, th is is the slowest acceptable safe speed at which the aircraft can fly to accomplish ai r refueling. The KC-10 will not be flown with a minimum air refueling speed of less than 180 knots as per the Flight Manual section III Limitations.

If the tanker arrives at the A/R track ahead of the receiver it may become necessary to orbit (tankers will make every effort to arrive at the ARCP a minimum of 15 minutes, as per T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 page 8.2-4). If so, A/R orbit airspeed and fuel consumption should be computed. Enter t he chart with the gross weight and pressure altitude. Where the two intersect is the or bit-indicated airspeed, target N 1 RPM, and total fuel flow. The first A/R Orbit chart wor ks for all aircraft except the A-10.

Formatting Capability charts are used to dete rmine the maximum gross weight at which the KC-10 receiver can maintain position in the tanker downwash. The initial and final receiver weights cannot exceed the com puted formatting capabilities. The second receiver weight is the End Ai r Refueling (EA/R) gross weigh t. Again the receiver weights cannot exceed the computed forma tting capability. If it appears the receiver EA/R weight may cause a problem, further computations on fuel consumption during air refueling can be accomplished to determine a more accurate EA/R weight.

Descent

The descent charts found in the Performanc e Manual are used to determine the time, distance and fuel required for a particular de scent. The desired airspeed and rate of descent versus distance flown while descendi ng will dictate the type of descent profile used. A long-range descent c an be used when there is plenty of time to get down. When using this profile, a descent Rate of 275 ft per NM is achieved. An enroute descent of 300 ft per NM provides a faster de scent. Both of these descent profiles are accomplished in the clean configuration. During a penetration descent the speed brakes are deployed and landing gear ext ended when the aircraft descends through 20,000 ft MSL.

Descent rates are as follows:

Idle Thrust: 300 feet per NM

Speed Brakes: 150 feet per NM

Landing Gear: 150 feet per NM

Slats: 150 feet per NMKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-6 01 JUL 13 

## Segment One – Part II

Workshop Exercises

For the following exercises, use the appropriate charts in Section IV and Section I of the Performance Manual.

Climb

1. Conditions: TAT = 15 o C
Pressure Altitude = 3,000 ft
Find Maximum Cruise Thrust ________

2. Conditions: TAT = -8 o C
Pressure Altitude = 5,000 ft Engine and Wing Anti-ice ON Find Three Engine Climb Power ________

3. Conditions: TAT = -4 o C
Pressure Altitude = 15,000 ft Engine and Wing Anti-ice ON (#2 Engine Inoperative) Find Two Engine Climb Power ________

Conditions for Items 4 - 6: Gross Weight = 510,000 lbs

Start of Climb = Sea Level

Climb to FL 330
Temp Dev = -5 o C

Wind = 45 knot headwind

Maximum Climb Thrust

4. Compute Fuel to Climb __________

5. Compute Distance to Climb __________KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-7 01 JUL 13 6. Compute Time to Climb __________

Conditions for Items 7 - 10: Gross Weight = 525,000 lbs
Start of Climb =10,000 ft MSL

Start of Climb KIAS = 250 Climb to Service Ceiling
Temp Dev = 0 o

Wind = 15 Knot tailwind Wing Air Refueling Pods Installed with Hose and Drogue Retracted

7. Compute Service Ceiling __________

8. Compute Fuel to Climb __________

9. Compute Distance to Climb __________

10. Compute Time to Climb __________

Cruise

11. Compute the optimum altitude fo r an aircraft weighing 540,000 lbs.

__________ 12. Find the Max Endurance Speed for a 510,000 lb aircraft cruising at FL 330.

__________ 13. Compute Long Range Cruise Speed and Mach for a 410,000 lb aircraft at FL 310.

_________________ 14. Compute Two Engine Optimum Altitude for a 360,000 lb aircraft.

_______________ 15. Compute N 1 RPM for Long-Range Cruise for an aircraft weighing 430,000 lbs at FL

310.

__________KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-8 01 JUL 13 16. Compute Long Range Cruise NM/1,000 lb. for an aircraft weighing 375,000 lbs at
FL 200 with slats extended. ________________

Holding
Using the following information, compute holding data for the listed conditions: Gross Weight = 407,000 lbs
Altitude = 25,000 ft MSL
Bank Angle = 20 o

SAT = -30 o C

Find three engine holding data in a clean configuration.
17. Airspeed ________

18. N 1 RPM ________

19. Fuel Flow ___________

Find three engine holding data in a clean configuration with 0 o bank.
20. Airspeed __________

21. N 1 RPM __________

22. Fuel Flow __________

Find two engine holding data in a clean configuration with 20 o bank.
23. Airspeed ___________

24. N 1 RPM ___________

25. Fuel Flow ___________ Compute corrected Fuel Flow for holding with three engines, using 20 o bank, with Wing

Pods installed.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-9 01 JUL 13 26. Drag Index _________

27. Fuel Flow Factor _______

28. Corrected FF ________
Refueling 29. Your aircraft, weighing 515,000 lbs with a CG of 26.5%, is scheduled to refuel an
A-10 at FL 190. Compute the minimum air refueling airspeed for (0 ° /RET) and
slats (0 ° /EXT) configurations.

0 ° /RET __________ 0 ° /EXT __________

30. Your aircraft is scheduled to refuel a C- 5B at FL 270 on AR track 312. You arrive

at the ARCP 20 minutes ahead of the receiver. The tanker weighs 505,000 lbs The

OAT is -28 o C. Compute orbit speed, N 1 power setting, and tota l fuel consumption
during the 20-minute orbit. Orbit Speed ________

N 1 Power ________ Fuel Consumption _________________

31. Given the following conditions, dete rmine the maximum weight formatting capability of a KC-10A Receiver/KC-135 Tanker:
Temp deviation = +15 o C Receiver UARRSI and Light Reflector Doors Open and Enhanced A/R
lighting installed Tanker Gross weight = 265,000 lbs
Fuel offload = 48,000 lbs
Initial ____________
EA/R ____________

32. Compute receiver and tanker fuel dat a during air refueling using the following

information:KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-10 01 JUL 13 KC-10 Receiver initial gross weight = 322,000 lbs KC-10 Tanker initial gross weight = 590,000 lbs
Altitude = 20,000 ft MSL
Fuel Offload = 80,000 lbs
Temperature = standard day Air Refueling Time = 50 minutes (ARCP to EA/R Time)
No. 2 Engine Inoperative (Receiver) Air Refueling Airspeed =290 KIAS
Receiver Instantaneous Fuel Burn __________
Average Tanker Weight __________
Receiver Fuel Consumed __________
Receiver Net Fuel Onload __________ Receiver EA/R Gross Weight __________
Receiver Average Weight __________
Receiver Average Fuel Burn __________ Receiver Fuel Burn During A/R __________
Tanker NM/1,000 lb. __________
Tanker Fuel Burn __________

Descent
Compute the fuel, distance and time for th ree descent profiles using the following

conditions: Beginning Altitude = 35,000 ft MSL Ending Altitude = 5,000 ft MSL

Winds = 25 knot headwind Wing A/R Pods and Enhanced A/R Lighting Installed

Long Range Descent
33. Fuel ________

34. Distance ________
35. Time __________KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-11 01 JUL 13 Enroute Descent
36. Fuel _________

37. Distance _________

38. Time _________

Penetration Descent
39. Fuel _________

40. Distance _________

41. Time _________KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-12 01 JUL 13 

## Segment Two – Part I Computerized Flight Planning Workshop

Flight Plan Familiarization

KC-10 computer flight pl an products are derived from two separate programs (PFPS and ACFP). Local mission computer flight plans are generated usi ng PFPS. Off station and local Close Watch missions usually use the ACFP format generated using a global weather database to optimize r outing and fuel burn efficiency. The computer flight plans are obtained from TACC or from the Special Missions sections at your home station. The headers along the manually input PFPS/ACFP flight plans basically describe the information contained in the flight plan.

PFPS Heading

│ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │

ACFP Heading

OPTIMIZED FUEL PLAN WP LOCID TC VAR MC DC MH ALT GS DIS TIM AD DCHG LAT LABEL MACH TAS TDIS ATIM FREM

LONG ID CHNL/ FREQ WIND TD CAS ETA GW T

Figure 1. Flight Plan Headers

WP# - Number of sequential navigation or action point

FIX - Navigational aid identifier used

LATITUDE/LONGITUDE - Latitude and longitude of the desired action point

TAC VOR - Frequency of Navigational aid used

REMARKS - Used to manually input action point remarks

LEG DIST - Ground distance from the preceding waypoint

TOT DIS - Total Ground Distance from the beginning of the flight to the current waypoint

MC - Magnetic course from the preceding waypoint

TC - True course from the preceding waypoint ALT - Altitude in feetKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-13 01 JUL 13 TEMP - Standard day static air tem perature at desired altitude

MACH - Mach number

CAS - Calibrated airspeed, same as indicated airspeed for the KC-10

TAS - True airspeed

GS - Groundspeed, derived from the manually inputted winds

TIME - Segment time from previous waypoint

EL TIME - Accumulated time from beginning of flight plan to selected waypoint

ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival

ATA - Actual time to selected waypoint; filled in by crew during flight to check progress

DRAG INDEX - Drag index value from performance manual

WINDS/DRIFT - The manually input winds used for computations and drift angle

Note: PFPS can use global winds

.

LEG FUEL - Segment fuel used from previous waypoint

FUEL FLOW - Engine fuel flow in pounds per hour

FUEL REM - Fuel remaining at the selected waypoint

GROSS WT - Aircraft gross weight at selected waypoint

AR FUEL - Air refueling onload or offload fuelKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-14 01 JUL 13 The ACFP flight plan has the extra feature of a fuel summary following the flight plan output as follows:

1 -ENROUTE 0633 092212 10-TAXI 001500 2 -RESERVE 0000 012000 11-REQ D RAMP 111500 3 -ENROUTE+RESERVE 0633 104212 12- ACTUAL RAMP ........... 4 -ALTERNATE 0000 000000 13-UNI DENTIFIED EXTRA ........... 5 -HOLDING 0115 012772 14-REQ D O/H DEST 027772 6 -APP&LANDING 0015 003000 15-ENDURANCE/DEST 0237 7 -AR ONLD/OFFL - 020000 16-TOTAL ENDURANCE 0849 8 -IDENTIFIED EXTRA 010016 17-B/O 095212 9 -SUBTOTAL 0803 110000

NOTE: BLOCK 9 REFLECTS FOLLOWING ONLOADS/OFFLOADS. TOTAL FUEL ONLOAD 030000 TOTAL FUEL OFFLOAD 010000

Figure 2. Fuel Summary

ENROUTE - Time and fuel from start of sec ond segment to begin descent point, includes transition fuel at enroute locations

RESERVE – Cat 1 reserve. This block is no longer used.

ALTERNATE - If required, fuel for flight from missed approach point at intended destination, to alternate using time and fuel to alternate, or specific range charts

HOLDING - 1 + 15 fuel for remote or island destinations; blank otherwise

APP&LANDING – Fuel from Begin Descent Point to landing; Use 3,000 lb s if calculated separately from descent fuel

AR ONLD/OFFL - Net fuel onload and offload

IDENTIFIED EXTRA - Fuel added for unplanned contingencies

SUBTOTAL - Total of enroute and reserve and subsequent blocks

TAXI - 1,500 lbs

REQ D RAMP - Required ramp fuel load; addition of all blocks

UNIDENTIFIED EXTRA - Difference between actual and required ramp fuel, should not exceed 10,000 lbs

REQ D O/H DEST - Reserve plus alternate plus holding plus approach and landing

ENDURANCE/DEST - Planned endurance time at initial approach fix fuel

TOTAL ENDURANCE - Total enroute plus endurance time

B/O - Accumulated fuel burn-off for each segment from departure to destination
Additional information specific to the parameter s of ACFP flight plans is contained in AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapter 6 and 14.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-15 01 JUL 13 Flight Plan Fuel Verification

AFI 11-2KC-10 V3, Chapter 6, st ates that: Computer flight plans will be verified by the flight crew for route definition and accuracy prior to departure.

AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapter 14, al so states it is the crew’s responsibility to review each CFP and determine if the planned values chosen by the flight planner are sufficient and correct for the mission. The CFP fuel ca lculations must be verified using T.O. 1C10(K)A-1-1. and the following fuel computation verification procedure:

The flight engineer does this by completing the time and fuel analysis block of the AF Form 4091. Use sections 5 Spec ific Range charts or Section 10 Flight Planning Tables to verify the enroute portion. Confirming each and every segment on the flight plan is not necessary Note: Air refueling activities and flying at altitudes lower than figures 10-6 through 10-11 will increase fuel required.

1. Start engines, taxi, and APU operation. Normally 1500 lbs. When more than 15 minutes ground operation time is antic ipated, add 100 lbs for each minute in excess of 15 minutes, not to exceed 3,000 lbs.

2. Takeoff. This will normally be the first li ne entry on a flight plan and represents the amount of time and fuel used from the st art of takeoff roll (brake release) to the start of climb (2,000 ft). This is normally 2.5 minutes and 2,500 lbs of fuel.

3. ADD number 1 (1,500 lbs) and number 2 (2,500 lbs) together so you would see 4,000 lbs total.

4. Enroute. Fuel for flight from start of climb segment at the departure location to begin descent point at destination.

5. Climb. Initial and second segment c limb will normally be shown as a separate line entry, while enroute climbs may be in cluded as part of the cruise leg. For climbs in excess of 4,000 ft, compute the additional fuel required to climb and add this value to the fuel for cruise during that leg.

6. Cruise. Fuel for cruise is calculat ed using specific range charts. Enter the chart for the proper altitude with the planned indicated air speed (IAS) or MACH and average gross weight. Nautical miles per 1,000 lbs of fuel divided into the air distance for the leg equals fuel consum ption for that segment. If a chart for the planned altitude is not available, the chart for the next lower altitude should be used.

7. Every effort should be made to plan cr uise segments at the altitude and speeds that provide the best fuel economy. Al titudes 2,000 ft above or below optimum altitude, or speeds in excess of 0.02 MACH above optimum, will cause a rapid degradation of fuel economy.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-16 01 JUL 13 8. Descents, Approach and Landing. ACFP flight plans calculate Descent, Approach and Landing Fuel in Block 6. CFP add fuel used from the Begin Descent Point to Initial Approach Fi x for descent and then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for approach and landing.

9. Alternate (If required). Fuel for missed approach and flight from intended destination to alternate aerodr ome. Use Time and Fuel to Alternate, or Specific Range charts.

10. Transition. When transition trai ning is scheduled, use a standard fuel consumption value of 18,000 lbs per hour . This includes the fuel used for descent and initial approach.

11. Air Refueling. Fuel c onsumption during tanker refue ling is normally calculated using the specific range charts. Enter the chart for the pr oper altitude with the planned IAS and average gross weight and determine the average nautical miles per pound/1,000 (NMPP/1,000).

12. Apply the drag index values for that particular configuration. See Table 14.1 PFPS/ACFP Drag Index Values. As a receiver, use the Fuel Consumption During Air Refueling charts (Chapter 7) in the performance manual.

13. Reserve Fuel

Holding Fuel. Fuel for 45 minutes of holding. Compute using planned destination gross weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three-Engine Holding Table with a 25-degree bank angle. NOTE: ACFP does not use the Three-Engine Holding Table to compute holding f uel. Block 18 on the 4091 will always be less than the holding block on the ACFP. Th is is authorized extra fuel and the difference will be entered in block 21 of the 4091. If ACFP holding fuel is less than block 18 on the 4091, there is an error in your ACFP. Contact your flight manager to resolve.

Remote Destination. When holding is r equired in lieu of an alternate at a remote destination, carry an additional one hour and 15 minutes of holding fuel. A remote destination is defined as any aerodrome which, due to its unique geographic location, offers no suitable alter nate (civil or militar y) within 2 hours flying time. When this option is used, ca lculate Reserve Fuel (Holding, Remote, and Contingency) using the Three-Engine Holding table with a 25-degree bank angle, planned destination gross weight, 20,000 feet MSL.

Contingency. For missions other than lo cal training missions, calculate 15 minutes of contingency fuel. Local trai ning missions are not required to carry contingency fuel. If contingency fuel is ca rried on local training missions, it should not exceed 15 minutes. In all cases, this fuel is to compensate forKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-17 01 JUL 13 unforeseen circumstances during any phas e of flight (i.e. Unforecasted weather, launch delay, etc). Contingen cy fuel will not be considered reserve fuel since crews may burn some or all of their contingency fuel at any time during the mission. Compute using planned destination gross weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three-Engine Holdi ng Table with a 25-degree bank angle.
ACFP flight plans will calculate reserves and contingency fuel as holding fuel. ACFP will have 1+00 holding when combined 0+45 reserve and 0+15 contingency fuel (for remote destinat ions ACFP will calculate 2+15 holding, combining 2+00 reserve and 15 minutes contingency fuel).
Air Refueling Flight Plan Verification

It must be clearly understood that the veri fication procedure described above is only accurate for missions that are flown at the appropriate altitudes and cruise profiles that the charts are based on. T he charts in the performance manual (Figures 10-6 through 10-11) are for missions that do not have planned air refueling. To verify fuel burns for mission flight plans that have one or more ai r refueling included, the following procedure is suggested:

1. Verify initial takeoff and taxi fuel in s egment 1 of the flight plan is the standard planning number of 4,000 lbs (1,500 taxi and 2,500 takeoff/acceleration). This fuel accounts for engine start, taxi, and climb to 2,000 ft above the airfield.

2. Using Figure 4-5, THREE ENGINE FU EL TO CLIMB, calculate the fuel required to climb from 2,000 ft above the airfield to the initial level-off altitude shown on the flight plan. Remember to account for any drag index. The resulting value should be very close to the CFP climb fuel.

3. Verify the leg fuel for the cruise and tanker A/R segments of the flight plan using the appropriate Specif ic Range charts from section 5 of the Performance Manual. There are several methods to calc ulate the leg fuel. An asterisk in the table below indicates the two most often used.

The following formulas may be used:

*FF = TASK ÷ NMPP *F/Pd = Air distance ÷ NMPP

FF = F/Pd ÷ Time (minutes) x 60 F/Fd = FF ÷ 60 x Time (minutes)

D = NMPP x F/Pd F/Fd = FF ÷ TASK x Distance

TASK = NMPP x FF NM/1,000 = D ÷ F/Fd x 1,000
Time (minutes) = F/Pd ÷ FF x 60 NMPP = Air Distance ÷ F/Fd
Air Distance (AD) = True Airs peed (TAS) X Ground Distance (GD) ÷ Ground Speed (GS)

Table 1 - FormulasKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-18 01 JUL 13 4. Tanker Orbit leg fuel burns can be veri fied using the AR Orbit table (Fig 7-1). The sample flight plan has a planned rendezvous orbit at 22,000 ft after waypoint 5. Using Figure 7-1 and the planned gross weight, we can calculate a fuel flow of approximately 330 lbs per minute (Interpolation is required). Multiply this value by the number of minutes in the orbit segment to verify the leg fuel for the orbit. Orbit fuel can also be verified using the Specific Range charts, however, the orbit table takes in to account the bank angle, so it is somewhat more accurate. 5. Receiver Air Refueling leg fuel can be verified by the following method. FUEL CONSUMPTION DURING RECEIVER AIR REFUELING charts (Figures 7-5 and 7-6). These charts reflect the effect of flying in the tanker’s downwash. The tanker’s gross weight must be know n, however, and this information is not always available so use the maximum weights on the chart.

6. AFI 11-2KC-10V3, Chapter 14 provi des the following guidance for verifying descent/approach & landing fuel values . ACFP use Approach and Landing Block 6 for Time and Fuel calculati on. CFP add fuel used from the Begin Descent Point to Initial Approach Fi x for descent, then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for approach and landing. Otherwis e compute descent fuel from Section 8 of TO 1C-10( K)A-1-1 and then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for approach and landing.

7. Pattern work/transition is calculated by the flight planning software using 18,000 lbs per hour and can be verified by simply multiplying this fuel flow times the time shown for the transition segment.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-19 01 JUL 13 

## Segment Two – Part II

The following flight plan on the following pages is to be used for this fuel burn verification exercise. It wa s developed using the PFPS program. This mission contains both tanker and receiver A/ R, and concludes with transition/pattern work at the destination field.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-20 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-21 01 JUL 13 Figure 3. PFPS Mission Flight Plan (Sheet 1 of 2)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-22 01 JUL 13 Figure 3. PFPS Mission Flight Plan (Sheet 2 of 2)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-23 01 JUL 13 PFPS Flight Plan Fuel Solutions

The following fuel computations were calc ulated from the Perfo rmance Manual. During the lesson exercise you may obtain slightly different numbers due to interpolation variances.
Segment 1 – 4,000 lbs. Standar d value from AFI 11-2KC-10V3
Segment 2 through Level-off – 8,576 lbs ( 1548+5895+1133). Calculated from Figure 4- 5, THREE ENGINE FUEL TO CLIMB, from 2,000 ft up to 25,000 ft f uel burn is 8,300 lbs.
Segment 4 – Calculated from Figure 5-19, THREE ENGINE SPECIFIC RANGE, NM/1,000 = 21.4. Fuel burn is 5,100 lbs.

ORBIT Segment – Calculated fr om Figure 7-1, AR ORBIT TABLE. Fuel flow = 340 lbs per minute. Fuel Burn 4,950 lbs per minute.

Segment 5, 6 and 7 – Calculat ed from Figure 5-19. Using the Drag Index Table Figure 1-14 of 18.5 (Air Refueling Boom Deployed 16.5 & ARO Sight ing Door Open 2.0). Next take this 18.5 to Effect of Drag Index On Range Figure 5-56; t he effect is .935 on range. The average NM/1,000 value of 21.2 is corrected to 19.82. Fuel Burn for these three segments 7,630 lbs. Don’t forget to subtract your offload of 50,000 lbs.
Segment 8 – Calculated from Figure 5-19. Using the NM/1 ,000 value of 25.0. Fuel Burn 1,221 lbs.

Segments 9, 10 and 11 – Calculated using FIG 7-5, FUEL CONSUMPTION DURING AIR REFUELING. Assume a maximum tanker gross weight of 600,000 lbs to obtain a fuel flow of 390 lbs per minute. Fuel Burn is 12,090 lbs. Again don’t forget the onload of 50,000 lbs.

Descent PT – Calculated using FIG 8-2, ENROUTE DESCENT. A descent from 33,000 ft down to 3,000 ft. Fuel Burn is 1,560lbs (25,000 = 1,600, 3,000 = 400).
SEGMENT 15 – Standard planning value of 3,000 lbs.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-24 01 JUL 13 

## Segment Three – Flight Engineer Worksheet

Flight Engineer Worksheet

The Flight Engineer Worksheet is used to record pertinent data during mission planning and all phases of flight from pre-f light through post flight activities.

The front side of the form contains Infli ght Activity and Mission Planning sections. A blank form is provided at the end of this lesson.

This section will cover the entries r equired on the front side of the form.

Your Unit may use a different format; however , the data contained in the form should be the same.

The Flight Engineer Worksheet has two secti ons, Inflight Activity and Mission Planning.

Only those sections required for the mission or through local guidance need to be completed. Units may supplement this with additional local guidance for NERCCs, Standardized Alternates, etc. Complete the Ti me and Fuel Analysis prior to every flight to verify flight plan computations. Most entries are self-explanat ory. Blocks 1 through 13 provide a worksheet to aid in completing the Time and Fuel Analysis.

Detailed information will be provided in AFI 11-2KC-10, Volume 3, Chapters 12 and 14.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-25 01 JUL 13 Figure 4. Inflight ActivityKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-26 01 JUL 13 Inflight Activity: Refueling Air Refueli ng and Tanker Air Refueling, Approaches & Landings

RECEIVER AIR REFUELING information, incl uding call sign, type of aircraft, scheduled onload, actual onload and number of contacts.

TANKER AIR REFUELING information, in cluding call sign, tail number, scheduled offload, actual offload and number of contacts.

LANDINGS/APPROACHES

This block provides a tabulated table in which you record touch and go landings, missed approaches and full stop/taxi backs.

Figure 5. Schedule

Most of the information requir ed for completion of the Header for each of the refueling activities can be found in the locally pub lished daily schedule shown in the example above. The ACTUAL entries are enter ed as they occur during the mission.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-27 01 JUL 13 Figure 6. Mission PlanningKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-28 01 JUL 13 MISSION PLANNING

This section satisfies the requirements of AFI 11-202V3 and AFI 11-2KC-10V3. This section consists of the following seven blo cks: Fuel Quantities; Weights; Center of Gravity; CAT I Reserve Fuel; Decompressi on Fuel; Air Refueling Fuel; Destination Transition Fuel: and Time and Fuel Analysis.

FUEL QUANTITIES

Three columns, labeled Plan, Actual, and After, make up this section and include provisions to record individual fuel tank quant ities, total fuel quantit y, and fuel totalizer readings for the two columns labeled ACTUAL and AFTER.

1. PLAN

This column is provided for mission planning computations. Maintenance personnel normally service the aircraft prior to aircrew arrival. Fuel distribution, other than standard fuel loads, may be requi red due to air refueling requirements or cargo limitations that di ctate specific offload or cent er of gravity requirements.

The flight engineer, after coordinating with the boom operator , plans an optimum ramp fuel load, which will satisfy mission requirements. The desired fuel load and fuel distribution for the mission is shown in the (PLAN) column.

2. ACTUAL

During the preflight check of the fuel system, the f light engineer will make any required adjustment to the fuel tank quantities; coor dinate the distribution with the boom operator; and enter the actual t ank quantities in the (ACTUAL) column.

3. AFTER

This value is entered upon engine shutdow n at destination and is recorded on the Fuel Totalizer line.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-29 01 JUL 13 Figure 7. Mission Planning (Weights)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-30 01 JUL 13 WEIGHTS

Contains pertinent aircraft and fuel weight s. Two columns (Plan and Actual) are provided to record the following weights: Oper ating; Cargo/Pax; Zero Fuel; Fuel; Ramp; Taxi and Takeoff.

1. PLAN

The first three aircraft we ights; Aircraft Operating Weight, Cargo/Passenger Weight, and Zero Fuel Weight are prov ided by the boom operator during mission planning and entered in the appropriate blocks. Ramp Weight is the Zero Fuel Weight plus the Fuel Weight. Taxi Fuel is a standard 1,500 pounds unless mission requirements dictate otherwise. Takeoff Weight is the Ramp Weight minus Taxi Fuel.

2. ACTUAL

Operating Weight, Cargo/Passenger Weigh t, and Zero Fuel Weight should be the same values computed and entered in t he Form "F" by the boom operator. Ramp Fuel is the same value entered in block 34 (12). The sum of these weights should be the same gross weight on which the TOLD data is based.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-31 01 JUL 13 Figure 8. Mission Planning (Center of Gravity)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-32 01 JUL 13 CENTER OF GRAVITY % MAC

Contains Center of Gravity % MAC informa tion. Blocks are provided for the PLANNED and ACTUAL values.

1. PLAN

Like the aircraft weights, the boom operat or provides the planned aircraft Zero Fuel Weight CG value. The Flight Engineer based on fuel load, mission requirements, and a structur al limitation computes the planned takeoff CG.

2. ACTUAL

Actual zero fuel weight for cargo mi ssions and abnormal fuel distribution for unusual A/R missions may cause the actual CG to differ greatly from the planned values. CG can be critical to takeo ff performance, especially at heavy gross weights. Takeoff CG is based on Brake Release Gross Weight and the aft limits reach a very narrow band at maximum gross weight.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-33 01 JUL 13 Figure 9. Mission Planning

(Time and Fuel Analysis)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-34 01 JUL 13 TIME AND FUEL ANALYSIS

This block contains time and fuel analysi s. It consists of 16 lines and is used primarily to enter time and fuel requirements by phase of flight. Two columns labeled (TIME) and (FUEL) are prov ided and, depending upon the computation, one or both columns are used. The blocks parallel the fuel summary section of a standard CFP.

Block 14 Enroute. Time and fuel from brakes release to Begin Descent Point at destination. Includes transiti on fuel at enroute locations.

Block 15 Cat 1 Reserve. This block no longer used

Block 16 Decompression Fuel. Enter fuel from Block 9, if greater then zero. Decompression Fuel. Additional f uel may be needed to satisfy oxygen requirements. For flights where the total number of individuals on board the aircraft exceeds the total number of operational flight crew oxygen system stations, ensure there is sufficient fuel on board to allow for a loss of cabin pressurization from any point along the route, an emergency descent to 10,000 feet MSL minimum, and continued flight to the nearest suitable emergency airfield. To compute decompr ession fuel, examine the intended route of flight and determine the point furthest from a suitable emergency airfield. From the flight plan determine the amount of fuel remaining on board the aircraft at that point. Compare that fuel rema ining value with the amount of fuel that would be requi red to proceed from that furthest point, at 10,000 ft, to the suitable emergency airfield, ex ecute a descent, approach and landing, and land with 12,000 pounds.

Block 17 Alternate. If required

Alternate. Fuel for missed approach and flight from intended destination to alternate aerodrome. Use Time and Fuel to alternate, or Specific Range charts.

Block 18 Holding. Enter value from Reserv e Fuel Table (Holding + Remote + Contingency) time and fuel

Holding. Enter 45 minutes of fuel. Compute using planned destination gross weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three- Engine Holding Table with a 25-degree bank angle.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-35 01 JUL 13 Remote Destination. Since remote desti nation fuel may be required in lieu of an alternate, at remote destinations enter the additional 1+15 minutes of holding fuel here. Enter “zero ” in Block 17 if adding fuel for a remote destination. Contingency. Enter 15 minutes of fuel computed using planned destination gross weight at 10,000 feet. Use the Three-Engine Holding Table with a 25 degree bank angle.

Block 19 Descent, Approach & Landing. Use CFP add fuel from the Begin Descent Point to Initial Approach Fix for descent, then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for approach and landing. Otherwis e compute descent fuel from Section 8 of TO 1C-10(K)A-1-1, then add 15 minutes and 3000 pounds for approach and landing.

Minimum Planned Fuel at Begin Descent Po int. Consists of fuel required for descent, approach and landing, al ternate/missed approach, and holding/minimum landing fuel. Additional fuel may be added to allow crews some flexibility when dealing with unplanned contingencies (e.g., late receivers, extra receivers, increas ed off loads, weather avoidance, ATC delays, etc.) This Identified Extra f uel should not normally exceed 10,000 pounds. When dealing with unplanned contingenc ies, crews will still plan to touchdown with minimum landing fuel. Un its may develop standard alternate fuel requirements for local training mi ssions however; these fuel requirements will not be less than those specified in this AFI.

Block 20 AR On/Offload. Enter the amount from Block 12. Air Refueling. Scheduled offload minus scheduled onload. If scheduled onloads are not completed it may be impossible to complete the mission.

Block 21 Identified Extra. Compute as per Fuel Requirements Chapter 14.

Block 22 Taxi. Compute as per Fuel Requirements Chapter 14.

Block 23 Required Ramp Fuel Load. Add Blocks 14 thru 22.
Required Ramp Fuel. Required ramp fuel will consist of all fuel required for engine start, taxi, APU operation, tak eoff, enroute, enroute reserve, air refueling, decompression, descen t, approach and landing, alternate, transition, holding/minimum landing.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-36 01 JUL 13 Block 24 Actual Ramp Fuel Load. Self-explanatory.

Block 25 Unidentified Extra. Subtract Block 23 from Block 24. If this value exceeds 5,000 pounds, see Fuel Planning Procedures 14.3. This block should not be less than zero.

Block 26 Required Overhead Destination is t he minimum planned fuel at begin descent. Add blocks 17, 18 and 19 then subtract contingency fuel. Note: ACFP does not subtract conti ngency fuel from required overhead.

Block 27 Endurance at Begin Descent Point. Blo ck 24, minus Block 22, minus Block 14, plus/minus Block 20, divided by 15,000 pounds per hour.

Block 28 Total Endurance. Block 14 plus Block 27. This value should be entered onto the DD Form 175 or 1801.

Block 29 AR Onload Endurance. Planned onload di vided by 15,000 pounds per hour. This value should be entered onto the DD Form 175 or 1801.

This completes the Flight Engineer Wo rksheet entries. During the simulator phase, you will use this worksheet to co mpute fuel requirem ents for specific missions.

The Time and Fuel Analysis is mandatory for all missions, since it satisfies the AFI 11-202V3 requirements.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-37 01 JUL 13 Figure 10. Flight Engineer WorksheetKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E848-SG 1-64-38 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-1 01 JUL 13 

# FTD Mission 3

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow for hands on practice of a local training flight. This mission will acquaint the crew with the handling characteristics of the KC- 10 and use of the Flight Gu idance System. The primary emphasis on this mission will be normal pr ocedures and proper use of checklists. Student A will start in the left seat with a planned seat change.



### II. Duration – 7 hours A. 2.0 hour pre-brief B. 4.0 hour FTD C. 1.0 hour debrief



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. AFI 11-2KC-10, Vol 3, KC -10 Operations Procedures



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Flight Training Device B. Briefing Room C. TOLD Card D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Scenario, Profile, and applicable briefing items B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures

a. Initial Inspection through Leaving Aircraft 2. Section V, Mission PreparationKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-2 01 JUL 13 

## Pilot’s Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:
1. Perform Standard Instrument Departure (SID) Procedures 2. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures
Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 5. Perform General Navigation 6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 7. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 8. Perform Crew Coordination 9. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 10. Perform Fuel Manage ment and Conservation 11. Perform Equipment Operation 12. Perform Radar Operation 13. Perform Communications 14. Perform Pilot’s Interior Inspection Procedures 15. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 16. Perform Before Start Procedures 17. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 18. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 19. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 20. Perform Takeoff, Initial Procedures 21. Perform Left Seat Takeoff Procedures 22. Perform Pilot Not Flying Takeoff and Climb Duties 23. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 24. Perform Cruise Procedures 25. Perform Descent Procedures 26. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 27. Perform Approach Procedures 28. Perform ILS Coupled Approach Procedures 29. Perform Before Landing Procedures 30. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 31. Perform After Landing Procedures 32. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 33. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures
During this training mission, you are expected to practice and achieve required proficiency level (RPL) on the following procedure:

1. Perform Vertical “S” ManeuverKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-3 01 JUL 13 

## Flight Engineer’s Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures 2. Compute Fuel Requirements

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 5. Perform General Navigation Procedures 6. Perform Crew Coordination 7. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 8. Perform FMS Operation 9. Perform Equipment Operation 10. Perform Communications 11. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 12. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 13. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 14. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 15. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 16. Perform Before Start Procedures 17. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 18. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 19. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 20. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 21. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 22. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 23. Perform Cruise Procedures 24. Perform Descent Procedures 25. Perform Approach Procedures 26. Perform Before Landing Procedures 27. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 28. Perform After Landing Procedures 29. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 30. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 31. Perform Standard Instrument Departure Procedures 32 Perform Vertical “S” Maneuver 33. Perform Instrument Approach ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-4 01 JUL 13 

## Scenario FTD Mission 3

This mission is a local training flight at Trav is AFB. Student A will start in the left seat with a seat change planned to a llow student B to accomplish left seat items. This mission will acquaint the crew with the handling characteristics of the KC-10 and the use of the Flight Guidance System. The primary emphasis on this mission will be normal procedures and the proper use of checklists.



## Profile

1. FE’s Interior Inspection 2. Pilot’s Interior Inspection (A-L, B-R) 3. Cockpit Preparation (A-L, B-R) 4. Before Start (A-L, B-R) 5. Starting Engines (A-L, B-R) 6. Before Taxi (A-L, B-R) 7. Before Takeoff (A-L, B-R) 8. Takeoff, Initial (400,000 lbs) (A-L) 9. Standard Instrument Departure (A-L) 10. After Tak eoff/Climb/Cruise (A-L) 11. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Alpha) (A-L, B-R) 12. Enroute Descent (A-L) 13. ILS Coupled Approach (A-L) 14. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (A-L) 15. Full Stop Taxiback Seat Change (B-L, A-R) 16. Takeoff, Initial (400,000) (B-L) 17. Standard Instrument Departure (B-L) 18. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (B-L) 19. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Alpha) (B-L, A-R) 20. Enroute Descent (B-L) 21. ILS Coupled Approach (B-L) 22. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (B-L) 23. After Landing (B-L, A-R) 24. Parking – Engine Shutdown (B-L, A-R) 25. Leaving Aircraft (B-L, A-R)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-5 01 JUL 13 

## Mission Briefing

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructor.

2. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period.

a. Instructor Pilot Briefs: (1) Previous training and weak areas (2) Planned mission activities (3) Selected abnormal an d emergency procedures

b. Instructor Flight Engineer Briefs: (1) TOLD Card (2) CG Graph and Fuel Management (3) Terminal Enroute Procedures (4) Planned mission activities

3. Crew Briefing conducted by Aircraft Commander:

a. Normal and Emergency Ta keoff considerations b. Planned Instrument Approach proceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-6 01 JUL 13 ***THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY *** *****OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT.****** *******************AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS ******************* **********************AND THE ROUTE OF FLIGHT THEY FILE AND FLY********************** RTE NAME:X:\Biennial Reviews\PIQ\Misc Suppor CFPS VERSION:4.2
FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 22 MAY 13 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE: 2 JUL 09

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ MISSION C/S │ CLEARANCE │ Takeoff Time(Z): 00:00 Oper Wt: 250000 │ │ │ │ Land Time (Z) : 00:49 Cargo Wt: 0 │ ├─────────────┤ │ Sched Duration : +49 Ramp Fuel: 150000 │ │ ACFT TYPE │ │ FOB/RES : 06+22 Total GW: 400000 │ │ KC-10A │ │ WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 130752 │ │ │ │ Total Dist(nm): 307.4 Climb Winds: │ │ │ │ L/O Winds: │ ├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│ │ AR TRACK: ARCT: │ │ UHF PRI: UHF SEC: │ │ BCN: TACAN: │ │ A/R ALT: │ │ AVAIL BLK: │ ├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 1 KSUU 21R/RW │ 213 │ │ +15C │ │ │ 00+00 │ 396000 │ │ │ TRAVIS AFB │ 213 │ 1 │ 53M │ │ 0 │ 00:00 │ 4000 │ │ │ N 38 15.818 W121 55.719 │ 227 │ 1 │ │ │ 0.00 │ 00:00 │ 146000 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 2 TEALL/W │ 215 │ │ +2C │ N/A │ │ 00+02 │ 394612 │ │ │ TEALL │ 215 │ 7 │ 6568M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:02 │ 1388 │ │ │ N 38 10.635 W122 03.111 │ 229 │ 8 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:02 │ 144612 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 3 WAPEX/W │ 344 │ │ -14C │ N/A │ │ 00+03 │ 392386 │ │ │ WAPEX │ 344 │ 17 │ 14418M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:05 │ 2226 │ │ │ N 38 27.702 W122 03.973 │ 358 │ 25 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:05 │ 142386 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .level off │ 349 │ │ -23C │ N/A │ │ 00+02 │ 391354 │ │ │ │ 349 │ 11 │ 19000M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:06 │ 1032 │ │ │ N 38 39.007 W122 03.254 │ 003 │ 36 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:06 │ 141354 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 4 ILA/R 091X │ 349 │ │ -23C │ 325 │ │ 00+04 │ 390252 │ │ │ WILLIAMS 114.40 │ 349 │ 25 │ 19000M │ 425 │ 0 │ 00:10 │ 1102 │ │ │ N 39 04.269 W122 01.633 │ 003 │ 61 │ .69 │ 425 │ 0.00 │ 00:10 │ 140252 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 5 FMG/R 126X │ 061 │ │ -23C │ 325 │ │ 00+16 │ 385306 │ │ │ MUSTANG 117.90 │ 061 │ 114 │ 19000M │ 425 │ 0 │ 00:26 │ 4946 │ │ │ N 39 31.876 W119 39.364 │ 075 │ 175 │ .69 │ 425 │ 0.00 │ 00:26 │ 135306 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .descent pt │ 220 │ │ -23C │ 325 │ │ 00+07 │ 383239 │ │ │ │ 220 │ 48 │ 19000M │ 425 │ 0 │ 00:33 │ 2067 │ │ │ N 39 03.794 W120 29.138 │ 234 │ 223 │ .69 │ 425 │ 0.00 │ 00:33 │ 133239 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 6 SAC/R 099X │ 220 │ │ +9C │ N/A │ │ 00+11 │ 382162 │ │ │ SACRAMENTO 115.20 │ 220 │ 62 │ 3000M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:44 │ 1077 │ │ │ N 38 26.625 W121 33.099 │ 234 │ 285 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:44 │ 132162 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 7 SUU/T 113X │ 224 │ │ +15C │ 250 │ │ 00+05 │ 380752 │ │ │ TRAVIS │ 224 │ 22 │ 74M │ 250 │ 0 │ 00:49 │ 1410 │ │ │ N 38 14.733 W121 56.704 │ 238 │ 307 │ .38 │ 250 │ 0.00 │ 00:49 │ 130752 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 4.2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-7 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-8 01 JUL 13 FOR TRAINING USE ONLYKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-9 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-10 01 JUL 13400.0KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-11 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T603-SG 1-65-12 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# FTD Mission 4

I. Purpose – The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow for hands on practice of a local training flight. Emphasis will be on normal procedures and use of the Flight Guidance System. Auto Missed Approach and Manual ILS without Flight Director will be introduced. Emphasis will be on flying from the left seat.



### II. Duration – 7 hours A. 2.0 hour pre-brief B. 4.0 hour FTD C. 1.0 hour debrief



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. AFI 11-2KC-10, Vol 3, KC -10 Operations Procedures



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Flight Training Device B. Briefing Room C. TOLD Card D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 E. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 F. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Scenario, Profile, and applicable briefing items B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures

a. Interior Inspection through Downwind 2. Section V, Mission Preparation

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Pilot’s Objectives

Training objectives introduced and pract iced during this training mission:

1. Perform ILS Manual Approach Procedures 2. Perform ILS Flight Direc tor Off Approach Procedures 3. Perform Auto Non Precis ion Approach Procedures 4. Perform Localizer Approach Procedures

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 5. Perform General Navigation 6. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 7. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 8. Perform Crew Coordination 9. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 10. Perform Fuel Manage ment and Conservation 11. Perform Equipment Operation 12. Perform Radar Operation 13. Perform Communications 14. Perform Pilot’s Interior Inspection Procedures 15. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 16. Perform Before Start Procedures 17. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 18. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 19. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 20. Perform Takeoff Initial Procedures 21. Perform Left Seat Takeoff Procedures 22. Perform Pilot Not Flying (PNF) Takeoff and Climb Duties 23. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 24. Perform Cruise Procedures 25. Perform Standard Instrument Departure (SID) Procedures 26. Perform Descent Procedures 27. Perform Enroute Descent Procedures 28. Perform Auto Missed Approach Procedures 29. Perform Before Landing Procedures 30. Perform Landing 31. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) 32. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-3 01 JUL 13 33. Perform After Landing Procedures 34. Perform Parking-Engi ne Shutdown Procedures 35. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures

During this training mission, you are expected to practice and achieve required proficiency level (RPL) on the following procedures:

1. Perform Vertical “S” Maneuver 2. Perform Approach ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-4 01 JUL 13 

## Flight Engineer’s Objectives

Training objectives previously introduced th at will be practiced during this training mission:

1. Demonstrate Airmanshi p/Situational Awareness 2. Demonstrate Judgment/Compliance 3. Demonstrate Safety Consciousness 4. Demonstrate Regulation, Directive Knowledge, and Use 5. Perform General Navigation Procedures 6. Perform Crew Coordination 7. Demonstrate Perfor mance Knowledge and Use 8. Perform FMS Operation 9. Perform Equipment Operation 10. Perform Communications 11. Compute Fuel Requirements 12. Perform Mission Planning and Briefing 13. Perform Checklist Procedures and Use 14. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 15. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 16. Perform Cockpit Preparation Procedures 17. Perform Before Start Procedures 18. Perform Starting Engines Procedures 19. Perform Before Taxi Procedures 20. Perform Before Takeoff Procedures 21. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures 22. Perform FE Takeoff Duties 23. Perform After Takeoff/Climb Procedures 24. Perform Cruise Procedures 25. Perform Descent Procedures 26. Perform Approach Procedures 27. Perform Before Landing Procedures 28. Perform Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) Procedures 29. Perform After Landing Procedures 30. Perform Full Stop Taxiback Procedures 31. Perform Parking – Engine Shutdown Procedures 32. Perform Leaving Aircraft Procedures 33. Perform Instrument Approach Procedures 34. Perform Missed Approach ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-5 01 JUL 13 During this training mission, you are expected to practice and achieve required proficiency level (RPL) on the following procedures:

1. Perform Standard Instrument Departure Procedures 2 Perform Vertical “S” ManeuverKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-6 01 JUL 13 

## Scenario FTD Mission 4

This mission is a local training flight at Travis AFB, emphasizing normal procedures and the use of the Flight Guidance System. Student B will start in the Left Seat. Plan a seat change to allow Student A to acco mplish left seat items. Emphas is is on flying from the left seat. Auto Missed Approach and Manual ILS without Flight Director are introduced.



## Profile

1. FE’s Interior Inspection 2. Pilot’s Interior Inspection (B-L, A-R) 3. Cockpit Preparation (B-L, A-R) 4. Before Start (B-L, A-R) 5. Starting Engines (B-L, A-R) 6. Before Taxi (B-L/A-R) 7. Before Takeoff (B-L, A-R) 8. Takeoff, Initial (400,000 lbs) (B-L) 9. Standard Instrument Departure (B-L) 10. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (B-L) 11. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Delta) (B-L, A-R) 12. Enroute Descent (B-L) 13. Auto Non-Precision Localizer Approach (B-L) 14. Auto Missed Approach (B-L) 15. ILS Manual Approach (Fli ght Director Off) (B-L) 16. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (B-L) 17. Full Stop Taxiback – Seat Change (A-L, B-R) 18. Takeoff, Initial (400,000) (A-L) 19. Standard Instrument Departure (A- L) 20. After Takeoff/Climb/Cruise (A-L) 21. Vertical “S” Maneuver (Delta) (A-L, B-R) 22. Enroute Descent (A-L) 23. Auto Non Precision Localizer Approach (A-L) 24. Auto Missed Approach (A-L) 25. ILS Manual Approach (Fli ght Director Off) (A-L) 26. Landing, Full Stop (Reverse Thrust) (A-L) 27. After Landing (A-L, B-R) 28. Parking – Engine Shutdown (A-L, B-R) 29. Leaving Aircraft (A-L, B-R)KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-7 01 JUL 13 

## Mission Briefing

1. Mission Overview: Briefed by the Instructor.

2. Specialty Briefing and Instructional Period.

a. Instructor Pilot Briefs: (1) Previous training and weak areas (2) Planned mission activities (3) Selected abnormal an d emergency procedures

b. Instructor Flight Engineer Briefs: (1) TOLD Card as required (2) CG Graph and Fuel Management (3) Terminal Enroute Procedures (4) Planned mission activities

3. Crew Briefing conducted by Aircraft Commander:

a. Normal and Emergency Ta keoff considerations b. Planned Instrument Approach proceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-8 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-9 01 JUL 13 ***THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY *** *****OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT.****** *******************AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS ******************* **********************AND THE ROUTE OF FLIGHT THEY FILE AND FLY********************** RTE NAME:X:\Biennial Reviews\PIQ\Misc Suppor CFPS VERSION:4.2
FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 22 MAY 13 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE: 2 JUL 09

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ MISSION C/S │ CLEARANCE │ Takeoff Time(Z): 00:00 Oper Wt: 250000 │ │ │ │ Land Time (Z) : 00:57 Cargo Wt: 0 │ ├─────────────┤ │ Sched Duration : +57 Ramp Fuel: 150000 │ │ ACFT TYPE │ │ FOB/RES : 06+15 Total GW: 400000 │ │ KC-10A │ │ WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 128388 │ │ │ │ Total Dist(nm): 362.2 Climb Winds: │ │ │ │ L/O Winds: │ ├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│ │ AR TRACK: ARCT: │ │ UHF PRI: UHF SEC: │ │ BCN: TACAN: │ │ A/R ALT: │ │ AVAIL BLK: │ ├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 1 KSUU 21R/RW │ 213 │ │ +15C │ │ │ 00+00 │ 396000 │ │ │ TRAVIS AFB │ 213 │ 1 │ 53M │ │ 0 │ 00:00 │ 4000 │ │ │ N 38 15.818 W121 55.719 │ 227 │ 1 │ │ │ 0.00 │ 00:00 │ 146000 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 2 TEALL/W │ 215 │ │ +2C │ N/A │ │ 00+02 │ 394612 │ │ │ TEALL │ 215 │ 7 │ 6567M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:02 │ 1388 │ │ │ N 38 10.635 W122 03.111 │ 229 │ 8 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:02 │ 144612 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 3 WAPEX/W │ 344 │ │ -14C │ N/A │ │ 00+03 │ 392386 │ │ │ WAPEX │ 344 │ 17 │ 14417M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:05 │ 2226 │ │ │ N 38 27.702 W122 03.973 │ 358 │ 25 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:05 │ 142386 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .level off │ 349 │ │ -23C │ N/A │ │ 00+02 │ 391354 │ │ │ │ 349 │ 11 │ 19000M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:06 │ 1032 │ │ │ N 38 39.010 W122 03.254 │ 003 │ 36 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:06 │ 141354 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 4 ILA/R 091X │ 349 │ │ -23C │ 325 │ │ 00+04 │ 390252 │ │ │ WILLIAMS 114.40 │ 349 │ 25 │ 19000M │ 425 │ 0 │ 00:10 │ 1102 │ │ │ N 39 04.269 W122 01.633 │ 003 │ 61 │ .69 │ 425 │ 0.00 │ 00:10 │ 140252 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 5 FMG/R 126X │ 061 │ │ -23C │ 325 │ │ 00+16 │ 385306 │ │ │ MUSTANG 117.90 │ 061 │ 114 │ 19000M │ 425 │ 0 │ 00:26 │ 4946 │ │ │ N 39 31.876 W119 39.364 │ 075 │ 175 │ .69 │ 425 │ 0.00 │ 00:26 │ 135306 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .descent pt │ 202 │ │ -23C │ 325 │ │ 00+14 │ 380870 │ │ │ │ 202 │ 103 │ 19000M │ 425 │ 0 │ 00:40 │ 4436 │ │ │ N 38 07.777 W120 54.811 │ 215 │ 278 │ .69 │ 425 │ 0.00 │ 00:40 │ 130870 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 6 ECA/E 107X │ 201 │ │ -12C │ N/A │ │ 00+04 │ 380498 │ │ │ MANTECA 116.00 │ 201 │ 22 │ 13466M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:44 │ 372 │ │ │ N 37 50.016 W121 10.283 │ 215 │ 299 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:44 │ 130498 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 7 SAC/R 099X │ 320 │ │ +9C │ N/A │ │ 00+08 │ 379793 │ │ │ SACRAMENTO 115.20 │ 320 │ 41 │ 3000M │ N/A │ 0 │ 00:52 │ 705 │ │ │ N 38 26.625 W121 33.099 │ 334 │ 340 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:52 │ 129793 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 8 SUU/T 113X │ 224 │ │ +15C │ 250 │ │ 00+05 │ 378388 │ │ │ TRAVIS │ 224 │ 22 │ 74M │ 250 │ 0 │ 00:57 │ 1405 │ │ │ N 38 14.733 W121 56.704 │ 238 │ 362 │ .38 │ 250 │ 0.00 │ 00:57 │ 128388 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 4.2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-10 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-11 01 JUL 13 FOR T RAINING USE O NLYKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-12 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-13 01 JUL 13 KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-13 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-14 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-15 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PIQ/FIQ-T604-SG 1-66-16 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T307-SG 1-67-1 01 OCT 10 

# FTD-307 FE Interior Inspection

I. Purpose

– The purpose of this FTD mission is to allow continued practice of the FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspec tion and the FE’s Interior Inspection.



### II. Duration – 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Flight Training Device B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1CL-2


### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IV, Normal Procedures a. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection b. FE’s Interior InspectionKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-T307-SG 1-67-2 01 OCT 10 

## Objectives

Training objectives practiced during this training mission:

1. Perform Equipment Operation 2. Perform FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection Procedures 3. Perform FE’s Interior Inspection Procedures 4. Perform Fuel Management and Conservation Procedures



## Profile

Instructor may vary profile to meet student needs.

1. FE’s Exterior/Interior Initial Inspection 2. FE’s Interior Inspection



## Mission Briefing

1. Briefing: While in t he FTD the instructor will brief the procedures to be accomplished during this FTD period.

Note: Other normal procedures checklists may be discussed or introduced time permitting.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-1 01 JUL 13 

# FMS Mission Exercise (McGuire)

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - Only McGuire students take this FET lesson. Travis students take the F857 lesson, which includes a Travis scenario. This exercise allows you the opportunity to practice FMS operat ions in a mission type scenario. In addition to practicing those actions t hat you will normally accomplish such as preflight and remote ranging, this exerci se provides the opportunity to observe and monitor certain functions of the FMS. To do this, you will perform specific actions normally accomplished by the Pilots . They include the Direct-to function, holding, and the addition and deletion of specific wayp oints. Remember, these actions directly affect the flight path of the aircraft.



### II. Duration - 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. FMS Mission Exercise (McGuire) Student Guide



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Com puter with FET Desktop Icon B. FMS Mission Exercise (McGuire) Student Guide C. FMS CDU Page Flow Diagram



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Complete all FMS CBT lessons B. Read FET introduction in this lesson.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-2 01 JUL 13 

## Objectives

1. Perform FMS Initialization.

2. Perform FMS preflight tasks.

3. Perform holding procedures.

4. Perform data-for procedures.

5. Perform management of active flight plan.

6. Perform Remote Ranging.

7. Perform Alternate flight planning.

8. Perform FMS approach tasks.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-3 01 JUL 13 

# FMS Emulation Trainer (FET)

Introduction

The Flight Management System Emulation Trainer (FET) pr ovides you with additional training prior to encountering the FMS in the simulator or aircraft. The FET is a parttask trainer with computer simulation emulati ng Control Display Unit (CDU) operation. A flight map and Electronic Horizontal Situati on Indicator (EHSI) disp lay provide a visual reference of what occurs in the ph ysical environment duri ng FMS operation.

FET exercises reinforce procedures learned in the CBT lessons and present you with self-paced activities on the Flight Manage ment System. The St udent Guide includes the steps that direct you thr ough the scheduled exercise acti vities. If you are a Travis student, complete the FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) scenario. If you are a McGuire student, complete the McGuire scenario. This exercise profile a llows you to step through the scenario and check off the tasks as they are completed. An instructor is available to assist you, as necessary. Use your FMS CDU Page Flow diagram as a reference for FMS CDU operations.

FET OVERVIEW

The FET is a desktop computer simulation of the FMS-800 CDU with fully functional keys. The FET allows you to view flight progress with a flight ma p or an EHSI in the map mode. The FET wil l help you to master the page s and functions of the FMS-800 and EHSI prior to running a full scenario or ac tual use in the simu lator or aircraft.

The FET uses a slightly different database t han the aircraft and simulator. For instance, when you load a Standard Instrum ent Departure or Standard Terminal Arrival into your flight plan, the FET may have more or less waypoints than the aircraft or simulator database. Remember, the FET is meant to be an instructional device that reinforces basic functions of the FMS-800, not a complete Flight Management System.

EMULATOR ENVIRONMENT

The FET work space is divided into CDU, flight map window (or optional EHSI map), and simulation control windows.

1. CDU: All buttons are active to touc h except the brightness knob. The CLEAR key blanks the entire scratc hpad if held depressed. Interaction with other aircraft components through the CDU, such as the G PS, is simulated at a basic level.

2. FET Exit: Exiting the FET program through the File menu returns you to the Windows desktop.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-4 01 JUL 13 3. Flight Map : The aircraft can fly anywhere on or off the flight map. The flight map is used to display course legs, waypoi nts, VOR rings, and airport identifier symbols with 20nm rings—all of which are par t of the flight plan. Points not on the flight plan are not shown. As the aircraft moves, it leaves a history track.

Each of these display items can be toggled to draw, or not, through the Plot dropdown menu. Also on the Plot menu is a choice between displaying the waypoint number or its name.

4. Map Scale and Centering: The map scale is the dist ance from top of map to bottom. It can be adjusted through the si mulation controls at the lower edge of the FET window. The default is 20nm, but can be changed by clicking the button for another range. 160nm is usually a good working distance.

While running the simulation, the aircra ft moves toward the edge of the window. Click anywhere on the flight map to center the point clicked. Pressing the

“ Center on AC ” button does a one-time centeri ng of the aircraft. Toggle the

“ Auto on AC ” box to X (the default) to keep the aircra ft from flying out of the map window. “ Center on WP ” places the active waypoint in the center of the map.

5. EHSI and EHSI Control Panel : Click on the MAP/EHSI bu tton to select the EHSI display. The EHSI "map" and "map-ar c" modes are available and normal range selections are possible by moving the cursor over the Mode-Range knob on the EHSI Control Panel. The Cursor, Cursor Reset, Data, and NAV controls are also functional.

6. INU Mode Selector Units: For start up checklist tasks, the three INU controls are simulated through three banks of buttons below the CDU. It is recommended to select each button in turn for each CDU on start up. Skipping from OFF to NAV does not align the INUs.

MACHINE STATES

The “state” of the FET is reported in a sma ll window just below t he CDU, to the left of the simulated mission time. The state of the machine depends on factors such as the Freeze/Run buttons below the CDU.

1. Initialization. The FET starts up and remains in the Initialization state until Run is selected. During initialization, the CDU is fully functional and the aircraft is considered to be on the ground. The ‘Ini tialization’ state is reached again when the aircraft passes the last wa ypoint in the flight plan.

2. Run. Selecting the Run button activates the aircraft on the flight map. It is considered immediately airborne. You c an control the rate at which time passes during RUN by selecting an acceleration fa ctor in the lower left of the FET work space. Be careful of the higher acceleration factors—i t is easy to get behind the aircraft and miss timely performa nce of the FET mission tasks.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-5 01 JUL 13 3. Freeze . During Freeze , CDU control is frozen and the mission stops, but the flight map operates in t he normal manner. To examin e various CDU pages while frozen, you need to toggle back to Run to select another page. The Start 1 LS2 FREEZE selection has nothing to do with the FET Freeze state.

CONTROLLING THE AIRCRAFT

1. Flight Director : All aircraft control is manage d through the CDU FMS 800 pages. The autopilot is engaged, and “FMS Track” is your selected flight mode.

2. Fuel Expenditure : You cannot directly control airspeed, altitude or bank angle (set at 25 E , variable during patterns), but you never run out of fuel.

OPERATIONAL TIPS

1. If you are just practicing, the GPS does not need initializatio n nor do the INUs need aligning for the FET to operate.

2. Whatever is entered on the initial pos ition page becomes the default for the next person who uses the FET.

3. When using the FET map, the cursor position can be used to do quick and dirty remote ranging by holding the right button down while the cursor is on the map. As you slide the cursor around, a range circle appears on the map. Corresponding range and bearing readouts appear in the “Cursor Position” window below.

4. A flight plan you built or modified can be copied waypoint by waypoint through the scratchpad and inserted in to the alternate fli ght plan for saving.

5. If you build an alternate flight plan, you c an save it to the cata log and reload it at a later session. Only flight plans 09 through 40 can be saved.

6. Winds entered for each waypoint become “a ctive” when that wayp oint is active. Crosswind/tailwind is repor ted on the position page.

7. Acceleration of the mission time affects all CDU pages and the mission clock. While using the FET, you can actually control the pass age of time, but only in the forward direction.

8. Freely change the map scale as you fly holding patterns, approaches, etc..

9. Do not forget the Clear History selection on the Plot m enu, which erases your aircraft’s track from the flight map.

10. The Mag/True toggle buttons below the Freeze/R un buttons are provided in case a scenario requires the reference to be switched.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-6 01 JUL 13 11. To shortcut your way back to the Initialization state, perform a DIR to the last flight plan waypoint. If you want this to occur where you started, copy your ‘ 00 ' coordinates to the last wa ypoint before you DIR To.

START UP

To run the FET on a Lear ning Center computer, use the following steps:

1. Log into the computer with your ID and Password.

2. Double click on the FET shortcut icon located on the computer desktop.

3. Click OK after entering the desired airfield identifier.

4. You are now ready to begin training on the FET.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-7 01 JUL 13 

## Mission (McGuire) Scenario

Higher Headquarters Directed (HHD) missi on from McGuire AFB to Denver International Airport, CO. Tanker and receiver refueling will be conducted enroute. Receiver refueling will be conducted on AR -203-SW and tanker re fueling on AR-313-N.



## T PROCEDURE Scenario Study Guide

Reference

PRE-DEPARTURE

Check Initial Position coordinates ( N40 ° 00.935 W074 ° 35.502 ). 1
MSUs - Standby 2

FMS Initialization.

a. Verify FMS Software Version. b. Verify position, time, date, an d GPS reference datum.

c. Clear all messages on annunciation line. d. Initialize GPS. 3

MSUs - Align

a. Enter Initial Position coordinates ( N40 ° 00.9 W074 ° 35.6 ) b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, & 3) c. Press DTK-STS , observe countdown. d. Select ICAO database. (DB B KC-10) 4

RADIO MASTER POWER - ON. 5
Configure TACA N and ADF. a. Nav radio page 1 - ADF - 396.9, TCN1 - 43X. b. Nav radio page 2 - ADF - 396.9, TCN2 - 85Y, mode – BCNINV

. 6

Load and edit the MCGUIRE1 alternate flight plan.

a. Load the MCGUIRE1 flight plan. b. Edit alternate flight plan. Delete AR-203-SW, add AR-111- W

c. Add RVIP and NAV checkpoint. d. Replace the current flight plan.

e. Add the Point Pleasant departu re to the flight plan. f. Renumber the flight plan. 7

Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy. Compare waypoints to Figure 6 and the Waypoint List. 8

MSUs - NAV 9
Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff. 10KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-8 01 JUL 13



## T PROCEDURE Scenario Study Guide

Reference

Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin mission. 11

CLIMB

Compare data on Pilot PSN, Copilot PSN, STR, and FPLN pages. 12

After HTO, ' FREEZE ' the FET and compare di splay with Figure 8, then press RUN

. 13

ENROUTE
Tanker is late, prepare to HOLD at RVIP a. Attach hold at RVIP. b. Monitor Hold Entry wpt 04 hold page. 14

Refueling is canceled. Proceed direct to N37°00°W088°28° (wpt 05 ) 15
After passing wpt 05 , determine ETA to the RVCP for AR-313-N

, N33°49°W094 ° 25° (WPT 10) , using remote ranging. 16

After passing wpt 06 , determine time to go, bearing, and distance to the active waypoint using the STR function key. 17

After passing waypoint 07 : a. Determine time and distance from present position direct to wpt 10

. b. Determine time and distance from present position to wpt 10 via flight plan

. 18

Determine time and distance to KTIK from wpt 12

. 19

Receiver is canceled. Recover at Tinker AFB.

a. Add MLC, TUL & KTIK to flight plan. b. Renumber the flight plan.

c. Delete all waypoints after KTIK. 20

DESCENT

Add SWO as IAF at KTIK. 21

APPROACH

Set Baroset to 30.00

. 22

Monitor the Position page for windshear duri ng the approach and come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes

' Initialization ' and the aircrafts stops. 23KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-9 01 JUL 13 Mission (McGuire) Mission Data

THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT. AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS AND RTE NAME:E:\PFPS\data\Routes\FET1M.rte CFPS VERSION:3.2
FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 1 MAR 1 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE:28 DEC 0

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ MISSION C/S │ CLEARANCE │ Takeoff Time(Z): 23:26 Oper Wt: 250000 │ │ │ │ Land Time (Z) : 07:08 Cargo Wt: 0 │ ├─────────────┤ │ Sched Duration : 07+39 Ramp Fuel: 200000 │ │ ACFT TYPE │ │ FOB/RES : 06+22 Total GW: 450000 │ │ KC-10A │ │ WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 70235 │ │ │ │ Total Dist(nm): 2153.8 Climb Winds:270/035 │ │ │ │ L/O Winds:040/010 │ ├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│ │ AR TRACK: AR313 N ARCT: 03:45 │ │ UHF PRI: 352.6 UHF SEC: 260.2 │ │ BCN: 2/1 N/A TACAN: 50/113 │ │ A/R ALT: 8000 MSL │ │ AVAIL BLK: Between FL180 & FL220 │ ├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 1 KWRI/A │ 360 │ │ +15C │ │ │ 00+03 │ 446000 │ │ │ MC GUIRE AFB │ 360 │ 8 │ 133M │ │ 0 │ 23:26 │ 4000 │ │ │ N 40 00.9 W074 35.6 │ 347 │ 8 │ │ │ 0.00 │ 00:00 │ 196000 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 2 GXU/R058005 043X │ 145 │ │ +3C │ 254 │ 040/010 │ 00+02 │ 445552 │ │ │ MC GUIRE 110.6 │ 143 │ 7 │ 6000M │ 277 │ -2 │ 23:31 │ 448 │ │ │ N 40 04.0 W074 31.0 │ 132 │ 15 │ .43 │ 277 │ 0.00 │ 00:02 │ 195552 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 3 DIXIE/W │ 096 │ │ +3C │ 254 │ 040/010 │ 00+04 │ 444490 │ │ │ DIXIE │ 094 │ 16 │ 6000M │ 277 │ -1 │ 23:35 │ 1062 │ │ │ N 40 05.9 W074 09.8 │ 083 │ 32 │ .43 │ 269 │ 0.00 │ 00:05 │ 194490 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 4 GAMBY/W │ 125 │ │ +3C │ 254 │ 040/010 │ 00+03 │ 443558 │ │ │ GAMBY │ 123 │ 15 │ 6000M │ 277 │ -2 │ 23:38 │ 932 │ │ │ N 40 00.4 W073 52.1 │ 112 │ 46 │ .43 │ 273 │ 0.00 │ 00:08 │ 193558 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 5 MANTA/W │ 126 │ │ +3C │ 254 │ 040/010 │ 00+04 │ 442521 │ │ │ MANTA │ 124 │ 16 │ 6000M │ 277 │ -2 │ 23:41 │ 1037 │ │ │ N 39 54.1 W073 32.5 │ 112 │ 62 │ .43 │ 273 │ 0.00 │ 00:12 │ 192521 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .level off │ 056 │ │ -37C │ N/A │ 250/050 │ 00+09 │ 436318 │ │ │ │ 052 │ 66 │ 26000M │ N/A │ -4 │ 23:51 │ 6203 │ │ │ N 40 43.0 W072 33.9 │ 042 │ 129 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:21 │ 186318 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 6 HTO/R 083X │ 057 │ │ -37C │ 325 │ 250/050 │ 00+02 │ 435686 │ │ │ HAMPTON 113.6 │ 054 │ 17 │ 26000M │ 472 │ -3 │ 23:53 │ 632 │ │ │ N 40 55.1 W072 19.0 │ 043 │ 145 │ .79 │ 516 │ 0.00 │ 00:23 │ 185686 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 7 CSN/R 110X │ 258 │ │ -37C │ 325 │ 250/050 │ 00+41 │ 422249 │ │ │ CASANOVA 116.3 │ 259 │ 291 │ 26000M │ 472 │ 1 │ 00:34 │ 13437 │ │ │ N 38 38.5 W077 51.9 │ 244 │ 436 │ .79 │ 422 │ 0.00 │ 01:05 │ 172249 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 8 HVQ/R210040 121X │ 267 │ │ -37C │ 325 │ 250/050 │ 00+30 │ 412686 │ │ │ CHARLESTON 117.4 │ 266 │ 210 │ 26000M │ 472 │ -1 │ 01:04 │ 9563 │ │ │ N 37 45.3 W082 09.1 │ 257 │ 646 │ .79 │ 422 │ 0.00 │ 01:34 │ 162686 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 9 IIU/R123085 095X │ 261 │ │ -38C │ 325 │ 250/050 │ 00+14 │ 408364 │ │ │ LOUISVILLE 114.8 │ 260 │ 97 │ 27000M │ 479 │ 0 │ 01:17 │ 4322 │ │ │ N 37 18.1 W084 06.3 │ 254 │ 743 │ .80 │ 429 │ 44.00 │ 01:48 │ 158364 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 10 BNA/R055065 088X │ 252 │ │ -40C │ 290 │ 250/050 │ 00+12 │ 404420 │ │ │ NASHVILLE 114.1 │ 252 │ 79 │ 28000M │ 438 │ 0 │ 01:29 │ 3944 │ │ │ N 36 47.1 W085 36.5 │ 247 │ 821 │ .74 │ 388 │ 44.00 │ 02:00 │ 154420 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-10 01 JUL 13

┌──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┐ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 11 BNA/R271042 088X │ 251 │ │ -40C │ 290 │ 250/050 │ 00+16 │ 399332 │ │ │ NASHVILLE 114.1 │ 251 │ 102 │ 28000M │ 438 │ 0 │ 01:45 │ 5088 │ │ │ N 36 07.3 W087 32.9 │ 248 │ 923 │ .74 │ 388 │ 44.00 │ 02:16 │ 149332 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 12 MEM/R046044 122X │ 249 │ │ -40C │ 290 │ 250/050 │ 00+15 │ 394677 │ │ │ MEMPHIS 117.5 │ 250 │ 94 │ 28000M │ 438 │ 0 │ 02:00 │ 4655 │ │ │ N 35 30.9 W089 19.6 │ 248 │ 1017 │ .74 │ 388 │ 0.00 │ 02:30 │ 144677 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .onload │ 248 │ │ -40C │ 290 │ 250/050 │ 00+00 │ 424677 │ │ │ 30000 lbs │ 248 │ 0 │ 28000M │ 438 │ 0 │ 02:00 │ 0 │ │ │ N 35 30.9 W089 19.6 │ 248 │ 1017 │ .74 │ 388 │ 0.00 │ 02:30 │ 174677 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 13 AEX/R 108X │ 213 │ │ -37C │ 325 │ 250/050 │ 00+42 │ 411229 │ │ │ ALEXANDRIA 116.1 │ 217 │ 301 │ 26000M │ 472 │ 4 │ 02:42 │ 13448 │ │ │ N 31 15.4 W092 30.0 │ 213 │ 1318 │ .79 │ 431 │ 0.00 │ 03:12 │ 161229 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .descent pt │ 317 │ │ -37C │ 325 │ 250/050 │ 00+03 │ 410218 │ │ │ │ 312 │ 24 │ 26000M │ 472 │ -6 │ 02:45 │ 1011 │ │ │ N 31 33.8 W092 48.0 │ 320 │ 1342 │ .79 │ 452 │ 0.00 │ 03:15 │ 160218 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 14 AR313N IP 121X │ 317 │ │ -1C │ N/A │ 250/050 │ 00+10 │ 409442 │ │ │ KEIC/R147030 117.4 │ 313 │ 59 │ 8000M │ N/A │ -4 │ 02:55 │ 776 │ │ │ N 32 19.0 W093 33.0 │ 320 │ 1401 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 03:26 │ 159442 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 15 AR313N CP 121X │ 331 │ │ -1C │ 275 │ 250/050 │ 00+20 │ 403407 │ │ │ KEIC/R327070 117.4 │ 322 │ 100 │ 8000M │ 308 │ -9 │ 03:15 │ 6035 │ │ │ N 33 49.2 W094 25.4 │ 334 │ 1501 │ .48 │ 299 │ 18.50 │ 03:46 │ 153407 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼ ────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .orbit 121X │ 150 │ │ -1C │ 275 │ 250/050 │ 00+30 │ 394886 │ │ │ 117.4 │ 160 │ 0 │ 8000M │ 308 │ 9 │ 03:45 │ 8521 │ │ │ N 33 49.2 W094 25.4 │ 154 │ 1501 │ .48 │ 299 │ 18.50 │ 04:16 │ 144886 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 16 AR313N NC 091X │ 331 │ │ -1C │ 200 │ 250/050 │ 00+24 │ 387542 │ │ │ KTUL/R147070 114.4 │ 318 │ 87 │ 8000M │ 225 │ -13 │ 04:09 │ 7344 │ │ │ N 35 08.2 W095 11.2 │ 335 │ 1589 │ .35 │ 214 │ 18.50 │ 04:40 │ 137542 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 17 AR313N EX 091X │ 331 │ │ -1C │ 200 │ 250/050 │ 00+28 │ 379177 │ │ │ KTUL/R327030 114.4 │ 318 │ 100 │ 8000M │ 225 │ -13 │ 04:37 │ 8365 │ │ │ N 36 39.0 W096 03.0 │ 335 │ 1689 │ .35 │ 215 │ 0.00 │ 05:08 │ 129177 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .offload │ 331 │ │ -1C │ 200 │ 250/050 │ 00+00 │ 359177 │ │ │ 20000 lbs │ 318 │ 0 │ 8000M │ 225 │ -13 │ 04:37 │ 0 │ │ │ N 36 39.0 W096 03.0 │ 335 │ 1689 │ .35 │ 215 │ 0.00 │ 05:08 │ 109177 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .level off │ 285 │ │ -27C │ N/A │ 250/050 │ 00+04 │ 356097 │ │ │ │ 285 │ 29 │ 21000M │ N/A │ 0 │ 04:42 │ 3080 │ │ │ N 36 48.9 W096 36.7 │ 290 │ 1718 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 05:12 │ 106097 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 18 GCK/R 080X │ 285 │ │ -27C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+41 │ 346797 │ │ │ GARDEN CITY 113.3 │ 279 │ 208 │ 21000M │ 341 │ -5 │ 05:23 │ 9300 │ │ │ N 37 55.1 W100 43.5 │ 290 │ 1925 │ .56 │ 301 │ 0.00 │ 05:54 │ 96797 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 19 RYLIE/W │ 288 │ │ -27C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+11 │ 344260 │ │ │ RYLIE │ 282 │ 58 │ 21000M │ 341 │ -6 │ 05:35 │ 2537 │ │ │ N 38 20.2 W101 49.7 │ 296 │ 1983 │ .56 │ 305 │ 0.00 │ 06:05 │ 94260 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 20 SELLS/W │ 287 │ │ -27C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+14 │ 341226 │ │ │ SELLS │ 281 │ 70 │ 21000M │ 341 │ -6 │ 05:48 │ 3034 │ │ │ N 38 49.6 W103 10.1 │ 295 │ 2053 │ .56 │ 304 │ 0.00 │ 06:19 │ 91226 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 21 PRAGG/W │ 305 │ │ -25C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+02 │ 340888 │ │ │ PRAGG │ 297 │ 8 │ 20000M │ 336 │ -8 │ 05:50 │ 338 │ │ │ N 38 55.0 W103 17.4 │ 314 │ 2061 │ .55 │ 311 │ 0.00 │ 06:20 │ 90888 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-11 01 JUL 13

┌──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┐ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 22 KIPPY/W │ 304 │ │ -25C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+03 │ 340319 │ │ │ KIPPY │ 297 │ 13 │ 20000M │ 336 │ -8 │ 05:52 │ 569 │ │ │ N 39 04.3 W103 29.8 │ 314 │ 2074 │ .55 │ 311 │ 0.00 │ 06:23 │ 90319 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 23 CLEVE/W │ 304 │ │ -25C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+05 │ 339307 │ │ │ CLEVE │ 296 │ 24 │ 20000M │ 336 │ -8 │ 05:57 │ 1012 │ │ │ N 39 20.7 W103 51.9 │ 314 │ 2098 │ .55 │ 311 │ 0.00 │ 06:28 │ 89307 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 24 DANDD/W │ 304 │ │ -23C │ 250 │ 250/050 │ 00+01 │ 339105 │ │ │ DANDD │ 296 │ 5 │ 19000M │ 331 │ -8 │ 05:58 │ 202 │ │ │ N 39 23.9 W103 56.3 │ 313 │ 2102 │ .54 │ 305 │ 0.00 │ 06:29 │ 89105 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 25 HOKER/W │ 304 │ │ -7C │ 250 │ 010/010 │ 00+07 │ 337443 │ │ │ HOKER │ 305 │ 34 │ 11000M │ 293 │ 2 │ 06:05 │ 1662 │ │ │ N 39 47.3 W104 28.5 │ 313 │ 2136 │ .46 │ 287 │ 0.00 │ 06:36 │ 87443 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 26 DVV/R 094X │ 303 │ │ -7C │ 250 │ 010/010 │ 00+02 │ 336986 │ │ │ MILE HIGH 114.7 │ 305 │ 9 │ 11000M │ 293 │ 2 │ 06:07 │ 457 │ │ │ N 39 53.7 W104 37.5 │ 313 │ 2146 │ .46 │ 287 │ 0.00 │ 06:38 │ 86986 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 27 DEN/E 126X │ 189 │ │ -7C │ 222 │ 010/010 │ 00+01 │ 336735 │ │ │ DENVER 117.9 │ 189 │ 5 │ 11000M │ 261 │ 0 │ 06:08 │ 251 │ │ │ N 39 48.8 W104 39.6 │ 199 │ 2151 │ .41 │ 271 │ 0.00 │ 06:39 │ 86735 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .delay 126X │ 189 │ │ -7C │ 222 │ 010/010 │ 00+45 │ 323235 │ │ │ 117.9 │ 189 │ 0 │ 11000M │ 261 │ 0 │ 06:53 │ 13500 │ │ │ N 39 48.8 W104 39.6 │ 199 │ 2151 │ .41 │ 271 │ 0.00 │ 07:24 │ 73235 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼ ────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 28 KDEN/A │ 344 │ │ +4C │ │ 010/010 │ 00+15 │ 320235 │ │ │ DENVER INTL │ 344 │ 3 │ 5431M │ │ 1 │ 07:08 │ 3000 │ │ │ N 39 51.5 W104 40.0 │ 354 │ 2154 │ │ │ 0.00 │ 07:39 │ 70235 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-12 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-13 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-14 01 JUL 13 

### FLIGHT PROFILEKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-15 01 JUL 13 

### Mission (McGuire) Scenario Study Guide

PRE-DEPARTURE

1. Check Initial Position coordinates. a. Verify/enter airport waypoint KWRI

. OR b. Verify/enter N40 ° 00.935 W074 ° 35.502 in Lat/Long window.

2. MSUs - STBY
a. Select STBY on MSU 1, 2, and 3.

3. FMS - initialization.

a. Verify FMS Software version – “XXXXXXXXXXXXX.”

b. Verify position, time, date and GPS refe rence datum. If initial position coordinates are incorrect, re-enter t he coordinates using scratchpad and LS1 or LS5. NOTE: Items 1-7 are tasks that will normally be accomplished by either the Pilots or Flight Engineers prior to th e "Before Start” ch ecklist. They do not occur in the same sequence as described in your tech order, but are arranged to allow practice moving from one page to another. Accomplish all tasks regardless of crew position to ga in familiarity with CDU operations.

< Press STAT function key.

< Select CDU3 GO Æ (LS7).

< Verify VSN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. 

## L Steps



## L Steps < Press IDX function key.

< Select START (LS1).

Fi gure 1. Start 1 Position/Time Page [N40 ° 00.935 W074 ° 35.502] start 1 psn / time

→ FREEZE UTC DISPLAY ← DA/MO/YR UTC [01/ 05/ 01] [1022 : 35]

<< √ inu1 >> WGS-84

3 [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-16 01 JUL 13 c. Review/clear all annunciation line messages. Press CLR key until all messages are cleared.
d. Access the Start 2 page (scroll vertical) and initialize the GPS (LS1).

4. MSUs - ALIGN

a. Enter Initial Position coordinat es on INU1 Control page.

b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, and 3).

c. Press DTK-STS (LS1) to observe the beginning of status countdown on line 4.

d . Return to the start pages and sele ct the appropriate ICAO database cartridge. INAV

INU 3 INAV INU 2 INAV INU 1 INAV

INU CONTROL

PAGE UPDATE PAGE < Access INU1 INAV page (---1).

< Scroll laterally to INU Control page. Press LS4 INU CONTROL

< Press LS2 (adjacent to POSITION ).

< Enter initial position latitude in the scratchpad (N4000.9).

< Press the line select key adjacent to ENTER (LS6).

< Enter initial position longitude in the scratchpad (W07435.6).

< Press the line select key adjacent to ENTER (LS6).

< Clear the scratchpad before continuing. 

## L Steps

Figure 2. INU Control Page Access

< Press IDX function key.

< Press LS1, START

.

< Vertical scroll to “start 3 database”.

< Select DB B KC-10 as the ICAO database.

< Vertical scroll to “start 4 mission”.

< Select MSN A for the mission data cartridge to be used. 

## L Steps

NOTE: In the aircraft this procedure is normally performed on all three CDUs and their associated INUs. Only CDU 2 can enter present position into INU 2, and only CDU 3 can set INU 3.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-17 01 JUL 13 5. RADIO MASTER POWER - ON

6. Configure TA CAN and ADF.

a. Access Navigation Radi o page 1 (NAV Function Key).

(1) Tune ADF1 to 396.9 (LS5). (2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF

. (3) Set TACAN1 to 43X (LS7). (4) Verify TR mode (LS8). (5) Copy ADF1 frequency into scratchpad (LS5).

b. Access Navigation Radio Page 2 (lateral scroll).

(1) Paste ADF1 frequency (396.9) into ADF2 (LS5). (2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF. (3) Set TACAN2 to 85Y (LS7). (4) Set mode to BCNINV

.

7. Due to weather in the area, refueling in AR-203-SW is canceled. Ref ueling will now take place in AR-111-W. Edit the alter nate flight plan by del eting AR-203-SW from the MCGUIRE1 flight plan and adding AR-111-W.

a. Access Start 5 Flight Plan/Load. 

## L Step < Access Master Power page through IDX.

< Se lect POWER LS6.

< Turn on all navigation radios with LS5.

NOTE: In the aircraft, you continue to update the TACAN and ADF for navigation backup. Because of time constraints, th is is not done with the FET. You may, however, enter new TACAN channels and ADF frequencies as time permits.



## L Step < Press IDX function key.

< Press LS1

< Vertical scroll to “start 5 fpln/load”.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-18 01 JUL 13 INDEX 1

IDX

START1 PSN/TIME

START 2 NAV/INIT

START 3 DATABASE

START 4 MISSION

START 5 FPLN/LOAD

b. Access Alternate Flight Plan Catalog (ALTN CATLG) page on LS6. SELECT ALTN LOAD appears in scratchpad.

c. Select MCGUIRE1 (LS3). After load, compare your CDU to sample display in figure 4. Figure 3. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page Access

Figure 4. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page start 5 fpln/load [MCGUIRE1] ALTN CATLG → fltplan.cr

→ ERASE FPLN REPLACE ←

→ ERASE FLT/DATA LOAD ←

3 [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-19 01 JUL 13 d. Change AR-203-SW to AR-111-W by editing the Alternate Flight Plan.

e. Delete AR-203-SW. Use Minus key and LS key next to each waypoint.)

RVIP N37°44 W082°09 (wpt 04) RVCP N37°18 W084°06 (wpt 05) CK PT N36°47 W085°37 (wpt 06) CK PT N36°28 W086°36 (wpt 07) CK PT N36°09 W087°33 (wpt 08) EAR N35°33 W089°18 (wpt 09)

f. Add AR-111-W (RVCP and EAR point) after CSN.

g. Add N36°56 W086°23 (RVIP) as wpt 04 and NAV checkpoint N36°50 W090°11 as waypoint 06 (Figure 5). < Press EDIT function key.

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN)

.

< Select LS4 (WAYPOINTS)

. 

## L Steps

NOTE: After deleting RVIP (wpt 04), th e RVCP (wpt 05) will move up to become waypoint 04.



## L Steps < Type AR-111-W in scratchpad.

< Press the line select key after CSN

.

< RVCP and EAR appear in waypoints list after CSN

.

Figure 5. Alternate Flight Plan Page 03 CSN → altn fpln wpts
04 N36°56 W086°23 →

05 N37°00 W088°28 P →

06 N36°50 W090°11 →

[↔ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-20 01 JUL 13 h. REPLACE current flight plan with alter nate flight plan and confirm.

i. Add the Point Pleasant (PTPL4) departure to the flight plan.

j. Renumber flight plan. 

## L Steps < Press EDIT function key.

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN)

.

< Select LS3 (REPLACE FPLN) and confirm LS3.

< Press EDIT function key.

< Select LS6 (SIDS)

.

< Type KWRI in scratchpad.

< Press LS1 to access SIDS.

< Press LS3 for PTPL4.

< Select LS7 for RW24.

< Press LS5 to select transition.

< Press LS4 to select HTO

.

< Press LS7 to insert flight plan.

< Press LS3 to insert SID before HTO.

< Removed (DISCONTINUITY 02) by entering a minus (-) in scratchpad and pressing the LS3.

< Scroll down to wpt 05 ( HTO ).

< Remove HTO by entering minus (-) in scratchpad and pressing the line select key adjacent to HTO. 

## L Steps

NOTE: The SID points are added based on the FMS 800 database stored in the cartridge. A DISCONTINUI TY appears whenever a SID is inserted. The discontinuity is shown in the flight pl an with its associated waypoint number.

< Press EDIT function key.

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page.

< Press LS5

.

< Press LS5 again to confirm renumbering of flight plan. 

## L Steps NOTE: The navigation database is updated often and is affected by NOTAMS . If the desired SID is not available, skip this st ep and realize waypoint numbering may not corresp ond with the figures in this lesson.KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-21 01 JUL 13 8. Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy.

WAYPOINT LIST

04 N36°56 W086°23 09 N3 2°19 W093°33

05 N3 7°00 W088°28 10 N33°49 W094°25

06 N36°50 W090°11 11 N35°08 W095°11

07 N36°33 W092°12 12 N36°39 W096°03

08 AEX 13 GCK 

## L Steps < Press FPLN function key.

< Scroll through waypoints.

< Compare waypoints to Figure 6 and Waypoint List, realizing waypoints may not correspond if the SID did not load.

Figure 6. Flight Plan (First Page)

CRS [216] ° [OFFST] AUTO: ↓ ↓ fpln
01 N40 ° 01 W074 ° 36 → 075/118nm 02 HTO →

03 CSN →

↓ [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-22 01 JUL 13 NOTE: The following item is accomplished during the “Before Start” checklist.

9. MSUs to NAV a. Access the INU1 Control page (Check status at 02.) b. Note status goes to 01.

10. Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff ( PSN Key).

11. Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin the mission.

CLIMB 12. During climb out, compare data on the Pilot and Copilot Position (PSN ), Steer ( STR ), and Flight Plan ( FPLN ) pages. 

## L Steps < Press INAV function key.

< Access INU1 INAV page ( ---1 ).

< Press LS4 ( INU Control ).

< Set INU1, 2, and 3 to NAV

.

NOTE: The following item is accomplis hed during the “Before Takeoff” checklist.

Figure 7. Position Page

NOTE: Autopilot 1 is in CMD and FMS TRACK is annunciated in the FMAs as soon as airborne. N40 ° 00.933 W074 ° 35.617 INU1/GPS pilot psn
TRK 013 ° VAR W13 ° GS 000 TAS 000
WIND 360 ° T /0 ↓ 0 0 ←

SAT +15 ° C

→ [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-23 01 JUL 13 13. After the aircraft crosses HTO and tracks to wpt 03, Press FPLN, FREEZE the FET and compare your display with Figure 8, then press RUN

.

ENROUTE 14. Tanker is late; prepare to HOLD at RVIP.
a. Attach hold at the RVIP, N36°56 W086 ° 23 (left turn, 11⁄2-minute legs).

EDIT

FPLN EDIT 1

HOLD NOTE: Your course and distance info rmation may differ slightly depending on when the 'freeze' was initiated. Experi ment with the accelerator factors and scale while enroute to the RVIP (wpt 04). Y ou may leave these in any mode you desire.

Figure 8. Flight Plan Page

< Access Hold page (EDIT, LS5.)

< Change to LEFT turn (LS2).

< Change pattern length to 11⁄2 min legs. Insert 130 (minutes and seconds) in the scratchpad and press LS3.

< Press LS8 to insert hold in the flight plan. The CDU automatically displays Flight Plan page.)

< Press line select key at right or left of N36o56 W086o23

. 

## L Steps

Figure 9. Hold Page Access CRS[256] ° [OFFST] AUTO: ↓ ↓ fpln 03 CSN → 270°/404nm 04 N36°56 W086°23 →

05 N37°00 W088°28 →

3 [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-24 01 JUL 13 b. Monitor holding entry from the Waypoint 4 Hold page.

15. Receiver is canceled. Proceed direct N37°00 W088°28 (wpt 05/RVCP).

16. When passing wpt 05, determine the ETA vi a the flight plan at the RVCP for AR313-N, N33°49 W094°25 (wpt 10), using remote ranging.

17. After passing waypoint 06, determine the time to go (TTG), bearing and distance to the active waypoint (wpt 07) using the STR function key. < Press FLPN Function Key

< Press H (LS6).

< Press H again (LS6) to display the Hold page. 

## L Steps

< Press DIR Function Key.

< Press line select key adjacent to N37o00 W088o28. 

## L Steps

< Press DATA Function Key.

< Press line select key adjacent to N33o49 W094o25 (waypoint 10).

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN

. 

## L Steps

Figure 10. Present Position Via Flight Plan

NOTE: The ETA reflects the projected ti me of arrival at the RVCP along the flight plan path. In the aircraft, check the ETA against the RVCT. :PPSN VIA FPLN from-to data
10 N33°49 W094°25 → N33°49.000 094°24.983 666nm ETE 2:38.1

ETA 1356:48

↔ [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-25 01 JUL 13 18. After passing waypoint 07:

a. Determine the time and di stance from present position direct to waypoint 10. Figure 11. Pilot Steer Page



## L Steps < Press FPLN Function Key.

< Press DATA Function Key.

< Select N33°49 W094°25

.

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN Direct.

Figure 12. Present Position Direct

NOTE: You will see the ETE count DOWN if 'data for' PPSN DIRECT is performed with wpt 09 ahead of you. Once past wpt 10 on the way to wpt 07, the ETE will count UP. :INU1 / GPS CMD GS: - - - ↓ to ↓ pilot str N36°33 W092°12 ETA 2323 DTK 259° TTG 0:21:55 TRK 259° 259 / 92.4

XTK R0.00nm DA: L0.00°

0 [ ]

:PPSN DIRECT from-to data 10 [N33°49 W094°25] N33°49.000 W094°24.983 212° / 191nm ETE 0:45.4

ETA 1356:48

↔ [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-26 01 JUL 13 c. Determine the time and distance from present position to waypoint 10 via the flight plan.

19. The Command Post notifies yo u that after refueling you ar e directed to Tinker AFB. The Pilot requests time and di stance from wpt 12 (EAR) to KTIK

. < Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN. 

## L Step

Figure 13. PPSN VIA FPLN



## L Steps < Press FPLN function key.

< Press DATA function key.

< Scroll to and select wpt 13.

then

< Type KTIK in scratchpad.

< Press line select key next to wpt 13

.

Figure 14. From-to Data :PPSN VIA FPLN from-to data 10 [N33°49 W094°25] N33°49.000 W094°24.983 493nm ETE 1:57.1

ETA 1356:41

↔ [ ]

:12 N42°34 W120°49 from-to data [KTIK ] N35°24.884 W097°23.193 215°/96.2nm ETE 0:22.8

ETA 1503:34

↔ [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-27 01 JUL 13 20. Receiver is canceled. You are to recover at KTIK via McAlester ( MLC ) and Tulsa ( TUL ).

a. Add MLC, TUL , and KTIK to the flight plan after waypoint 09.

b. Renumber the flight plan.

c. Delete all waypoints after KTIK. < Press FPLN

.

< Enter MLC in scratchpad.

< Insert by pressing line select key adjacent to waypoint 10.

< Select MLC VORTAC

.

< Repeat steps for TUL and KTIK

. 

## L Steps



## L Steps < Press EDIT function key.

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page.

< Press LS5

.

< Press LS5 again to confirm renumbering of flight plan.

< Type minus (-) in scratchpad.

< Press line select key next to point to be deleted. 

## L Steps

Figure 15. Modified Flight Plan

10 MLC →

11 TUL →

12 KTIK →

*END

3 [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-28 01 JUL 13 DESCENT

21. Add SWO as Initial Approach Fix for Tinker AFB.

APPROACH

22. Set Baroset to 30.00

. 

## L Steps < Type SWO in scratchpad.

< Press line select key next to KTIK

.

< Select key at LS1

.

Figure 16. Selecting the Fix

Figure 17. Adding the Fix



## L Steps < Press STR function key.

< Scroll to VNAV STR page.

< Type 30.00 in scratchpad.

< Select LS4

. ← SWO-KZ-VOR-DME 108.40 select 01-02 / 02 N36°1327.4 W097°0452.5

← SWO-KZ-FIX

N36°1327.4 W097°0452.5

3 [SWO ]

11 TUL → fpln 11A SWO →

12 KTIK →

*END

3 [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-29 01 JUL 13 23. Monitor the Position page for windshear during the appr oach and come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes 'Initialization' and the aircraft stops. Figure 18. Set Baroset

Mission Complete 20000ft ↓ to ↓ pilot vnav str

BAROSET [30.00] in:

3 [ ]KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FIQ-F856-SG 1-68-30 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# FMS Mission Exercise (Travis)

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - Only Travis students take this FET lesson. McGuire students take the F856 lesson, which includes a McGuire scenario. This exercise allows you the opportunity to practice with the FMS operations in a mission type scenario. In addition to practicing th ose actions that you will normally accomplish, such as preflight and remote ranging, this exercise provides the opportunity to observe and monitor certain f unctions of the FMS. To do this, you will perform specific actions normally acco mplished by the Pilots. They include the Direct-to function, holding, and th e addition and deletion of specific waypoints. Remember, these actions direct ly affect the flight path of the aircraft.



### II. Duration - 2.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) Student Guide



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Com puter with FET Desktop Icon B. FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) Student Guide C. FMS CDU Page Flow Diagram



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Complete all FMS CBT lessons B. Read FET introduction in this lesson.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Objectives

1. Perform FMS Initialization.

2. Perform FMS preflight tasks.

3. Perform holding procedures.

4. Perform data-for procedures.

5. Perform management of active flight plan.

6. Perform Remote Ranging.

7. Perform Alternate flight planning.

8. Perform FMS approach tasks.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# FMS Emulation Trainer (FET)

Introduction

The Flight Management System Emulation Trainer (FET) pr ovides you with additional training prior to encountering the FMS in the simulator or aircraft. The FET is a parttask trainer with computer simulation emulati ng Control Display Unit (CDU) operation. A flight map and Electronic Horizontal Situati on Indicator (EHSI) disp lay provide a visual reference of what occurs in the ph ysical environment duri ng FMS operation.

FET exercises reinforce procedures learned in the CBT lessons and present you with self-paced activities on the Flight Manage ment System. The St udent Guide includes the steps that direct you thr ough the scheduled exercise acti vities. If you are a Travis student, complete the FMS Mission Exercise (Travis) scenario. If you are a McGuire student, complete the McGuire scenario. This exercise profile allows you to step through the scenario and check off the tasks as they are completed. An instructor is available to assist you, as necessary. Use your FMS CDU Page Flow diagram as a reference for FMS CDU operations.

FET OVERVIEW

The FET is a desktop computer simulation of the FMS-800 CDU with fully functional keys. The FET allows you to view flight progress with a flight ma p or an EHSI in the map mode. The FET wil l help you to master the page s and functions of the FMS-800 and EHSI prior to running a full scenario or ac tual use in the simu lator or aircraft.

The FET uses a slightly different database t han the aircraft and simulator. For instance, when you load a Standard Instrum ent Departure or Standard Terminal Arrival into your flight plan, the FET may have more or less waypoints than the aircraft or simulator database. Remember, the FET is meant to be an instructional device that reinforces basic functions of the FMS-800, not a complete Flight Management System.

EMULATOR ENVIRONMENT

The FET work space is divided into CDU, flight map window (or optional EHSI map), and simulation control windows.

1. CDU: All buttons are active to touc h except the brightness knob. The CLEAR key blanks the entire scratc hpad if held depressed. Interaction with other aircraft components through the CDU, such as the G PS, is simulated at a basic level.

2. FET Exit: Exiting the FET program through the File menu returns you to the Windows desktop.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

3. Flight Map : The aircraft can fly anywhere on or off the flight map. The flight map is used to display course legs, waypoints, VOR rings, and airport identifier symbols with 20nm rings—all of which are par t of the flight plan. Points not on the flight plan are not shown. As the aircraft moves, it leaves a history track.

Each of these display items can be toggled to draw, or not, through the Plot dropdown menu. Also on the Plot menu is a choice between displaying the waypoint number or its name.

4. Map Scale and Centering: The map scale is the dist ance from top of map to bottom. It can be adjusted through the simu lation controls at the lower edge of the FET window. The default is 20nm, but can be changed by clicking the button for another range. 160nm is usually a good working distance.

While running the simulation, the aircra ft moves toward the edge of the window. Click anywhere on the flight map to center the point clicked. Pressing the

“ Center on AC ” button does a one-time centeri ng of the aircraft. Toggle the

“ Auto on AC ” box to X (the default) to keep the aircra ft from flying out of the map window. “ Center on WP ” places the active waypoint in the center of the map.

5. EHSI and EHSI Control Panel : Click on the MAP/EHSI bu tton to select the EHSI display. The EHSI "map" and "map-ar c" modes are available and normal range selections are possible by moving the cursor over the Mode-Range knob on the EHSI Control Panel. The Cursor, Cursor Reset, Data, and NAV controls are also functional.

6. INU Mode Selector Units: For start up checklist tasks, the three INU controls are simulated through three banks of buttons below the CDU. It is recommended to select each button in turn for each CDU on start up. Skipping from OFF to NAV does not align the INUs.

MACHINE STATES

The “state” of the FET is reported in a sma ll window just below t he CDU, to the left of the simulated mission time. The state of the machine depends on factors such as the Freeze/Run buttons below the CDU.

1. Initialization. The FET starts up and remains in the Initialization state until Run is selected. During initialization, the CDU is fully functional and the aircraft is considered to be on the ground. The ‘Ini tialization’ state is reached again when the aircraft passes the last wa ypoint in the flight plan.

2. Run. Selecting the Run button activates the aircraft on the flight map. It is considered immediately airborne. You c an control the rate at which time passes during RUN by selecting an acceleration fa ctor in the lower left of the FET work space. Be careful of the higher acceleration factors—i t is easy to get behind the aircraft and miss timely performa nce of the FET mission tasks.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

3. Freeze . During Freeze , CDU control is frozen and the mission stops, but the flight map operates in t he normal manner. To examin e various CDU pages while frozen, you need to toggle back to Run to select another page. The Start 1 LS2 FREEZE selection has nothing to do with the FET Freeze state.

CONTROLLING THE AIRCRAFT

1. Flight Director : All aircraft control is manage d through the CDU FMS 800 pages. The autopilot is engaged, and “FMS Track” is your selected flight mode.

2. Fuel Expenditure : You cannot directly control airspeed, altitude or bank angle (set at 25 E , variable during patterns), but you never run out of fuel.

OPERATIONAL TIPS

1. If you are just practicing, the GPS does not need initializatio n nor do the INUs need aligning for the FET to operate.

2. Whatever is entered on the initial pos ition page becomes the default for the next person who uses the FET.

3. When using the FET map, the cursor position can be used to do quick and dirty remote ranging by holding the right button down while the cursor is on the map. As you slide the cursor around, a range circle appears on the map. Corresponding range and bearing readouts appear in the “Cursor Position” window below.

4. A flight plan you built or modified can be copied waypoint by waypoint through the scratchpad and inserted in to the alternate fli ght plan for saving.

5. If you build an alternate flight plan, you c an save it to the cata log and reload it at a later session. Only flight plans 09 through 40 can be saved.

6. Winds entered for each waypoint become “a ctive” when that wayp oint is active. Crosswind/tailwind is repor ted on the position page.

7. Acceleration of the mission time affects all CDU pages and the mission clock. While using the FET, you can actually control the pass age of time, but only in the forward direction.

8. Freely change the map scale as you fly holding patterns, approaches, etc..

9. Do not forget the Clear History selection on the Plot m enu, which erases your aircraft’s track from the flight map.

10. The Mag/True toggle buttons below the Freeze/R un buttons are provided in case a scenario requires the reference to be switched.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

11. To shortcut your way back to the Initialization state, perform a DIR to the last flight plan waypoint. If you want this to occur where you started, copy your ‘ 00 ' coordinates to the last wa ypoint before you DIR To.

START UP

To run the FET on a Learni ng Center computer, us e the following steps:

1. Log into the computer with your ID and Password.

2. Double click on the FET shortcut icon located on the computer desktop.

3. Click OK after entering the desired airfield identifier.

4. You are now ready to begin training on the FET.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Mission (Travis) Scenario

Higher Headquarters Directed (HHD) mission from Travis AFB to San Francisco International Airport, CA. An Tanker Anchor Pattern (AR-645) is in cluded in the flight plan, but the orbit will not be flown. Receiv er air refueling will be conducted on AR-8B.



## T PROCEDURE Scenario Study Guide

Reference

PRE-DEPARTURE
Check Initial Position coordinates ( N38°15.761W121°55.648 ). 1
MSUs - Standby 2

FMS Initialization.

a. Verify FMS Software Version. b. Verify position, time, date, an d GPS reference datum.

c. Clear all messages on annunciation line. d. Initialize GPS. 3

MSUs - Align

a. Enter Initial Position coordinates ( N38°15.8 W121°55.6 ) b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, & 3) c. Press DTK-STS , observe countdown. d. Select ICAO database. (DB B KC-10) 4

RADIO MASTER POWER - ON

. 5
Configure TACA N and ADF. a. Nav radio page 1 - ADF - 400, TCN1 - 113X. b. Nav radio page 2 - ADF - 400, TCN2 - 94Y, mode - BCNINV

. 6

Load and edit the TRAVIS1 alternate flight plan.

a. Load the TRAVIS1 flight plan. b. Edit alternate flight plan. Delete AR-8B, add AR-7B.

c. Add RVIP and NAV checkpoint. d. Replace the current flight plan.

e. Add the TEALL1 departure to the flight plan.
f. Renumber the flight plan. 7

Check flight plan waypoints for ac curacy. Compare waypoints to Figure 6 and the Waypoint List. 8

MSUs - NAV 9
Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff. 10

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



##  PROCEDURE Scenario Study Guide

Reference

Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin mission. 11

CLIMB

Compare data on Pilot PSN, Copilot PSN, STR, and FPLN pages. 12

After ILA, ' FREEZE ' the FET and compare display with Figure 8, then press RUN

. 13

ENROUTE
Tanker is late, prepare to HOLD at RVIP
a. Attach hold at RVIP. b. Monitor Hold Entry wpt 04 hold page. 14

Refueling is canceled. Proceed direct to N40°44 W120°48 (wpt 06)

. 15
After passing wpt 06, determine ETA to the RVCP for AR-645

, N42°34 W120°49° (WPT 10) , using remote ranging. 16

After passing wpt 07, determine time to go, bearing, and distance to the active waypoint using the STR function key. 17

After passing waypoint 07: a. Determine time and dist ance from present position direct to wpt 09. b. Determine time and distanc e from present position to wpt 09 via flight plan

. 18

Determine time and distance to KTCM from wpt 14

. 19

Receiver is canceled. Recover at McChord AFB.

a. Add DSD, BTG, & KTCM to flight plan. b. Renumber the flight plan.

c. Delete all waypoints after KTCM. 20

DESCENT

Add TOU as IAF at KTCM. 21

APPROACH

Set Baroset to 30.00

. 22

Monitor the Position page for windshear during the approach and come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes

' Initialization ' and the aircrafts stops. 23

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Mission (Travis) Mission Data

***THE ACCURACY OF THIS AFMSS/PFPS COMPUTER FLIGHT PLAN DEPENDS UPON THE ACCURACY *** *****OF THE NIMA NAVIGATIONAL DATA BASE, THE WEATHER DATA BASE, AND USER INPUT.****** *******************AIRCREWS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR FUEL REQUIREMENTS ******************* **********************AND THE ROUTE OF FLIGHT THEY FILE AND FLY********************** RTE NAME:C:\ FMSMSNEXERTRAVIS. CFPS VERSION:4.2 FLIGHT PLAN CREATED: 28 MAY 13 NIMA DAFIF EFF DATE:30 MAY 13

┌─────────────┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ MISSION C/S │ CLEARANCE │ Takeoff Time(Z): 00:00 Oper Wt: 250000 │ │ │ │ Land Time (Z) : 04:00 Cargo Wt: 0 │ ├─────────────┤ │ Sched Duration : 03+57 Ramp Fuel: 150000 │ │ ACFT TYPE │ │ FOB/RES : 06+33 Total GW: 400000 │ │ KC-10A │ │ WARP Drag Index: 0.00 Ldg Fuel: 72619 │ │ │ │ Total Dist(nm): 1179.0 Climb Winds:260/040 │ │ │ │ L/O Winds:275/030 │ ├─────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────│ │ AR TRACK: AR8B, ARCT: 00:45 │ │ UHF PRI: 305.5 UHF SEC: 319.5 │ │ BCN: 4/1 N/A TACAN: 32/95 │ │ A/R ALT: FL250 │ │ AVAIL BLK: Between FL240 & FL330 │ ├──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┤ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ DRIFT │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 1 KSUU/A │ 032 │ │ +15C │ │ │ 00+03 │ 396000 │ │ │ TRAVIS AFB │ 032 │ 8 │ 62M │ │ 0 │ 00:00 │ 4000 │ │ │ N 38 15.77 W121 55.65 │ 047 │ 8 │ │ │ 0.00 │ 00:00 │ 146000 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 2 TEALL/W 113X │ 212 │ │ -8C │ N/A │ │ 00+04 │ 393070 │ │ │ SUU/T212007 │ 216 │ 16 │ 11554M │ N/A │ 4 │ 00:07 │ 2930 │ │ │ N 38 10.13 W122 03.40 │ 227 │ 24 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:04 │ 143070 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 3 ILA/R169047 091X │ 314 │ │ -16C │ N/A │ │ 00+01 │ 392090 │ │ │ WILLIAMS 114.4 │ 309 │ 9 │ 15793M │ N/A │ -5 │ 00:08 │ 980 │ │ │ N 38 17.57 W122 08.91 │ 330 │ 33 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:05 │ 142090 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .level off │ 352 │ │ -35C │ N/A │ 275/030 │ 00+04 │ 389798 │ │ │ │ 347 │ 28 │ 25000M │ N/A │ -4 │ 00:12 │ 2292 │ │ │ N 38 45.08 W122 04.64 │ 007 │ 61 │ N/A │ N/A │ 0.00 │ 00:09 │ 139798 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 4 ILA/R 091X │ 351 │ │ -35C │ 325 │ 275/030 │ 00+03 │ 389021 │ │ │ WILLIAMS 114.4 │ 348 │ 19 │ 25000M │ 465 │ -4 │ 00:14 │ 777 │ │ │ N 39 04.27 W122 01.63 │ 007 │ 80 │ .77 │ 465 │ 0.00 │ 00:11 │ 139021 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 5 AR8B IP 104X │ 286 │ │ -35C │ 290 │ 280/045 │ 00+12 │ 385858 │ │ │ KRBL/R227059 115.7 │ 283 │ 73 │ 25000M │ 418 │ -2 │ 00:26 │ 3163 │ │ │ N 39 42.00 W123 23.00 │ 301 │ 153 │ .69 │ 376 │ 0.00 │ 00:23 │ 135858 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .auto delay 104X │ 285 │ │ -35C │ 325 │ 280/045 │ 00+04 │ 384591 │ │ │ 115.7 │ 283 │ 0 │ 25000M │ 465 │ -2 │ 00:30 │ 1267 │ │ │ N 39 42.00 W123 23.00 │ 301 │ 153 │ .77 │ 423 │ 0.00 │ 00:27 │ 134591 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 6 AR8B CP 083X │ 333 │ │ -37C │ 290 │ 280/050 │ 00+15 │ 380634 │ │ │ KOED/R191079 113.6 │ 327 │ 100 │ 26000M │ 425 │ -6 │ 00:45 │ 3957 │ │ │ N 41 20.00 W123 48.00 │ 349 │ 253 │ .71 │ 404 │ 44.00 │ 00:42 │ 130634 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 7 AR8B NC 083X │ 343 │ │ -37C │ 290 │ 280/050 │ 00+10 │ 377643 │ │ │ KOED/R247040 113.6 │ 337 │ 66 │ 26000M │ 425 │ -7 │ 00:55 │ 2991 │ │ │ N 42 26.00 W123 48.00 │ 360 │ 319 │ .71 │ 413 │ 44.00 │ 00:52 │ 127643 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 8 AR8B EX 076X │ 343 │ │ -37C │ 290 │ 280/050 │ 00+15 │ 373091 │ │ │ KEUG/R250025 112.9 │ 336 │ 101 │ 26000M │ 425 │ -7 │ 01:09 │ 4552 │ │ │ N 44 07.00 W123 48.00 │ 360 │ 420 │ .71 │ 413 │ 0.00 │ 01:06 │ 123091 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .onload │ 342 │ │ -37C │ 290 │ 280/050 │ 00+00 │ 378091 │ │ │ 5000 lbs │ 336 │ 0 │ 26000M │ 425 │ -7 │ 01:09 │ 0 │ │ │ N 44 07.00 W123 48.00 │ 360 │ 420 │ .71 │ 413 │ 0.00 │ 01:06 │ 128091 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 9 AR645 IP 057X │ 084 │ │ -29C │ 275 │ 275/030 │ 00+17 │ 373879 │ │ │ KLKV/R319081 112.0 │ 084 │ 114 │ 22000M │ 380 │ 0 │ 01:26 │ 4212 │ │ │ N 43 43.00 W121 14.00 │ 101 │ 534 │ .62 │ 409 │ 0.00 │ 01:23 │ 123879 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

┌──────────────────────────┬────┬────────┬──────┬────┬────────┬────────┬───────┬───────────────┐ │ WP# FIX TAC │ MC │ DISTANCE │ TEMP │ CAS │ WIND │ LEG TIME │ GR WT. │ │ │ REMARKS VOR │ MH │ LEG │ ALT │ TAS │ │ ETA │ LEGFUEL │ │ │ LATITUDE LONGITUDE │ TC │ TOTAL │ MACH │ GS │ DRAG IND │ ACC TIME │ FUEL RM │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 10 AR645 AN 057X │ 148 │ │ -29C │ 275 │ 275/030 │ 00+11 │ 371114 │ │ │ KLKV/R271015 112.0 │ 152 │ 71 │ 22000M │ 380 │ 4 │ 01:37 │ 2765 │ │ │ N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │ 165 │ 605 │ .62 │ 389 │ 18.50 │ 01:34 │ 121114 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .orbit 057X │ 150 │ │ -29C │ 275 │ 275/030 │ 00+30 │ 363548 │ │ │ 112.0 │ 154 │ 0 │ 22000M │ 380 │ 4 │ 02:07 │ 7566 │ │ │ N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │ 166 │ 605 │ .62 │ 369 │ 18.50 │ 02:04 │ 113548 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 11 AR645 AP 057X │ 059 │ │ -29C │ 310 │ 275/030 │ 00+03 │ 362758 │ │ │ KLKV/R010011 112.0 │ 057 │ 20 │ 22000M │ 425 │ -1 │ 02:10 │ 790 │ │ │ N 42 39.00 W120 23.00 │ 075 │ 625 │ .70 │ 453 │ 18.50 │ 02:07 │ 112758 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 12 AR645 AP 057X │ 329 │ │ -29C │ 310 │ 275/030 │ 00+07 │ 360560 │ │ │ KLKV/R335059 112.0 │ 326 │ 51 │ 22000M │ 425 │ -4 │ 02:17 │ 2198 │ │ │ N 43 28.00 W120 40.00 │ 346 │ 676 │ .70 │ 414 │ 18.50 │ 02:14 │ 110560 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 13 AR645 AP 057X │ 239 │ │ -29C │ 310 │ 275/030 │ 00+03 │ 359639 │ │ │ KLKV/R315060 112.0 │ 240 │ 20 │ 22000M │ 425 │ 1 │ 02:20 │ 921 │ │ │ N 43 23.00 W121 07.00 │ 256 │ 696 │ .70 │ 397 │ 18.50 │ 02:17 │ 109639 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .auto delay 057X │ 239 │ │ -29C │ 310 │ 275/030 │ 00+08 │ 357232 │ │ │ 112.0 │ 240 │ 0 │ 22000M │ 425 │ 1 │ 02:28 │ 2407 │ │ │ N 43 23.00 W121 07.00 │ 256 │ 696 │ .70 │ 397 │ 18.50 │ 02:25 │ 107232 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 14 AR645 EX 057X │ 148 │ │ -29C │ 310 │ 275/030 │ 00+07 │ 355140 │ │ │ KLKV/R271015 112.0 │ 152 │ 51 │ 22000M │ 425 │ 4 │ 02:35 │ 2092 │ │ │ N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │ 165 │ 747 │ .70 │ 435 │ 0.00 │ 02:32 │ 105140 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .offload │ 148 │ │ -29C │ 310 │ 275/030 │ 00+00 │ 345140 │ │ │ 10000 lbs │ 152 │ 0 │ 22000M │ 425 │ 4 │ 02:35 │ 0 │ │ │ N 42 34.00 W120 49.00 │ 165 │ 747 │ .70 │ 435 │ 0.00 │ 02:32 │ 95140 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 15 FMG/R 126X │ 147 │ │ -29C │ 330 │ 275/030 │ 00+25 │ 337700 │ │ │ MUSTANG 117.9 │ 151 │ 189 │ 22000M │ 451 │ 4 │ 03:00 │ 7440 │ │ │ N 39 31.88 W119 39.36 │ 163 │ 936 │ .74 │ 461 │ 0.00 │ 02:57 │ 87700 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 16 TROSE/W │ 183 │ │ -29C │ 330 │ 275/030 │ 00+16 │ 333017 │ │ │ TROSE │ 186 │ 115 │ 22000M │ 451 │ 4 │ 03:15 │ 4683 │ │ │ N 37 41.95 W120 24.25 │ 198 │ 1052 │ .74 │ 443 │ 0.00 │ 03:12 │ 83017 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 17 MOD/E 093X │ 246 │ │ -21C │ 250 │ 275/030 │ 00+05 │ 331833 │ │ │ MODESTO 114.6 │ 247 │ 27 │ 18000M │ 326 │ 1 │ 03:21 │ 1184 │ │ │ N 37 37.64 W120 57.47 │ 261 │ 1078 │ .53 │ 297 │ 0.00 │ 03:18 │ 81833 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 18 GROAN/W │ 247 │ │ -7C │ 250 │ 275/030 │ 00+04 │ 331006 │ │ │ GROAN │ 248 │ 16 │ 11000M │ 293 │ 1 │ 03:24 │ 827 │ │ │ N 37 35.42 W121 17.10 │ 262 │ 1094 │ .46 │ 264 │ 0.00 │ 03:21 │ 81006 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 19 CEDES/W │ 247 │ │ -7C │ 250 │ 275/030 │ 00+04 │ 330148 │ │ │ CEDES │ 248 │ 16 │ 11000M │ 293 │ 1 │ 03:28 │ 858 │ │ │ N 37 33.05 W121 37.47 │ 262 │ 1110 │ .46 │ 264 │ 0.00 │ 03:25 │ 80148 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 20 SAU/R 109X │ 278 │ │ +9C │ 250 │ 100/010 │ 00+10 │ 327640 │ │ │ SAUSALITO 116.2 │ 279 │ 46 │ 3000M │ 261 │ 1 │ 03:38 │ 2508 │ │ │ N 37 51.32 W122 31.36 │ 293 │ 1157 │ .40 │ 271 │ 0.00 │ 03:35 │ 77640 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 21 NORMM/W 105X │ 193 │ │ +9C │ 250 │ 100/010 │ 00+02 │ 327014 │ │ │ SFO/E281013 115.8 │ 191 │ 9 │ 3000M │ 261 │ -2 │ 03:40 │ 626 │ │ │ N 37 43.21 W122 36.79 │ 208 │ 1166 │ .40 │ 264 │ 0.00 │ 03:37 │ 77014 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ .auto delay 105X │ 193 │ │ +9C │ 250 │ 100/010 │ 00+05 │ 325619 │ │ │ 115.8 │ 191 │ 0 │ 3000M │ 261 │ -2 │ 03:45 │ 1395 │ │ │ N 37 43.21 W122 36.79 │ 208 │ 1166 │ .40 │ 264 │ 0.00 │ 03:42 │ 75619 │ │ ├──────────────────────────┼────┼────────┼──────┼────┼────────┼────────┼───────┼───────────────┤ │ 22 KSFO/A │ 103 │ │ +15C │ │ 100/010 │ 00+15 │ 322619 │ │ │ SAN FRANCISCO │ 102 │ 13 │ 11M │ │ -1 │ 04:00 │ 3000 │ │ │ N 37 37.14 W122 22.49 │ 118 │ 1179 │ │ │ 0.00 │ 03:57 │ 72619 │ │ ╘══════════════════════════╧════╧════════╧══════╧════╧════════╧════════╧═══════╧═══════════════╛ KC-10 ATS Form 70 (27 FEB 01) - CFPS Ver 3.2

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-10 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-11 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-12 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



### FLIGHT PROFILE

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-13 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


### Mission (Travis) Scenario Study Guide

PRE-DEPARTURE

1. Check Initial Position coordinates. a. Verify/enter airport waypoint KSUU

. NOTE: Items 1-7 are tasks that will normally be accomplished by either the Pilots or Flight Engineer prior to the "B efore Start” checklist. They do not occur in the same sequence as described in your tech order, but are arranged to allow practice moving from one page to anothe r. Accomplish all tasks regardless of crew position to gain fami liarity with CDU operations.

OR b. Verify/enter N38°15.761 W121°55.648 in Lat/Long window.

2. MSUs - STBY
a. Select STBY on MSU 1, 2, and 3.

3. FMS - initialization.

a. Verify FMS Software version – “XXXXXXXXXXXXX.”

< Press STAT function key. 

## L Steps

< Select CDU3 GO Æ (LS7).

< Verify VSN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

b. Verify position, time, date and GPS refe rence datum. If initial position coordinates are incorrect, re-enter t he coordinates using scratchpad and LS1 or LS5.


## L Steps < Press IDX function key.

< Select START (LS1).

[N38 ° 15.761 W121 ° 55.648] start 1 psn / time

→ FREEZE UTC DISPLAY ← DA/MO/YR UTC [01/ 05/ 01] [1022: 35]

<< √ inu1 >>
WGS-84
3 [ ]

Figure 1. Start 1 Position/Time Page

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-14 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

c. Review/clear all annunciation line messages. Press CLR key until all messages are cleared.
d. Access the Start 2 page (scroll vertical) and initialize the GPS (LS1).

4. MSUs - ALIGN

a. Enter Initial Position coordinat es on INU1 Control page.

b. Select ALIGN (MSUs 1, 2, and 3).

c. Press DTK-STS (LS1) to observe the beginning of status countdown on line 4. d. Return to the start pages and sele ct appropriate ICAO database cartridge. INAV

INU 3 INAV INU 2 INAV INU 1 INAV

INU CONTROL

PAGE UPDATE PAGE 

## L Steps < Access INU1 INAV page (---1).

< Scroll laterally to INU Control page. Press LS4 INU CONTROL

< Press LS2 (adjacent to POSITION ).

< Enter initial position latitude in the scratchpad (N3815.8).

< Press the line select key adjacent to ENTER (LS6).

< Enter initial position longitude in the scratchpad (W12155.6).

< Press the line select key adjacent to ENTER (LS6).

< Clear the scratchpad before continuing. Figure 2. INU Control Page Access

< Press IDX function key.

< Press LS1, START

. 

## L Steps

< Vertical scroll to “start 3 database”.

< Select DB B KC-10 as the ICAO database.

< Vertical scroll to “start 4 mission”.

< Select MSN A for the mission data cartridge to be used.

NOTE: In the aircraft this procedure is normally performed on all three CDUs and their associated INUs. Only CDU 2 can enter present position into INU 2, and only CDU 3 can set INU 3.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-15 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

5. RADIO MASTER POWER - ON

6. Configure TA CAN and ADF. 

## L Steps < Access Master Power page through IDX

< S elect POWER LS6.

< Turn on all navigation radios with LS5

a. Access Navigation Radi o page 1 (NAV Function Key).

(1) Tune ADF1 to 400 (LS5). (2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF

. (3) Set TACAN1 to 113X (LS7). (4) Verify TR mode (LS8). (5) Copy ADF1 frequency into scratchpad (LS5).

b. Access Navigation Radio Page 2 (lateral scroll).

(1) Paste ADF1 frequency (400) into ADF2 (LS5). (2) Change mode (LS6) to ANT and back to ADF. (3) Set TACAN2 to 94Y (LS7). (4) Set mode to BCNINV

.

NOTE: In the aircraft, you continue to update the TACAN and ADF for navigation backup. Because of time constr aints, this is not done with the FET. You may, however, enter new TACAN ch annels and ADF frequencies as time permits.

7. Due to weather in the area, refueling in AR-8B is canceled. Refueling will now take place in AR-7B. Edit the alternate f light plan by deleting AR-8B from the TRAVIS1 flight plan and adding AR-7B.

a. Access Start 5 Flight Plan/Load.

< Press IDX function key.

< Press LS1

< Vertical scroll to “start 5 fpln/load”. 

## L Steps

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-16 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

INDEX 1 IDX

START1 PSN/TIME

START 2 NAV/INIT

START 3 DATABASE

START 4 MISSION

START 5 FPLN/LOAD

Figure 3. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page Access

b. Access Alternate Flight Plan Ca talog (ALTN CATLG) page on LS6. SELECT ALTN LOAD will appear in the scratchpad.

c. Select TRAVIS1 (LS3). After it loads, compare your CDU to sample display in figure 4.

start 5 fpln / load [TRAVIS1 ] ALTN CATLG → fltplan.cr

→ ERASE FPLN REPLACE ←

→ ERASE FLT/DATA LOAD ← 3 [ ]

Figure 4. Start 5 Flight Plan/Load Page

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-17 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

d. Change AR-8B to AR-7B by edi ting the Alternate Flight Plan.

e. Delete AR-8B (Use Minus key and LS key next to each waypoint.)

RVIP N39°42 W123°23 (wpt 03) RVCP N41°20 W123°48 (wpt 04) < Press EDIT function key.

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN)

.

< Select LS4 (WAYPOINTS)

. 

## L Steps

CK PT N42°26 W123°48 (wpt 05) EAR N44°07 W123°48 (wpt 06)

f. Add AR-7B (RVCP and EAR point) after ILA.

g. Add N39°32 W120°46 (RVIP) as wpt 03 and NAV checkpoint N41°40 W120°48 as waypoint 05 (Figure 5). 

## L Steps

Figure 5. Alternate Flight Plan Page 02 ILA → altn fpln wpts
03 N39°32 W120°46 →

04 N40°44 W120°48 P →

05 N41°40 W120°48 →

3 [ ] NOTE: After deleting RVIP (wpt 03), th e RVCP (wpt 04) will move up to become waypoint 03.

< Type AR-7B in scratchpad.

< Press the line select key after ILA

.

< RVCP and EAR appear in waypoints list after ILA

.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-18 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

h. REPLACE current flight plan with alter nate flight plan and confirm.

i. Add the TEALL1 departure to t he flight plan. < Press EDIT function key.

< Press LS1 (ALTN FPLN)

.

< Select LS3 (REPLACE FPLN) and confirm LS3. 

## L Steps

< Press EDIT function key.

< Select LS6 (SIDS)

.

j. Renumber flight plan. < Type KSUU in scratchpad.

< Press LS1 to access SIDS.

< Press LS3 for TEALL1.

< Select LS7 for RW21R.

< Press LS5 to select transition.

< Press LS4 to select ILA.

< Press LS7 to insert flight plan.

< Press LS3 to insert SID before ILA.

< Removed (DISCONTINUITY 03) by entering a minus (-) in scratchpad and pressing the LS3.

< Scroll down to wpt 05 ( ILA ).

< Remove ILA by entering minus (-) in the scratchpad and pressing the line select key adjacent to ILA . 

## L Steps

NOTE: The SID points are added based on the FMS 800 database stored in the cartridge. A DISCONTINUI TY appears whenever a SID is inserted. The discontinuity is shown in the flight plan with its associat ed waypoint number.



## L Steps < Press EDIT function key.

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page.

< Press LS5

.

< Press LS5 again to confirm renumbering of flight plan. NOTE: The navigation database is updated often and is affected by NOTAMS . If the desired SID is not available, skip this st ep and realize waypoint numbering may not corresp ond with the figures in this lesson.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-19 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

8. Check flight plan waypoints for accuracy.



## L Steps

Figure 6. Flight Plan (First Page) < Press FPLN function key.

< Scroll through waypoints.

< Compare waypoints to Figure 6 and Waypoint List, realizing waypoints may not correspond if the SID did not load.

CRS [325] ° [OFFST] AUTO: ↓ ↓ fpln 01 N38 ° 18 W121 ° 57 → 201° / 9.3nm 02 TEALL S →

03 SUU01 S →

3 [ ]

WAYPOINT LIST

04 ILA 10 N42°34 W120°49

05 N39°32 W120°46 11 N42°39 W120°23

06 N40°44 W120°48 12 N43°28 W120°40

07 N41°40 W120°48 13 N43°23 W121°07

08 N43°20 W120°50 14 N42°34 W120°49

09 N43°43 W121°14 15 FMG

NOTE: The following item is accomplis hed during the "Before Start” checklist.

9. MSUs to NAV a. Access the INU1 Control page (Check status at 02).

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-20 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

b. Note status goes to 01.

< Press INAV function key.

< Access INU1 INAV page ( ---1 ).

< Press LS4 ( INU Control ).

< Set INU1, 2, and 3 to NAV

. 

## L Steps

NOTE: The following item is accomplishe d during the "Before Takeoff” checklist.

10. Access Position page to monitor for windshear during takeoff ( PSN Key).

N38 ° 15.761 W121 ° 55.648 INU1/GPS pilot psn TRK 346 ° VAR E14 ° GS 000 TAS 000 WND 360 ° T / 50 5 0 0

←

SAT +15 ° C

[ ]

Figure 7. Position Page

11 Press RUN on the FET Control Panel to begin the mission.

NOTE: Autopilot 1 is in CMD and FMS TRACK is annunciated in the FMAs as soon as airborne.

CLIMB 12. During climb out, compare data on Pilot and Copilot Position ( PSN ), Steer ( STR ), and Flight Plan ( FPLN ) pages.

13. After the aircraft crosses ILA and tracks to wpt 04, Press FPLN, FREEZE the FET, and compare your display with Figure 8, then press RUN

.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-21 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

NOTE: Your course and di stance information may differ slightly depending on when the 'freeze' was initiated. Expe riment with the accelerator factors and scale while enroute to the RVIP (wpt 04) . You may leave the se in any mode you desire.

CRS [347] ° [OFFST] AUTO: ↓ ↓ fpln 04 ILA → 051°/65.5nm 05 N39°32 W120°46 →

06 N40°44 W120°48 P →
3 [ ]

Figure 8. Flight Plan Page

ENROUTE 14. Tanker is late; prepare to HOLD at RVIP (wpt 04).
a. Attach hold at the RVIP, N39 ° 32 W120 ° 46 (left turn, 11⁄2 minutes legs).



## L Steps < Access Hold page (EDIT, LS5.)

< Change to LEFT turn (LS2). EDIT

FPLN EDIT 1

HOLD < Change pattern length to 11⁄2 minute legs. Insert 130 (minutes and seconds) in the scratchpad and press LS3.

< Press LS8 to insert hold in the flight plan. The CDU automatically displays Flight Plan page.)

< Press line select key at right or left of N39o32 W120o46

.

Figure 9. Hold Page Access

b. Monitor holding entry from the Waypoint 4 Hold page.



## L Steps < Press H (LS6).

< Press H again (LS6) to display the Hold page.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-22 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

15. Refueling is canceled. Proceed direct to N40°44 W120°48 (wpt 06/RVCP).



## L Steps < Press DIR Function Key.

< Press line select key adjacent to N40o44 W120o48.

16. When passing wpt 06, determine the ETA via the flight plan at the RVCP for AR645 N42 ° 34 W120 ° 49 (wpt 10), by using remote ranging.

< Press DATA Function Key. 

## L Steps

< Press line select key adjacent to N42o34W120o49 (waypoint 10).

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN

.

17. After passing waypoint 07, determine the ti me to go (TTG), bearing and distance to the active waypoint (wpt 08) using the STR function key. :PPSN VIA FPLN from-to data 10 N42°34 W120°49 N 42°34.000 W120°49.000 255nm ETE 0:46.3

ETA 1310:06

↔ [ ]

Figure 10. Present Position Via Flight Plan

NOTE: The ETA reflects the projected ti me of arrival at the RVCP along the flight plan path. In the aircraft, check the ETA against the RVCT.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-23 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

:INU1 / GPS CMD GS: - - - ↓ to ↓ pilot str N 43°20 W120°50 ETA 1616 DTK 344° TTG 0:15:06 TRK 344° 344° / 99.9

XTK L0.00nm DA: L0.00°

0 [ ]

Figure 11. Pilot Steer Page

18. After passing waypoint 07:

a. Determine the time and di stance from present position direct to waypoint 09.

< Press FPLN Function Key. 

## L Steps

< Press DATA Function Key.

< Select waypoint 09.

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN Direct.

:PPSN DIRECT from-to data 09 [N43°43 W121°14] N43°43.000 W121°14.000 334° / 111.0nm ETE 0:16.4

ETA 1256:03

↔ [ ]

Figure 12. Present Position Direct

NOTE: You will see the ETE count DOWN if 'data for' PPSN DIRECT is performed with wpt 09 ahead of you. Once past wpt 09 on the way to wpt 07, the ETE will count UP.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-24 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

b. Determine the time and distance from present position to waypoint 09 via the flight plan.

< Toggle LS1 to PPSN VIA FPLN

. 

## L Step

:PPSN VIA FP LN from-to data 09 [N43°43 W121°14] N43°43.000 W121°14.000 108nm ETE 0:19.7

ETA 1310:06

↔ [ ]

Figure 13. PPSN VIA FPLN

19. The Command Post notifies you that a fter refueling you are directed to McChord AFB. The Pilot requests time and dist ance from wpt 14 (Exit pt) to McChord ( KTCM ).



## L Steps < Press FPLN function key.

< Press DATA function key.

< Scroll to and select wpt 14.

then

< Type KTCM in scratchpad.

< Press line select key next to wpt 14

.

:13 N43°23 W121°07 from-to data [KTCM ] N47°08.261 W122°28.589 327°/234nm ETE 0:33.1

ETA 1320:06

↔ [ ]

Figure 14. From-to Data

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-25 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

20. Receiver is canceled. You are to recover at KTCM via Deschutes ( DSD ) and Battle Ground ( BTG ).

a. Add DSD, BTG , and KTCM to the flight plan after wpt 08.



## L Steps < Press FPLN

.

< Enter DSD in scratchpad.

< Insert by pressing line select key adjacent to waypoint 09.

< Select DSD-KZ-VORTAC

.

< Repeat steps for BTG and KTCM

.

b. Renumber the flight plan.

< Press EDIT function key. 

## L Steps

< Scroll to fpln edit 2 page.

< Press LS5

.

< Press LS5 again to confirm renumbering of flight plan.

c. Delete all waypoints after KTCM.

< Type minus (-) in scratchpad.

< Press line select key next to point to be deleted. 

## L Steps

Figure 15. Modified Flight Plan 09A #DSD → 5 5 fpln 10 BTG → 348 ° /83.6nm 11 KTCM →

*END

3 [ ]

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-26 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

DESCENT 21. After passing DSD, add TOU as Initial Approach Fix for McChord AFB.



## L Steps < Type TOU in scratchpad.

< Press line select key next to KTCM

.

< Select key at LS3

.

← TOU-KZ-VORTAC 112.20 select 01-02 / 04 N48°1759.6 W124°3737.4

← TOU-KZ-FIX →

N48°1755.6 W124°3737.4

3 [TOU ]

Figure 16. Selecting the Fix

10 BTG → fpln 10A TOU →

APPROACH 11 KTCM →

*END

3 [ ]

Figure 17. Adding the Fix

< Press STR function key. 22. Set the Baroset to 30.00

. 

## L Steps

< Scroll to VNAV STR page.

< Type 30.00 in scratchpad.

< Select LS4

.

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-27 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

20000ft ↓ to ↓ pilot vnav str

BAROSET [30.00] in:

3 [ ]

Figure 18. Set Baroset

23. Monitor the Position page for windshear during the appr oach and come to a full stop landing. The FET mode becomes 'Initialization' and the aircraft stops.

MISSION COMPLETE

CH 3 FIQ-F857-SG 1-69-28 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Tanker Air Refueling Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to tanker air refueling procedures, including rendezvous; contact and air refueling offload, and post air refueling. The lesson discusses the pr ocedures and the associated checklists.



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. ATP-56(B), Air-to-Air Refuelling



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Tanker Air Refueli ng Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 1. Section VIII, Part 2, Rendezvous Procedures 2. Section VIII, Part 4, Tanker Air Refueling Procedures (a) Tanker Rendezvous Checklist (b) Tanker Preparation For Contact Checklist (c) Tanker Post Air Refueling Checklist

CH 3 FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Tanker Air Refueling Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson describes the Flight Engineer duties during tanker air refueling, from accomplishing the Rendezvous checklist, Preparation For Contact, off-load, and the Post Air Refueling checklist. The lesson consists of three segments. The first segment discusses the detailed procedures required of the Flight Engineer, as well as revi ew of the other crewmember actions to show flow and continuity of the rendezvous procedures. The second segment discusses the deta iled procedures required for the preparation for contact, off-load, and post air refueling procedures. The third segment allows the Flight Engineer to practi ce the checklists. There is a test of the procedures.

B. Objectives

1. Identify tanker rendezvous procedures.

2. Identify tanker contact/post air refueling procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Tanker Air Refueling Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Rendezvous Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Rendezvous Planning

a. Rendezvous Planning

b. AP-1B

c. CR Plan

3. Tanker Rendezvous Checklist

CH 3 FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

a. Rendezvous Checklist

b. 30 Minutes Prior

c. 15 Minutes Prior

d. Air Refueling Speeds

4. RV Delta

a. RV Delta

b. RVIP/RVCP

c. Orbit

d. Turn Range/Offset

e. 15 Minutes Prior to RVCT

f. Receiver IP Inbound

g. Tanker Turn to Track – Part 1

h. Tanker Turn to Track – Part 2

i. On Track

5. RV Golf

a. RV Golf

b. Rendezvous Point

c. RVIP/AR Information

6. Modified RV Delta

a. Modified RV Delta

b. Receiver Orbit

c. Tanker Orbit

d. 2 Minute Call

e. Closure/Contact

7. RV Alpha

CH 3 FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

a. RV Alpha

b. GCI Control

c. Alternate Procedures

8. Alternate Rendezvous

9. Missed Rendezvous

10. Rendezvous Overrun - Part 1

11. Rendezvous Overrun – Part 2

12. Summary

13. Quiz

C. Contact/Post Air Refueling Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Tanker Preparation for Contact Checklist

a. Preparation for Contact Checklist

b. SEAT BELTS

c. Lighting

d. BEACON Lights

e. Radios/Interphone/Iridium

f. Thrust Computer

g. IFF/ETCAS

h. Hydraulic Panel

(1) Hydraulic Panel

(2) 2/3 Motor Pump Verification

(3) Hydraulic Pressure Fluctuation

(4) Hydraulic Pressure Low

i. Fuel Panel

CH 3 FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

(1) Fuel Panel

(2) A/R Pump Override

(3) Transfer Pumps

(4) Centerline Drogue Refueling

(5) Wing Pod Drogue Refueling

(6) WARP Fuel Panel

j. Radar

k. TACAN

l. Autopilot

m. Auto Throttles

n. Checklist Completed

3. Contact/Offload

a. Contact/Offload

b. Boom Refueling

c. Centerline Drogue

d. Wing Pod Drogue

4. Tanker Post Air Refueling Checklist

a. Post Air Refueling Checklist

b. BEACON Lights

c. Lighting

d. Thrust Computer

e. IFF/ETCAS

f. Hydraulic System

g. Fuel Panel/Manifold Scavenge

h. Post AR Report

CH 3 FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 i. Altimeters

j. Rendezvous Beacon

k. Radios/Interphone/Iridium

l. Seat Belts

m. Checklist Complete

5. Summary

6. Quiz

III. Exam

FIQ-C505-SG 1-70-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-1 01 JUN 12 

# Receiver Air Refueling Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Flight Engineer’s duties during receiver air re fueling, including the Rendezvous Checklist, Preparation for Contact Checkl ist, fuel onload, and the Post Air Refueling Checklist.



### II. Duration

- 0.7 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. ATP-56(B), Air-to-Air Refuelling



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Receiver Air Refue ling Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual 1. Section VIII, Part 2, Rendezvous Procedures (a) Receiver Rendezvous Checklist (b) Receiver Preparation For Contact Checklist (c) Receiver Post Air Refueling ChecklistKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-2 01 JUN 12 

# Receiver Air Refueling Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson describes the Flight Engineer duties during receiver air refueling, from accomplishing the Rendezvous Checklist, Preparation for Contact Checklist, onload, and the Po st Air Refueling Checklist. The lesson discusses the detailed procedures required of the Flight Engineer, and reviews the other crewmember acti ons to show flow and continuity. The second segment allows you to pr actice the checklists. There is an end-of-lesson test at the end of the lesson.

B. Objective

1. Identify receiver air refueling procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Receiver Air Re fueling Procedures

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Receiver Air Refueling

1. Introduction

2. Receiver Rendezvous

a. Rendezvous Checklist

b. Rendezvous Equipment

(1) Rendezvous Equipment

(2) VOR/ADF/RMI

(3) TACAN

(4) Radar/Beacon Mode

c. High Intensity LightsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-3 01 JUN 12 d. Radios/Interphone

e. CG Check

f. UARSSI Hydraulic System Manual Shutoff Valve

g. Altimeters

h. Separation Briefing

i. RENDEZVOUS Checklist Complete

3. Rendezvous Procedures

a. Rendezvous Procedures

b. RV Delta

(1) RV Delta

(2) Inbound to RVIP

(3) 30 Minutes to RVCT

(4) 15 Minutes to RVCT

(5) 15 Minute Calls

(6) IP Inbound

(7) Turn Range/Offset

c. RV Golf

(1) RV Golf

(2) Rendezvous

(3) Assigned Altitudes

(4) Formation/Descent

d. Alternate Rendezvous

(1) Alternate Rendezvous

(2) UHF/DF

e. Missed RendezvousKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-4 01 JUN 12 f. Overrun

4. Final Closure

a. Final Closure

b. One Mile Call

c. Radio Check/Astern

d. Rendezvous Complete

5. Receiver Preparation For Contact Checklist

a. Receiver Preparation for Contact Checklist

b. Seat Belts

c. Radar Transponder

d. Radios/Interphone/Iridium

e. IFF/ETCAS

f. Beacon Light Selectors

g. Navigation/Formation/Hi Int Lts

h. Fuel Panel/Quantity

i. AR Receptacle Door

j. AR Recp/AR Recp Lights

k. Flight Director Switches

l. Thrust Computer

m. TACAN

n. Radar

o. Autopilot/Autothrottles

p. Ready Light

q. Receiver Preparation for Contact Completed

6. Contact/Onload ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-5 01 JUN 12 a. Contact/Onload Procedures

b. CG Limits

c. Fuel

(1) Monitor Onload

(2) High Level Float

(3) Limitations

(4) Signal Amplifier Reset

7. Receiver Post Air Refueling Checklist

a. Receiver Post Air Refueling Checklist

b. Beacon Light Selectors

c. Nav/Formation/Hi Int Lts

d. Radios/Interphone/Iridium Phone

e. Thrust Computer

f. Flight Director Switches

g. IFF/ETCAS

h. Radar

i. AR Receptacle Door

j. AR Recp/AR Recp Lights

k. UARRSI Hydraulic System Manual Shutoff Valve

l. Fuel Panel/CG/MANF SCAV

(1) Fuel Panel

(2) Manifold Scavenge

m. Seat Belts

n. Post AR Checklist Completed

8. SummaryKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 2 FIQ-C504-SG 1-71-6 01 JUN 12 III. ExamKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Performance Workshop VI Approach and Landing/ Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/ Wing Air Refueling Pods

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to practice completing the TOLD Card for Approach and Landing Data based on Normal and Abnormal Confi gurations, including Dual Hydraulic Failure. Computing data for Driftdown, Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear, and WARP TOLD cards are also practiced in this lesson. You should have reviewed the Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performanc e and the Takeoff and Landing Data as well as Driftdown Workbooks and CBT Lessons prior to attending this workshop period. The instructor will present the workshop exercises for you to complete, and give the appropriate guidance when ques tions arise from you. Once again, this is intended to be a workshop, and not simply an instructor lecture.

Part I describes the topics that will be co vered by the workshop exercises. Part II consists of the workshop exercises to be completed and their solutions.



### II. Duration

- 6.0 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials
A. Classroom B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. Performance Workshop VI - TOLD Card - Approach and Landing/Driftdown/Suspected Windshear/WARP Student Guide D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet (8)

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Descent, Approach, and Landing Data Workbook B. Driftdown Workbook C. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section II, Emergency Procedures 2. Section IIA, Abnormal Procedures 3. Section VII, Windshear/Severe Windshear D. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data 3. Section III, Takeoff Into Sus pected Windshear/Wing Air Refueling Pods 4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 5. Section X, Mission Planning 6. Section XI, Driftdown

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Objectives

1. Compute KC-10 Approach and Landing Performance Data.

a. Abnormal Configurations b. Dual Hydraulic Failure

2. Compute KC-10 Driftdown Performance Data.

3. Compute KC-10 TOLD for Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear.

4. Compute KC-10 TOLD for aircraft wit h Wing Air Refueling Pods installed.

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


# Part I

APPROACH AND LANDING

The data found in the APPROACH AND LANDI NG Section of T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 allows the user to comput e the approach and land ing speeds plus the distances needed to stop the aircraft using a wide variety of co nfigurations. Speeds t hat can be computed using the charts in Section IX of the 1-1 are: minimum maneuver, threshold, and touchdown. Landing ground roll combined with fl are distance gives you the total landing distance needed to stop the aircraft.

When computing the threshold s peed, remember that the tab data is only good from Sea Level to 2000 feet. If the altitude is above the 2000-foot level, you must use the Threshold Speed charts to co mpute the threshold speed.

An equivalent RCR should be computed if the aircraft has an inoperative stopping device. This, in turn, is refigured to an SDR for use in the Landing Ground Roll Chart.

Information contained in Volume 2 of the Dash 1 provides more information in the event an abnormal configuration is encountered.

DRIFTDOWN

The aircraft will begin a descent if it lose s thrust on one or more engines when flying above the maximum service ceiling for the number of engines operating. This is known as a driftdown. Driftdown data can be obtained from Section V or Section XI of the Dash 1-1. Section V is used for two-engine operation, whereas Sect ion XI is used for single engine operation. If te rrain clearance becomes a factor when computing the driftdown data, fuel dump may be required. Remember to adhere to the NOTES at the top of the charts.

TAKEOFF INTO SUSPECTED WINDSHEAR

Windshear is a rapid change of wind speed and/or direction al ong the flight path. The potential windshear danger is that it can cause a decrease in airflow over the wings resulting in a serious reduction of lift. Up or down drafts can also occur in a windshear environment. Basic windshear is defined as conditions that result in an airspeed change of 11 to 15 knots. A severe windshear is defined as conditions that result in airspeed changes greater than 15 knots, or vertical speed changes greater than 500 feet per minute. Takeoff will not be attemp ted when severe windshear conditions exist or are forecasted.

When windshear conditions are reported or fo recast, you are directed to accomplish Takeoff Into Suspected Windshear procedures. To combat the effects of windshear, the aircraft must fly thro ugh the shear at an increased, optim um speed. When computing a

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

TOLD card for takeoff into a suspected windshear, speeds for the actual gross weight and performance-limiting weight must be computed and compared. The speeds computed for performance limiting weight will not exceed the speeds computed for actual weight by more than 20 knots. The computed performance limiting weight V R must exceed the actual weight V R by at least 10 knots or the takeoff cannot be attempted.

WING AIR REFUELING PODS

The performance data charts do not account fo r the additional drag created by the Wing Air Refueling Pods. When computing TOLD for an aircraft with Wing Air Refueling Pods installed, adjustments must be made to the Runway Avail able prior to computing the Equivalent Field Length or Ma ximum Allowable Weight if V 1 =V MCG , also the Required Climb Gradient is increased prior to determining the Climb Gradient Limiting Weight. The required adjustment factor s can be obtained from Secti on III of the Dash 1-1.

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-6 01 JUL 13 

# Part II

Compute landing data for the following:

Landing Card I Given:

Gross Weight 303,648 Lbs Oat -10 ° C Pressure Altitude +100’ Wind Direction 310 ° Velocity 10 G 20 Knots Runway Heading 350 ° Runway Length 11,820’ RCR 23 Slope .4 ↓ Flaps/slats 35 ° /EXT Anti-ice OFF

Landing Card II Given: Gross Weight 310,218 lbs Oat -5 ° C Pressure Altitude +2210’ Wind Direction 010 ° Velocity 10 Knots Runway heading 350 ° Runway Length 13,500’ RCR 10 Slope 0 Flaps/slats 0 ° /EXT Anti-ice ONKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-10 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Landing Card III Given: Gross Weight 338,618 lbs OAT 20 ° C Pressure Altitude +205’ Wind direction Calm Velocity 0 Runway Heading 150 ° Runway Length 11,150’ RCR 10 Slope 0 Flaps/slats 35 ° /RET

Landing Card IV Given: Gross Weight 349,112 lbs OAT 26 ° C Pressure Altitude 1800’ Wind Direction 150 ° Velocity 10 G 20 Knots Runway Heading 170 ° Runway Length 11,752’ RCR 23 Slope 0 Flaps/Slats 0 ° /RET

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-11 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-12 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-13 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-14 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-15 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-16 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Landing Card V Given: Gross Weight 290,703 lbs OAT 32 ° C Pressure Altitude +50’ Wind Direction 130 ° Velocity 15 Knots Runway Heading 150 ° Runway Length 11,758’ RCR 23 Slope 0 Flaps/slats 50 ° /EXT Anti-skid Inoperative

Landing Card VI Given: Gross Weight 285,000 lbs OAT 21 ° C Pressure Altitude +3500’ Wind Direction 350 ° Velocity 10 Knots Runway Heading 010 ° Runway Length 13,113’ RCR 23 Slope 0 Flaps/slats 35 ° /EXT 2-3 Dual Hydraulic Failure

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-17 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-18 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-19 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-20 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-21 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-22 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



### SINGLE ENGINE DRIFTDOWN

Given: TAT +8 ° C Flight Level FL 290 Gross Weight 575,000 lbs Temperature Std +20 ° Terrain Height 4760’ AGL Terrain Distance 405 NM Wind +25 Knots (Headwind)

Find: MCT Power Setti ng ______________________ Initial Driftdown Speed ______________________ Terrain Height PA

______________________ Max Start of Drift down Wt ______________________ Required Fuel Du mp ______________________ Time to Terrain

______________________

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-23 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



### SINGLE ENGINE DRIFTDOWN

Given:

TAT -12 ° C Flight level FL 310 Gross weight 440,000’ Temperature Std Wind -75 knots (Tailwind) Drag index 10.0

Find: Fuel burned

______ ______________________ Bottom of Driftdow n _______________

_____________ Distance

______ ______________________ Time

_________ ___________________

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-24 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



### SUSPECTED WIND SHEAR

Gross Weight 463,918 lbs CG 18% OAT 29 ° C Dew Point √
Anti-Ice OFF Pressure Altitude +200’ Wind Direction 190 ° Velocity 20 G 30 Knots Runway Heading 210 ° Runway Length 11001’ RCR 23 RSC 0 Slope 0.2 ↓ Elevation 62’ Obstacle Height N/A Obstacle Distance N/A Air Conditioning OFF Reverse Thrust Yes

Compute a Takeoff into Suspected Wind Shear Told Card.

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-25 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-26 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-27 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-28 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course



### WING AIR REFUELING PODS

Given: Gross Weight 445,000 lbs CG 26.0% OAT 23 ° C Dew Point √
Anti-Ice Off Pressure Altitude 100’ Wind Direction 240 ° Velocity 10 Runway Heading 240 ° Runway Length 10016’ RCR 23 RSC 0 Slope 0.3 Up Elevation 131’ Obstacle Height 28 ft Obstacle Distance 2031 ft Air Conditioning On Reverse Thrust Yes

Compute a TOLD Card with Wing Ai r Refueling Pods Installed.

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-29 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-30 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-31 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E851-SG 1-72-32 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Performance Workshop VII CFCC/Tire Limiting Speed/ Max Braking Speed

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to practice completing three TOLD cards: one limited by Tire Limit Speed, one limited by Max Braking Sp eed, and one with a Configuration Change. You should have reviewed the Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Performance, the Takeoff and Landing Data Workbooks, and CBT Lessons prior to attending this workshop period. Your Inst ructor will present the wor kshop exercises for you to complete, and give the appr opriate guidance when questions aris e from you. Once again, this is intended to be a wor kshop, and not simply an instructor lecture.

Part I describes the topics that will be cove red by the workshop exercises. Part II contains the workshop exercises to be completed and includes solutions.



### II. Duration

- 2.5 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Classroom B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. Performance Workshop VII - CFCC/ Tire Limiting Speed/Max Braking Speed Student Guide D. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet (3)



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Introduction to KC-10 Tak eoff Performance CBT Lesson B. Introduction to KC-10 Performance Workbook C. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson D. Takeoff and Landing Data CBT Lesson E. Review T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

3. Section III, Takeoff 4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 5. Section X, Mission Planning



## Objectives

1. Compute KC-10 Takeoff Data Based on Correction Factor for Configuration Change.

2. Compute KC-10 Takeoff Data Based on Tire Limit Speed.

3. Compute KC-10 Takeoff Data Based on Maximum Brake Speed.

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


# Part I

CORRECTION FACTOR FOR CONFIGURATION CHANGE

When a configuration change occu rs in the deceleration devices of the aircraft, a Correction Factor Configuration Change (CFCC) must be computed. Enter the chart with a known RCR value, up to one of the corre ction lines: Center Gear Retracted, One Wheel Brake Inoperative, or Anti-skid Braking Inoperative . The correction line used depends on the configuration change. Re member, the CFCC replaces the RCR corrections; therefore, use only the charts labeled RCR 23 to 18. In the event the aircraft has more than one configuration change, use the most restrictive for performance computation. W hen computing Takeoff Perfo rmance be sure to adhere to the WARNINGS in Section Three of the 1C-10( K)A-1-1 pertaining to the use of Reduced Thrust for Takeoffs.

TIRE LIMITING SPEED

Tire Speed Limiting Weight (T SLW) is the weight at which the all engine liftoff speed equals the Tire Placard Speed. Normally TSLW will not be a limiting factor in computing takeoff performance. However, a combi nation of high-pressure altitudes, high temperatures, long runways, and low flap settings can cause TSLW to be a limiting factor when computing takeoff performance.

Tire speed is based on ground speed at the ti me of liftoff. Since ground speed is a function of true airspeed, high-pressure alti tudes and temperatures cause these speeds to increase rapidly. This increases the possibility of TSLW becoming a factor in performance computation.

After determining TSLW, compare it to T OGW. If TSLW is less than TOGW, then TSLW becomes the limiting factor for takeo ff planning. To optimize takeoff performance TSLW must be plotted for various flap setting s. Accomplish this by entering the TSLW chart with the OAT and pressure altitude, and then follow the gridlines down to the flap settings correction grid. Determine several TSLWs by using various flap settings (e.g., 5 ° , 10 ° , up to 20 ° ). Take these weights and flap setti ngs to the Maximum Takeoff Gross Weight at Optimum Takeoff Flap Setting char t and plot a line from the first TSLW and flap setting through the last TSLW and flap se tting computed. Now plot a line from the RALW and CGLW. The point at which the TSLW curve and CGLW curve intersects is the takeoff gross weight and opt imum flap setting. This is the takeoff gross weight and flap setting that will be used to compute takeoff speeds.

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

MAXIMUM BRAKING SPEED

The maximum speed the aircraft can accelera te to, experience a problem, and stop in the remaining runway without ex ceeding the energy absorption capability of the brakes is called the Maximum Braking Speed (V MBE ). Once it is determined that V MBE is a factor, the weight of the aircraft should be decreased until V MBE is no longer a factor. In most cases, reducing TOGW by 3500 lbs. for every knot that V CEF exceeds V MBE will satisfy V MBE limitations. After each weight reduction, recompute V CEF and V MBE and calculate a new V 1

. One common error in computing V MBE is the tendency to overlook Sheet 2 charts. These charts take into consideration any configuration changes. When computing a lightweight takeoff with a CFCC, remem ber to enter Sheet 1 with the computed groundspeed to compute t he Max Braking Speed.

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


# Part II

TOLD CARD I

GIVEN:

GROSS WEIGHT 495,000 lbs CG 24.0% OAT 26 ° C DEW POINT T ANTI ICE OFF PRESSURE ALTITUDE -50’ WINDS CALM RUNWAY HEADING 280 ° RUNWAY LENGTH 11,475’ RCR 10 RSC 0 SLOPE 0 FIELD ELEVATION 42 ‘ CLIMB GRADIENT 2.5% OBSTACLE HEIGHT N/A OBSTACLE DISTANCE N/A AIR CONDITION ON REVERSE THRUST YES

NUMBER THREE BRAKE CAPPED

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-6 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

TOLD CARD II

GIVEN:

GROSS WEIGHT 525,000 lbs CG 18.0% OAT 25 ° C DEW POINT T ANTI ICE Off PRESSURE ALTITUDE +6040’ WINDS CALM RUNWAY HEADING 350 ° RUNWAY LENGTH 13,740’ RCR 23 RSC 0 SLOPE .6 DN FIELD ELEVATION 6183’ CLIMB GRADIENT 2.5% OBSTACLE HEIGHT N/A OBSTACLE LENGTH N/A AIR CONDITION OFF REVERSE THRUST YES

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-10 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-11 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-12 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

TOLD CARD III

GIVEN:

GROSS WEIGHT 415,500 lbs CG 8.0% OAT 35 ° C DEW POINT T ANTI ICE OFF PRESSURE ALTITUDE +6500’ WINDS 350 ° 15G25 RUNWAY HEADING 320 ° RUNWAY LENGTH 12,300’ RCR 23 RSC 0 SLOPE 2.0 UP FIELD ELEVATION 6124’ CLIMB GRADIENT 2.5% OBSTACLE HEIGHT N/A OBSTACLE DISTANCE N/A AIR CONDITION ON REVERSE THRUST YES

CENTER GEAR RETRACTED NUMBER 7 BRAKE CAPPED

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-13 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-14 01 JUL 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-15 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E849-SG 1-73-16 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

# Performance Workshop VIII Obstacle TOLD Card

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this workshop is to provide an opportunity for you to practice completing an OBSTACLE TOLD card. You should have reviewed the Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Perform ance and the Takeoff and Landing Data Workbooks and the CBT Lessons prior to att ending this workshop period. Your instructor will present the workshop exercise for you to complete, and give the appropriate guidance when questi ons arise from you.

Part I describes the topics that will be co vered by the workshop exercises. Part II consists of the workshop exercise s to be completed and solutions.



### II. Duration

- 3.5 hours



### III. Reference Materials
A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1, Flight Manual Performance Data



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 B. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 C. AF IMT 4089, KC-10 TOLD Card Worksheet



### V. Student Preparation/Review
A. Introduction to KC-10 Tak eoff Performance CBT Lesson B. Introduction to KC-10 Performance Workbook C. KC-10 Takeoff and Emergency Return Data Computation CBT Lesson D. Takeoff and Landing Data Workbook E. Review T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1-1 1. Section I, Introduction 2. Section II, Engine Data 3. Section III, Takeoff 4. Section IX, Approach and Landing 5. Section X, Mission Planning.

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-1 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course 

## Objectives

1. Complete a KC-10 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Data (TOLD) Card.

2. Compute an All Engine Climb Gradient for each of the following cases.

a. Prior to Pressure Height for Acceleration.

b. After Pressure Height for Acceleration.

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-2 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


# Part I

OBSTACLE CLEARANCE

The Introduction to KC-10 Takeoff Perform ance workbook (W831) discusses the basic obstacle and climb segments fo r the KC-10. Refer to the obstacle data worksheet, and review the calculations required when an obstacle is present in your departure path. The obstacle clearance worksheet, on the revers e side of the AF IMT 4089, is divided into three sections. Section 1, Conditions, allows you to list the takeoff conditions needed to compute the obstacle cl earance data. Section 2, Si mplified Solution, allows you to perform the calculations to determine if the obstacle is going to be a factor or not. If the obstacle can be cleared after performi ng the simplified solution, no further obstacle clearance calculations need be performed. The third section, Optimized Solution, allows you to perform runway r eductions to increase the obstacle distance. The Optimized Solution Section also cont ains the appropriate notes for obstacle clearance data calculations. The completion of the worksheet is optional but assists greatly in keeping the data in order when runway cutbacks are required.

Now look at some of the calc ulations required. OBST HT (AGL) as described in Note 1 is the obstacle height above Mean Sea Level minus the departure end of runway (DER) elevation. If the runway has no slope, or an uphill slope, use the published field elevation. If the r unway has a downhill slope, and the depar ture end of runway elevation is not known, the DER elevation may be ca lculated using the formula in Note 1B.

Example: Runway Length 10,000'; Runway Slope 0.8% 

## ↑ ;; Field elevation 365' (MSL); Obstacle Height 435' (MSL)

OBST HT (AGL) = 435 - [365 - (10,000 X 0.8 / 100)] OBST HT (AGL) = 150'

150‘ is the obstacle height above the liftoff end of the runway and is entered in the OBST HT block in the Condition Secti on of the Obstacle Clearance Worksheet.

The Climbout Slope corre ction is listed in Note 2. It is used to correct the obstacle height versus the obstacle distan ce from the liftoff end of the runway. This is calculated by either using the Climbout Slope Correction grid in the Performanc e Manual, (fig 3-9, Sheet 1), for an obstacle dist ance of up to 4,000', or by 24' for each 1% of downhill slope.

Example: Runway Slope 0.8% 

## ↓ ; Downhill Slope Correction = 24 X 0.8% = 19'

19' is entered in the Downhi ll Slope Correction blocks in both the simplified and optimized solution sections.

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-3 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

When computing the Climb Gradient Required, always use the most limiting flap correction. In this example, 25 ° flaps is the worst case, so if the flap setting is less, there is an additional margin of safety built into the computations. Also, the climb gradient depicted on t he climbout flight path charts are GROSS climb gradients, not NET. So use the charts, the Climb Gradient Required cannot be calculated using the 40:1 rule. If the climb gradient exceeds 9.0, a runway reduc tion is required to increase the obstacle distance, thus allowing the gradient to be lowered to 9.0.

Example: Obstacle Height (AGL ) = 75'; Obstacle Distance = 1,000'; Runway Available 10,000'

The climb gradient exceeds 9. 0. The Runway Availabl e will have to be reduced 750' (corrected for 25 ° flaps). This would make the new Runway Available 9,250', and the Obstacle Distance 1,750'.

When working the optimized solution you may c ontinue to cutback the runway until you either calculate a MTOGW (Maximum Takeo ff Gross Weight) that equals or exceeds the Gross Weight, or if computing a maximu m ACL (Allowable Cargo Load) weight, until the MTOGW starts to decrease.

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-4 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Min Climb Rate

Using the WAPEX-ONE as an example

TRAVIS AFB WAPEX-ONE DEPARTURE (RWY 21R)

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-5 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

This SID has a minimum climb block.

1. Notes to the min climb rate block.

a. TACAN is available so use the @ column to get a min climb rate of 250ft/NM at 60 knots.

b. Note below the min climb rate blo ck requires the min climb out rate to be maintained until reaching 4100 ft.

2. Go to T.O. 1-1C-10(K)A-1-1 Fi g 3-8, Minimum Climb Gradient Chart.

a. End of Restriction height (AGL) = Top of Min Climb Restriction (MSL) – Rwy Departure End Field Elev. For this example > 1505.

b. Read over to 250ft/NM column and ob serve a min climb rate of 7.16 and a RWY cutback of 573 ft. fr om the RWY length. Add the normal 300 ft. lineup distance for total cutback distance.

3. Calculate TOLD using the above data.

ALL ENGINE CLIMB GRADIENT

Charts are provided for an ALL ENGINE CLIM B GRADIENT. There are two charts; one for if the level off altitude is prior to Pressure Height for Acceleration and the other is for after Pressure Height for Acceleration. The next chart in the performance manual will convert this percentage to a FT/NM. These c harts are only used if you have a standard instrument departure (SID) require ment or a hold down altitude.

This data will not be used to determine obstac le clearance capabili ties in lieu of the engine out climb gradient data.

The All Engine Climb Gr adient Takeoff Rated Thrust char t (figure 3-40) is used when the all engine climb requi rement ends at or below pressure height for acceleration. It measures all engine clim b gradient with the gear fully retr acted, flaps and slats in the takeoff configuration, all engines operating at takeoff thrust, and climbout speed at V 2 + 10 Knots.

The All Engine Climb Gradient, Maximum Climb Thrust Chart (figure 3-41) is normally used to verify the all engine climb gradient at the top of the all e ngine climb restriction but may be used at any altitude above accele ration height. When an all engine climb requirement ends above pressure height for a cceleration the all engine climb gradient is measured with the flaps and slats retracted, all engines operating at maximum climb thrust, and climbout speed at V SR

.

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-6 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Given the following:

Problem 1

SID level off altitude of 1400’ Press Height for Accel. 1480’ Outside Air Temperature of 20 ° C Pressure Altitude SL Gross Weight 440,000 Takeoff Flaps Setting 20 Ice Protection OFF

Climb Gradient Climb Gradient (FT/NM)

Problem 2

SID level off altitude of 6000’ Press Height for Accel. 1480’ Outside Air Temperature of 20 ° C Pressure Altitude SL Gross Weight 440,000 Takeoff Flaps Setting 20 Ice Protection OFF

Climb Gradient Climb Gradient (FT/NM)

These Climb Gradients (FT/NM) should be equal to or higher than the required gradients at the top right corner of the SIDs.

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-7 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course


## Part II

WORKSHOP EXERCISES

1. GIVEN:

Gross Weight Compute MTOGW Takeoff CG 20.0% OAT 20 ° C Dew Point T Anti-ice OFF Pressure Altitude +3500’ Wind Direction CALM Wind Velocity 0 Runway Heading 030 ° Runway Length 11,500' RCR 23 RSC 0 Slope 0.8% 5 Field Elevation 3526’ at brake release/departure end unknown. Obstacle Height 3542’ Obstacle Distance 3750’ Air Conditioning OFF Reverse Thrust YES

Compute Takeoff Performance

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-8 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-9 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 3 FIQ-E850-SG 1-74-10 01 JUL 13KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-1 01 OCT 10 

# Electrical Abnormal Procedures I

Lesson introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to introduce you to the Electrical Abnormal Checklist procedures. It discusses general procedures of the emergency and abnormal checklists and the electrical abnormal checklist procedures.



### II. Duration

- 1.0 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Electrical Abnormal Procedures I CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1) 1. Section II, Emergency Procedures a. Introduction 2. Section IIA, Abnormal Procedures a. Introduction b. Electrical (1) APU Generator Off Lt On (AC Load Zero) (2) Eng Gen Off Lt On (AC Load Zero) (3) Gen Fail Light On (Eng or APU) (4) Gen Freq Hi (5) AC Bus Tie Isol Lt(s) On (6) CSD Oil Outlet Temp Hi (7) CSD Oil Press Lo Light OnKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-2 01 OCT 10 

# Electrical Abnormal Procedures I

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson introduces you to the el ectrical abnormal checklist procedures. It begins with general procedure s of the emergency and abnormal checklists, and then discusses the electrical abnormal checklist procedures. After discussing the flow and details of these checklists, there will be an end of lesson test.

B. Objectives

1. Identify general characteri stics of emergency and abnormal procedures checklists.

2. Identify the characteristics of electrical system malfunctions and their respective abnormal procedure.

II. PRESENTATION

A. Electrical Abnormal Procedures 1

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

B. Emergency and Abnormal Checklist Procedures

1. Introduction

2. General Concepts

3. Crew Coordination

a. Crew Coordination

b. Priority

c. Responsibility

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 2KC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-3 01 OCT 10 d. Responsibility

4. Checklist Format – Decision Path

a. Checklist Format - Decision Path

b. Memory items

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3

5. Detection

a. Embedded Quiz Question 4

6. Detection

7. Checklist Procedures

a. Embedded Quiz Question 5

8. Checklist Procedures

9. Summary

C. Electrical Abnormal Checklist Procedures

1. Introduction

2. APU GEN OFF LIGHT ON

a. Indications

b. Reset Procedures

c. Light Out - Volt/Freq Norm

d. Light Off - Load Norm

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 2

3. ENG GEN OFF LIGHT ON

a. Indications

b. Notes

c. Reset ProceduresKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-4 01 OCT 10 d. Freq> 420 Hz or <380 Hz

e. Volt Meter Within Limits

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3

4. GEN FAIL LIGHT ON

a. Indications

b. Note

c. Gen Fail Reset Button

d. Gen Fail Lt Not Off

(1) Gen Fail Lt Not Off

(2) GEN FAIL LIGHT ON (ENG OR APU)

e. Diode Failure

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 4

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 5

5. GEN FREQ HI

a. Indications

b. Procedures

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 6

6. AC BUS TIE ISOL LIGHT(S) ON

a. Indications

b. All 3 Bus Tie Isol Lts On

c. All 3 Bus Tie Isol Lts Not On

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 7

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 8

7. CSD OIL OUTLET TEMP HI

a. IndicationsKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-5 01 OCT 10 b. First two Steps/Temp Stabilized

c. Temp Not Stabilized

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 9

8. CSD OIL PRESS LO LIGHT ON

a. Indications/All Gen’s Available

b. All Gen’s Not Available

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 10

9. Summary

III. EXAMKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

Original FIQ-C311-SG 1-75-6 01 OCT 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-1 01 JUL 11 

# Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures

Lesson Introduction

I. Purpose - The purpose of this lesson is to discuss Air Conditioning System Abnormal Procedures.



### II. Duration - 0.8 hour



### III. Reference Materials A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1, Flight Manual



### IV. Equipment and Materials A. Learning Center CBT Workstation B. Air Conditioning Abno rmal Procedures CBT Lesson C. Writing Material



### V. Student Preparation/Review A. T.O. 1C-10(K)A-1 1. Section IIA, Abnormal Procedures - Air Conditioning a. Avionic Flow Off Light On b. Center Access Compartm ent Flow Off Light On c. Duct-Avionic Compartment Overheat Light On d. Trim Air Inoperative e. INS Flow OFF Light On f. Pack Off Light On g. Ram Air Ventilation System Operation h. Air Conditioning Trim Ai r Pressure High Light OnKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-2 01 JUL 11 

# Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures

Student Outline

I. INTRODUCTION

A. This lesson discusses Air Conditioni ng Abnormal Procedures. The lesson covers eight procedures which include Avionic Flow OFF Light On, Center Accessory Compartment Flow OFF Li ght On, Duct-Avionic Compartment Overheat Light On, Trim Air Inoperativ e, INS Flow OFF Light On, Pack OFF Light On, Ram Air Ventilation S ystem Operation, and Air Cond Trim Air Pressure High Light On. The le sson will be followed by a multiple choice test.

B. Objective

1. Identify the characteristics of Ai r Conditioning S ystem malfunctions and their respective abnormal procedures.

II. PRESENTATION

1. Introduction

2. Objectives

A. Air Conditioning Abnormal Procedures

1. Avionic Flow OFF Light ON

a. Indications

b. Aircraft Inflight

c. Aircraft on Ground

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 1

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 2

2. CAC Flow OFF Light On

a. Indications

b. Aircraft InflightKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-3 01 JUL 11 c. Aircraft on Ground

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 3

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 4

3. Duct-Avionic Compt Ovht Lt ON

a. Indications

b. Trim Air Switch

c. Avionics Overheat

d. Duct Overheat

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 5

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 6

4. Trim Air Inoperative

a. Embedded Quiz Question 7

5. INS Flow OFF Light ON

a. Indications

b. MSG Annunciation

c. INU Status

d. INS Switch

e. Mode Selector

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 8

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 9

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 10

6. Pack OFF Light ON

a. Indications

b. Pressure Problem

c. Pack Temp Valve CheckKC-10 Aircrew Training System Initial Qualification Course

CH 1 FIQ-C322-SG 1-76-4 01 JUL 11 d. Pack Selector Manual

e. Thermostats/Fuse Plugs

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 11

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 12

7. Ram Air Ventilation System Operation

a. Description

b. Aircraft Depressurization

c. Notes

d. Outflow Valve Full Open

e. Ram Air Activation

f. Air Conditioning Doors

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 13

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 14

(3) Embedded Quiz Question 15

(4) Embedded Quiz Question 16

8. Air Cond Trim Air Pressure High Light ON

a. Indications

b. Left Trim Air Valve

c. Right Trim Air Valve

(1) Embedded Quiz Question 17

(2) Embedded Quiz Question 18

9. Summary

III. Exam